THE REPUBLIC OF IRAQ

MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITY (MOE)

ENERGY DISTRIBUTION OFFICE

Construction of 33/11Kv GIS Substations

(2 x 31.5 MVA)

Section (1)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

D-01C Jan 2016

 THE GOVERNMENT OF THE REPUBLIC OF

IRAQ MINISTRY OF ELECTRICITY

Construction of 33/11kV GIS Substations

Section 1 Technical Specification

2
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
PART 1: 33/ 11 KV Gas insulated Switchgear (GIS)

1.0 SCOPE

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 General

3.2 service condition

3.3

3.4 Switchgear Assembly

3.5 Main Bus Conductors and Connections

3.6 Power Circuit Breaker

3.7 Disconnector and Grounding Switch

3.8 Cable Compartment

3.9 Instrument Transformers

3.10 SF6 Gas System Requirements

3.11 Low Voltage Compartment

3.12 Relays, Meters and Instruments

3.13 External Cabling

3.14 Interface

3.15 Interlocks and Safety Features

3.16 DC Control Power

3.17 Wiring and Terminal Blocks

3.18 Device Identification

3.19 Nameplates

3.20 Grounding

3.21 Accessories

3.22 Drawings

4.0 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

5.0 TESTS

3
PART 2 : 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA Power Transformer

2.1 General

2.2

2.3 Cable Boxes(Air insulated type)

2.4

2.5

2.6 Tolerance

2.7 Labels,

2.8 On load tap changer

2.9 Control and instrument wiring and terminal boards

2.10

2.11 , temperature rise and overload

2.12 Short circuit guarantee

2.13

2.14

2.15 Earthing resister and others of Transformer Neutral

2.16 Spare parts and special tools

PART 3:- Remote control and indication

3.1 General

3.2

3.2.1 Controls/Commands

3.2.2 Status/

3.2.3 Alarms

3.2.4 Analogue Measurements

3.3 Technical Requirements of transducers

3.4 Humidity and Temp. Measurement

PART 4:

4.1 General

4.2 Design Principles

4.3 System Architecture

4.4

4
4.5 System Capacity

4.6 System Performance

4.7

4.8 Hardware Requirements

4.9 Maintenance and Spares

4.10

4.11 Warranty and Support

4.12

4.13 Overall Signal Point List

PART 5:

5.1 General

5.2 Remote Terminals

5.3 Coaxial cable for Antenna feeder

5.4 Antenna

5.5 Tower

PART 6: 11/0.416kV Auxiliary transformer

PART 7:

7.1 General

7.2 110V System

7.3 Deleted

PART 8:

PART 9 : Cables

9.1 General

9.2 Medium Voltage Power Cable

9.3 Low voltage Power Cables

9.4 Control & Auxiliary Cables

9.5 of cables and wires

9.6

9.7 Cable trays, racks, ladders and associated materials

9.8

9.9

5
PART 10 : Earthing System

PART 11: Inspection and Tests

11.1 General

11.2 Inspection and Tests

11.3 Test at manufacture's work

11.4 Site test

6
 Civil Specification

1. General

1.1 Scope of Work:

1.1.1 Extent of Work

1.1.2 & Consultant / Contractor:

1.1.3 Standards and Design Criteria

1.1.4 Design Loading

1.1.5

1.1.6

1.1.7

1.1.8

1.2

1.2.1 General

1.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

1.2.3 Stripping of Topsoil

1.3

1.3.1 General

1.3.2

1.3.3

1.3.4

1.3.5 Disposal of Excavated Materials

1.4 Fill and Back Fill

1.4.1 Materials

1.4.2 Workmanship

1.5 Concrete and Asphalt Paving, Finish Grading and Reinstatement

1.5.1 General

1.5.2 Concrete Paved Service Roads

1.5.3 General Site Grading and Landscaping

1.5.4 Asphalt Paved Access Road

1.5.5 Kerbs and Paving Slabs

7
 1.5.6 Reinstatement

1.6 Building and Associated Work

1.7 Oil Containment for Transformer Bunds, and Firewalls

1.8 Concrete

1.8.1 Design, Materials and Workmanship

1.8.2

1.8.3 Ready Mixed Concrete

1.8.4 Cements - General

1.8.5 Cement Total Alkali Content

1.8.6 Cement Delivery and Storage

1.8.7 Cement Test Certificates and Samples

1.8.8 Aggregates General

1.8.9 Aggregate Chemical Requirements

1.8.10 Aggregate Storage

1.8.11

1.8.12 Water for Concrete

1.8.13 Admixtures

1.8.14 Plant

1.8.15 Concrete Strength Requirements

1.8.16 Concrete Mixing

1.8.17 Workability

1.8.18

1.8.19 Placing

1.8.20

1.8.21 Vibrators

1.8.22

1.8.23

1.8.24

1.8.25 Curing

1.8.26 Trial Mixes

1.8.27 Works Test Cubes

8
 1.8.28

1.8.29 Failure of Concrete to Meet Test Requirements

1.8.30 Formwork

1.8.31 Removal of Formwork

1.8.32 Finishes of Concrete

1.8.33 Formed Finishes for Concrete

1.8.34 Unformed Finishes to Concrete

1.8.35 Surface Treatments

1.8.36 Reinforcement

1.8.37

1.8.38 Bar Bending Schedules

1.8.39

1.8.40

1.8.41 ather

1.8.42

1.8.43 Cable Trenches, Draw pits and Duct Banks

1.9 Water Supply, Drainage and Disposal

1.9.1 Water Storage Tank

1.9.2 Drainage and Sewage Disposal

1.10 Boundary Walls

1.10.1 General

1.10.2. Boundary Wall

1.10.3 Gates

2. Architectural Works

2.1 General

2.2 Scope of Work

2.3 Materials

2.4 Signage

2.5 Masonry

2.6 Cement Rendering

9
2.7 Roofing

2.8 Precast Concrete

2.9 Aluminum Windows

2.10 Steel Door and Frame

2.11 Door Hardware

2.12 Gypsum Plaster

2.13 Tile Work

2.14 Carpentry

2.15 Miscellaneous Metal

2.16 Bronze Plaque

2.17

2.18 Furnishings

3. Building Services

3.1 General:

3.2 Scope of Works

3.3 Design Standards for Building Services

3.4 Electrical Power Supplies

3.5 r

3.5.1 General

3.5.2 Scope of Supply and Services

3.5.3 Equipment Requirements

3.5.4 Cables

3.5.5 Socket Outlets and Plugs

3.5.6

3.6 Earthing and Bonding

3.7

3.8

3.8.1 General

3.8.2 Scope of Supply and Services

3.8.3 Equipment Requirements

3.8.4 Control Panel Provisions

10
 3.8.5 Alarm Signals to Control Centre

3.8.6

3.8.7 Manual Call Points

3.8.8 Alarm Bells and Sounders

3.9

3.9.1 General

3.9.2 Scope of Supply and Services

3.9.3 Equipment Requirements

3.10 Building Arrangements

3.11 Plumbing Services

3.11.1 General

3.11.2 Pipe Materials

3.11.3

3.11.4 Plumbing Fixtures

3.11.5

3.12

3.13 , & Air Conditioning

3.13.1 Conditioning

3.13.2 ,

3.13.3 Scope of Works

3.13.4

3.13.5 irements

3.13.6 External Louvers

3.14

3.14.1 General

3.14.2

3.14.3 Special Equipment and Tools

3.14.4 Spare Parts

3.14.5 Packaging, Shipping and Transport

3.14.6 Training

3.14.7

11
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
PART 1: 33/ 11 KV Gas insulated Switchgear (GIS)

1.0 SCOPE

This MOE Specification specifies the minimum technical requirements for design, engineering,
manufacture, inspection, testing and performance of Metal-enclosed Gas Insulated Medium Voltage
Switchgear with /33 11kv SS equipment intended to be used in the system of the MOE ,IRAQ.

The contract shall include all works and materials needed in each substation in accordance with the
contract and shall include but not limited to the following:

(a) Option 1: 33kv switchgear contain:

1- two of 33kv incomer panel.

2- two of 33kv outgoing transformer panel.

3- one bus – section panel..

4- one of bus riser panel.

2: 33kv switchgear contain:

1-- two of 33kv incomer panel.

2- two of 33kv outgoing transformer panel.

3- one bus – section panel..

4- one of bus riser panel.

5- two of 33kv outgoing panel.

3: 33kv switchgear contain:

1- two of 33kv incomer panel.

2- two of 33kv outgoing transformer panel.

OR two separate 33kv of (incoming / outgoing) panel.

(b) 2 sets of 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA Power transformers.

(c) 2 sets of 11kV Neutral earthing resistor with lightning arrester & load break switch.

(d) 20 circuits of 11kV switchgear.

(e) 1 set of 11/0.416kV 250 kVA auxiliary transformer.

(f) 1 set of DC system (one DC 110 , DC

distribution panel).

12
 (g) 1 set of 400/230 .

(h) MV/LV/Control cables and cable trays, conduit pipe and fittings

(i) Earthing system

(j) Tools and handling equipment.

(k) Specified spare parts for five years normal operation.

(l) Recommended spare parts( Optional Work, will be supplied upon Owner request)

(m) 1 set of Substation Control System (SCS), communication equipments and 1 set of DAS
panels.

2.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

The latest revision/amendments of the following Codes and Standards shall be applicable for the
equipment/material:

2.1 IEC 61892-1 Instrument Transformers, Par 1: General Requirements

2.2 IEC 61869-2 Instrument Transformers, Part 2: Additional requirements for

Current Transformers

2.3 IEC 61869-3 Instrument Transformers, Part 3:

Inductive Voltage Transformers

2.4 IEC 60044-7 Instrument transformers- Part 7: Electronic Voltage

Transformers

2.5 IEC 60044-8 Instrument transformers- Part 8: Electronic Current Transformers

2.6 IEC 60051 ating Analog Electrical Measuring

Instruments and their Accessories. Part: 1
Requirements for all parts

2.7 IEC 60073 Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and
identification-coding principles for Indication Devices and Actuators

2.8 IEC 60112

comparative tracking indices of solid insulating materials

2.9 IEC 60255-21-1 , shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring Relays
and Protection Equipment- 1: Vibration Tests (sinusoidal)

2.10 IEC 60376 of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) for use in
electrical equipment

2.11 IEC 60480 Guidelines for the checking and treatment of Sulphur
Hexafluoride (SF6)
and its re-use

2.12 IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code)

13
2.13 IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear – General rules

2.14 IEC 60947-5-1 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control gear, Part 5: Control Circuit
Devices and Switching Elements, 1: Electromechanical
Control circuit devices

2.15 IEC 62271-1 High-voltage Switchgear and Control gear-Part 1: Common

Specifications

2.16 IEC 62271-100 High-voltage Switchgear and Control gear Part 100: High- voltage
alternating-current circuit-breakers IEC 62271-101 High-voltage
Switchgear and Control gear-Synthetic Testing

2.17 IEC 62271-102 High-voltage Switchgear and Control gear-Part 102:

Alternating current Disconnectors and Earthing switches

2.18 IEC 62271-200 AC Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Control gear for Rated Voltages
above 1kV and up to and including 52 Kv

2.19 ANSI C37.06 AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current

Basis-Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities

2.20 ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2 Metal-clad Switchgear

2.21 IEEE C57.13.2 Conformance Test Procedures for Instrument Transformers

2.22 ASTM D 2472

14
3.0 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 General

The switchgear shall be natural cooled SF6 gas insulated metal-enclosed type with
modular design for indoor service and shall be of manufacturer's standard design which
meets or exceeds the requirements of this Specification in all respects.

3.2 :

The service and climatic conditions under which all equipment are required to operate
satisfactorily are as follows:

No. Item Description Specification

Maximum outdoor peak- in shade(for

+55 °C
about 6 hours per day), which shall be considered
as the maximum design ambient temperature

Maximum daily average +40 °C

1 Ambient temperature Maximum yearly average +30 °C
Minimum yearly average - 10 °C
Maximum temperature of all metal +80 °C

part exposed in direct sunshine

Maximum ground temp. at depth of 1 +35 °C

m
Maximum 92% at 40°C
2 Air Humidity
Minimum 12%
Yearly average 44 %
3 Wind Max. wind velocity for design purpose 145 km/hr

or 40.2m/sec
Altitudes above sea Maximum 1,000 m
4
Minimum 0m
Level
5 Barometric pressure Yearly average 0.101 MPa
Maximum 500 mm
Rain fall (Annual Total
6 Minimum 50 mm
Rainfall) Maximum in one day 72 mm
Yearly average 150.8 mm
Average number of dust storms 21.5
Sand and Thunder
7
(days/year)
Storms Average number of thunder 15

storms(days/year)
8 Pollution Level HEAVY airborne contamination
9 Ice loading, radial NIL NIL
thickness (mm)

10 Seismic Loading Uniform Building Code Zone 3

15
3.3

3.3.1 Specification of Main and Auxiliary Electrical System

400V
No. Item 33kV system 11 kV system system
1. Rated voltage 36 kV 12 kV 440V
400V
2. Nominal voltage 33kV 11kV + 6%, -10%
3. Number of phases 3 3 3
4. Frequency 50Hz 50Hz 50Hz
Impulse with stand voltage
for bushing 170kV 75kV N.A
5.
for winding 170kV 75kV N.A
for neutral 170kV 75kV N.A
Power frequency withstands
test voltage (for 1 min.)
6. for bushing 70kV 28kV 3kV
for winding 70kV 28kV 3kV
for neutral 70kV 28kV 3kV
7. Rated breaking capacity 25 kA 25 kA 35kA
8. Short time current 25kA/1 sec 25kA/1 sec 30kA/1 sec
Rated voltage and nominal discharge current of lightning arresters
On phases 36 kV / 10kA 12kV/10kA N.A
9. On neutral 21kV/10kA 7.5kV/10kA N.A
340 mm or
adding barriers
Minimum clearance in air
in case of lower 120 mm
between phase and earth
10. clearance (*1) (air cable box) 20 mm
(air cable box)
340 mm or
adding barriers
Minimum clearance in air in case of lower 120 mm
11. between different phases clearance (*1) (air cable box) 25 mm
(air cable box)
Minimum creepage distance 576 mm 192 mm
12. of insulator and bushing (16mm/kV) (16mm/kV) N.A
Earthed through
Zigzag
Neutral
transformer
earthed with
located at 4 wire with
21.1 ohm NER
remote neutral
13. fault current to
132/33kV solidly
Substation to 300Amps/
Earthing system earthed
limit the earth Neutral
fault current to Unearthed.
1000A.

3.3.2
in the Data Schedule.

16
 3.3.3 All equipment and components of the switchgear including bus support insulators
shall be free of partial discharges when operated at rated voltage.

3.3.4 . Degree of
Protection to all SF6 gas enclosed compartments shall be IP65 and for all air insulated
compartments it shall be IP4X as per IEC 60529.

3.3.5 A warning sign shall be fastened by screws or rivets on each panel where accessibility
is denied on live condition.

3.3.6 Each switchgear panel shall be provided with hinged front door(s) with lock(s).
Rear shall be with hinged door fastened with bolts instead of lock(s) or removable
bolted panel cover. Cable compartment front access shall be with door and lock or
bolted removable panel cover.

3.3.7 The cable compartment enclosure design shall allow clear access to the cable
termination compartment. The entry of primary cables to the enclosure shall be from
the rear bottom of the switchgear. Adequate clearance shall be provided to
permit high voltage testing of the complete installation and of individual cables.

3.3.8
caused by the internal fault in the switchgear, the hot gas or vapor produced by
internal arc shall not endanger the switchgear operators and shall not enter into
adjacent panels thereby preventing spreading of the fault. If required, integrated arc
duct shall be provided to direct gas/vapor away from operators and prevent solid
particles from uncontrolled spreading. The pressure surge shall be cooled in the
absorber before its release into the switchgear room.

3.3.9 -proof and shall be provided with filter to

minimize ingress of dust.

3.4 Switchgear Assembly

3.4.1 The switchgear assembly shall be of single bus bar type and suitable for extension at
both ends without cutting and drilling. Welding is also prohibited for field assembly
of the cubicles. It shall be possible to dismantle and remove any middle panel
from the switchgear line-up without dismantling/removing the adjacent switchgear
panel.

3.4.2 Each switchgear feeder panel shall consist of bus bar, disconnector, earthing switch,
circuit breaker, current transformer, voltage transformer (if specified), cable
compartment, low voltage compartment with control devices, protection devices as
per the protection requirement and gas monitoring system.

3.4.3 Bus bar, circuit breaker,disconnector and earthing switch shall be

6. Each element shall be in independent modules
(Independent compartment) and safe to touch and fully ensure operational security
and personnel safety under all normal and fault conditions. Combination of
disconnector and earthing switch (3-position switch) in one module or busbar,
disconnect and earthing switch in one module shall also be considered. Gas

17
 compartments other than specified above may be accepted if the manufacturer
proves with adequate documents that the equipment have superior quality, equivalent
or better electrical and mechanical properties in comparison with the other design.
The switchgear design shall have proven that the design will withstand the service
conditions of IRAQ Distribution system as stipulated in specification.

3.4.4 Current transformer and voltage transformer are installed outside the gas zone.

3.4.5 Circuit breaker, disconnector and grounding switches shall be operated from the front
of the panel and shall be accessed from outside of enclosure.

3.4.6 Doors and panels shall have sufficient thickness and rigid to support devices, and
doors shall be easy to open and close.

3.4.7 The door of the low voltage compartment shall have a door stopper to hold the door
in the “open” position.

3.4.8 The switchgear enclosure and the internal barriers shall be adequately rigid and able
to withstand short circuit stresses and arc-proof tests as per IEC 62271-200 of identical
switchgear units.

3.4.9 Site assembly of modules/panels shall be simple and rigid.

3.4.10 Mimic diagram shall be provided on the front panel of the switchgear.

3.5 Main Bus Conductors and Connections

3.5.1 The main bus conductors and connections shall be made of electrolytic grad
copper. Vertical sections (tee-off droppers) shall be connected to the main busbar
by means of sub-busbar. Interconnection of main busbars in each switchgear
panel shall be plug-in type or equivalent means for easy installation.

3.5.2 Bus bars shall be single phase enclosure with independent SF6 gas insulated
module with provision for extending at either end without the need for cutting or
drilling the copper bar.

3.5.3 Provision shall be made to allow the thermal expansion of the busbar
conductors due to normal load current and short circuit currents.

3.5.4 The bus bar and its connections shall be able to withstand the mechanical stresses
under the specified short circuit conditions.

3.6 Power Circuit Breaker

3.6.1 Power circuit breakers shall be single throw, vacuum type fixed and suitable for
local and remote control. The circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 62271-100 or
ANSI C37.06.

3.6.2 Power circuit breaker shall be an independent module in SF6 gas medium.

3.6.3 The circuit breaker shall be single pole or three pole and designed for
simultaneous three (3) pole operation.

18
3.6.4 Live parts of circuit breaker shall be in SF6 gas compartment and operating
mechanism shall be accessible from outside the gas compartment.

3.6.5 The circuit breaker operating sequence (operating duty cycle) shall be O-0.3s-CO-
15s-CO as per data schedule.

3.6.6 The operating mechanism shall be of the motor-charged spring-operated stored

energy type suitable for rapid/fast auto-reclosing of the circuit breaker.

3.6.7 The operating mechanism shall employ a 110 V DC motor to charge the
closing spring(s) that retains this stored energy until a closing operation is made.
The motor shall operate satisfactorily at voltage ranges between 90V DC and
140 V DC. The energy storage capability of the mechanism must be sufficient for
an O-CO operation at rated short circuit current or at related required capabilities
specified in Data Schedule. Recharging of closing spring shall occur automatically
as soon as the closing spring is released.

3.6.8 Means for manual spring charging shall be provided with the circuit breaker both
in the "Open" and "Closed" positions. The spring charging motor DC circuit shall
be automatically cut off during manual charging or suitable means of
protection shall be provided to the manual charging mechanism to ensure the
safety of operator during the restoration of power supply.

3.6.9 The operating mechanism shall be electrically and mechanically "trip free". Anti-
pump features shall be provided.

3.6.10 each circuit breaker shall be provided with one (1) closing coil and one (1)
electrically trip coils.

3.6.11 The control power supply to trip and closing coil circuits shall be provided with
isolating switch. One auxiliary contact of this switch shall be wired to alarm when
the switch is in open position. Both positive and negative poles of the close coil
shall be switched.

3.6.12 Circuit breakers shall be designed so that they cannot be closed unless the closing
spring is fully charged.

3.6.13 Each circuit breaker shall be provided with a visible mechanical position
indicating device. The device shall be positively driven in both directions to show
whether the breaker is in the "open" or "closed" position and shall be identified
with color coding "Green" and "Red", respectively with white lettering. Similar
positively driven indicating device shall be provided to indicate the state of the
spring. It shall indicate "SPRING CHARGED" when the spring is in a condition
to close the breaker and "SPRING DISCHARGED" when the spring is not in a
condition to close the breaker.

3.6.14 The circuit-breaker and its operating mechanism have to perform the number of
breaking operations at rated current and at rated short-circuit current
without maintenance per relevant IEC or ANSI standards. Each circuit breaker
shall have a mechanical 5-digit operation counter which is not possible to
reset and shall be readable from the front of the switchgear.

3.6.15 Each breaker shall be provided with minimum ‘four NO’ and ‘four NC’
potential-free auxiliary contacts, mounted on the breaker for remote
interlocking service. In addition ‘four spare NO’ and ‘four spare NC’ contacts shall
be provided on each breaker for use on SER (Sequence of Events Recorder) and

19
 SCADA. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 A at 110 V dc. Contact surfaces shall
be of a metal, which is not subject to oxidization leading to an increase in
contact resistance. They shall be mounted so as to be readily accessible for
maintenance and designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and adjustment.

3.6.16 The number of operation for circuit breaker shall be 30000 11kv and
10000 for 33kv

3.7 Disconnector and Grounding Switch

3.7.1 Disconnector and Grounding/earthing switch shall be an independent element (unit)

or c /earthing Switch (3- position).

3.7.2 The disconnector and grounding/earthing switches shall be three (3) pole gang
operated, no-load break and single stroke type, shall generally comply with the
requirement of IEC 62271-102.

3.7.3 Live parts of disconnector and grounding/earthing switch shall be in SF6 gas
compartment and operating mechanism shall be accessible from outside the gas
compartment.

3.7.4 Disconnector shall be of class “M2” minimum and grounding/earthing switch of class
“E2” minimum as per IEC 62271-102.

3.7.5 The disconnector switch shall be with manual/

and equipped with adjustable, self-aligning, high pressure type silver-faced copper
contacts. The contacts shall be capable of carrying full rated and short circuit currents
without overheating or welding.

3.7.6
charging or suitable means of protection shall be provided to the manual operating
mechanism to ensure the safety of operator during the restoration of power supply.
Once initiated, the motor mechanism shall complete an open or close operation
without requiring the initiating contact to be held closed.

3.7.7 Motor operated Disconnector/earthing switch shall have manual operation facility.

3.7.8 -reflex
type insulated rod.

3.7.9 Grounding switch shall be with manual/motor drive having full short circuit fault
making capability.

3.7.10 Disconnector and grounding/earthing switches shall have mechanical position

indicator for the main contact open and closed position, directly coupled to the driving
shaft. The marking shall be in white letters as “Open” or “O” on a green background
and “Closed” or “C” on a red background. Position indication shall be visible
without the need to open switchgear compartment doors.

3.7.11 Disconnector and grounding switches shall be provided with pad-locking facilities
to permit locking both in open and closed positions.

20
 3.7.12 Integral grounding switches shall be provided for incoming and outgoing feeders
and bus bars. Grounding/earthing switch and disconnector switch shall be provided
on both sides of bus-section circuit breaker.

3.7.13 Grounding shall be through grounding/earthing switch or through circuit breaker.

3.7.14 ll have an auxiliary switch

with contacts for interlocking, local mechanical on/off indication and remote on/off
indication.

3.8 Cable compartment

3.8.1 Cable compartment shall be Air Insulated.

3.8.2 /termination shall be done by cable socket and plug. The

terminations shall be suitable for copper.

3.8.3 Cable size up to 400 mm2 shall be able to terminate in the cable box. Provision
shall be made for connection of two or more cables per phase as per circuit capacity
(viz. transformer incomer, feeder, etc.).

3.8.4
primary injection with bus bar live are to be provided.

3.8.5 The height of the plug-in connection point shall be minimum 700 mm from cable box
bottom plate for clear access for cable installation and cable testing.

3.8.6 -
magnetic material. The bottom plate for outgoing feeder panels shall be of two pieces
with holes drilled for entry of cable. The bottom plate for incoming and station
service transformer panels shall be of a simple piece without any holes drilled.

3.8.7 Incoming / outgoing cable support and clamps, earthing busbar and fixing facility for
other accessories such as Voltage Transformer, current Transformer & lightning
arrester shall be provided in the cable compartment.

3.9 Instrument Transformers

3.9.1 Current Transformers

a. The mechanical and thermal current ratings of CTs shall be coordinated with the
momentary and short circuit current of the associated circuit breaker, respectively.

b. Switchgear shall be delivered with all CT secondary windings shorted out. All CT
secondary leads shall be wired out to terminal blocks. The secondary windings of
each CT shall be rated as specified in Data Schedule and shall be connected to
the ground bus by a direct copper connection, via a removable link at one point only.

21
 c. Relaying and metering accuracy class for standard burdens shall be as specified in
Data Schedule.

d. Primary and secondary terminals and polarity shall be marked per applicable
standards.

3.9.2 Voltage Transformers

a. Voltage transformers (VTs) shall be of standard three (3)-winding type for the voltage
class of the switchgear and shall have voltage marked. They shall have a voltage
factor of 1.2 1.9 for 8 hours, ratio and accuracy class for standard
burden as specified in Data Schedule.

b. VT shall be provided with isolating facility.

c. VT shall be located in a readily accessible place. VT shall be of electromagnetic epoxy

encapsulated dry type design per IEC 61869-3 and suitable for three-phase star
connection with star point solidly grounded. VT shall be provided in each bus
section and incoming feeders. VT primary connected through the power cable from
the main bus bar is not acceptable.

d. VTs shall have two (2) secondary windings. Secondary circuits of all VTs shall be
protected by miniature circuit breakers (MCB). MCB's shall have auxiliary contacts for
alarm indication. All secondary leads shall be terminated in the terminal blocks in low
voltage compartment.

e. Provisions shall be made for disconnecting the secondary circuit of VT when the
primary circuit is disconnected. Provision shall also be made for momentary
grounding of the primary winding during the disconnecting operation to
remove any residual charges from the windings.

3.10 SF6 Gas system Requirements

3.10.1 The SF6 gas shall conform to IEC 60376 or ASTM D2472.

3.10.2
to the degree of deterioration beyond which treatment or replacement of gas
would become necessary along with procedural instructions for gas treatment to
restore original quality.

3.10.3 The switchgear module/compartment shall be fully gas tight. The sealing system shall
ensure effective protection against ingress of moisture, dust and other contaminants
into gas compartments. All gas compartments shall contain suitable agent to
6 gas.

3.10.4 Each compartment shall be provided with safety devices (bursting disc) activated by
overpressure.

3.10.5 6 gas in each gas compartment shall not exceed 0.5%

per year.

22
3.10.6 The GIS enclosure shall be sectionalized for each equipment into modular units or
compartments, separated by solid gas barriers with an effective sealing system.
Each gas compartment shall be provided with self-closing non-return valves for
, 6
other section or loss of gas. Preferably busbar shall be segregated for each panel.

3.10.7 Gas barrier and sealing system shall have adequate mechanical strength to withstand
the dynamics forces caused by short circuits and effects of internal arc faults as well as
maximum pressure differential that could exist between adjoining compartments.

3.10.8 SF6 gas in each individual compartment shall be monitored by suitable temperature-
compensated pressure gauges (gas-density continuous monitoring) switches/relays
to monitor the loss of SF6 gas. The dial of the pressure gauges shall be graduated to
read pressures and colored green, yellow and red to indicate normal, Alarm Stage 1
(non-urgent) and Alarm Stage II (urgent) pressure conditions respectively. The gas-
density monitors shall be capable of being calibrated with the monitored equipment in
service. The indicator shall be visible and readable from finished ground level. Each
pressure switch shall be provided with two convertible potential-free auxiliary contacts
for two-stage alarm initiation. The alarm contacts shall be wired to the annunciator. It
shall be possible to test and replace each pressure gauge and the density switch/relay
with the GIS in service.

For SF6 Circuit Breaker the alarms shall be as follows:

Stage I: Alarm at 10% (and block breaker

closing) - (Refill stage).

Stage II: Alarm in the event of gas density falling below the minimum safe operating
limit (and block breaker tripping).

3.10.9 At each gas compartment, provisions shall be made for connecting moisture
measurement instrument and the gas service cart. The moisture content in the gas
shall not exceed 150 ppmv (parts per million per volume) in circuit breakers and
250 ppmv in other equipment. Provision for disconnection of gas pipelines shall be
incorporated. 100µm or smaller sintered stainless steel particles filter disk, suitable for
pressure involved shall be installed at the gas service connection.

3.10.10 All piping for SF6 gas and its fittings shall be made of copper, brass or stainless steel.

3.10.11 A colored diagram with legends showing various gas compartments, monitoring
system etc. together with normal and alarms ranges shall be mounted on the
switchgear.

3.10.12 The switchgear assembly supplies shall include:

a. 6 gas for the assembly, if required and in

addition, any gas lost during installation and commissioning procedures.

b. 10% supply of gas complete with containers and

monitoring equipment for use during the warranty period.

23
3.11 Low Voltage Compartment

The Low voltage compartment of the switchgear shall be provided, as applicable, with the
following:

1. One (1) Local/Remote selector switch. Provision shall be made for locking the switch in
either position.

2. One (1) circuit breaker control switch. (trip-

normal-close) with a spring return to normal and padlocking facility in the normal
position. The control switch shall follow the convention of closing the circuit breaker
in the clockwise direction.

3. Indicator lights shall be LED type to indicate the breaker status as follows:

-Red: breaker closed, one for each trip coil adjacent to the control switch

-Green: breaker open, one for closing coil adjacent to the control switch

For outgoing and station service feeder panels only, the red and green lights shall be wired in
series with the trip and close coils, respectively to supervise the status of each coil. For incomers and
bus tie breakers, the red and green light indications shall be achieved through the breaker auxiliary
switches. The healthiness of the breaker trip coils shall be monitored via the trip circuit supervision
relays which are located in the control room.

4. One (1) (1) electronic KWH meter with data saving and
remote communication facility for each incoming and outgoing feeder panel, and one (1)
voltmeter for each bus section shall be provided.

5. One (1) 230 Vac LED light. the light shall be controlled by toggle and door switch . switch
shall be identified with engraved or embossed nameplate

6. One (1) 230 Vac and designed for

continuous operation with a manual ON/OFF control switch.

7. One (1) 15A, 230Vac and one (1) 10A, 400Vac flush type, parallel slot, grounding type
convenient outlets shall be provided in the incoming and bus-tie breaker panels.

8. Lot, Nameplates

9. Lot, Relays and Relay manufacturer's test blocks. SCADA Interposing Relays for Trip and
Close.

10. The bus riser/metering panel shall contain one (1)

11. Indication lamps in addition to specified shall be provided on the front of transformer
and feeder panels and connected through capacitor voltage dividers to monitor the
cable circuits dead or live.

24
3.12 Relays, Meters and Instruments

3.12.1 Relays, meters and instruments shall be located in a low voltage compartment of
the same feeder breaker panel while for the other breaker panels, they shall be
installed in separate relay and control panels. outgoing

3.12.2 All protective relays shall be mounted in racks. If relays cannot be rack mounted they
may be flush mounted.

3.12.3 Target indicators shall be provided on all relays performing protective or tripping
functions. Relay contacts shall be self-aligning.

3.12.4 All meters shall be switchboard fixed-type and flush or semi-flush mounted.
Accuracy class of all digital meters shall be 0.5 per IEC Accuracy class of all revenue
meters shall be 0.2 .

3.12.5 The meters shall be fitted with dust and moisture proof covers and shall have non-
. Analog meters shall have 240°scale and dimensions 96 x 96mm.

3.12.6 Meters, instruments and indicating type transducers shall have test facilities
separate from protective relays, so that testing and calibration can be done without
equipment outages.

3.12.7 Upper edge of protective relays and meters shall be no higher than 2.2m to allow
convenient maintenance, inspection, target reset, and testing from ground level.

3.12.8 All accessories such as DC/DC converters and transducers shall be located inside the
panel.

3.12.9 For outgoing and station service feeder panels, each indicating light shall have a
current limiting resistor to facilitate replacing the bulb without activating the
respective trip/close coil. The rating of the resistor shall be selected to provide
adequate illumination of the lamp at normal operating conditions. Shorting of the lamp
terminals shall not damage the resistor itself or blow the control circuit fuses (or trip
the control circuit MCBs) considering that maximum DC control voltage is limited to
110% .
the trip coil to less than 25% of its minimum pick-up current.

3.12.10 The trip, close and spring charge circuit MCBs shall be located at the switchgear in
the LV compartment.

3.12.11 All switchgear MCBs shall have normally open auxiliary contacts. Each breaker shall
have its MCB contacts connected in series with the Trip Circuit 1
located on that breaker. Any MCB operation shall de-energize the breaker DC
supervision relay and provide an alarm.

3.12.12 In substations, with Substation Automation IEDs shall be installed in the LV

compartment. Control and Protection requirements, Communication protocol etc.
shall be as per relevant Material specification, IEC standards.

3.12.13 33kV low

voltage compartment, the effective protection equipment for each circuit should be as
indicated at the Single Line Diagram.

25
Note: The protection should be fully separated from the SCS system and all the signals from the
protection relay to the SCS should be done through dry contacts.

a. Overcurrent and Earth fault :

The Over Current and Earth Fault relays shall be from the numerical inverse definite
minimum (I.D.M.T.L) in the accordance with IEC 60225-151, Current / Time
characteristics of all relays shall cover the normal inverse, long inverse, very inverse,
extremely inverse, instaneous and definite time characteristics. Cable sealing boxes and/or
glands shall be supplied.

Auxiliary wiring, Relays, IED for SCS, port to region DCC, control switches, alarm lamps and
indicating instruments shall be provided with the switchboard.

b. Trip Circuit Supervision

Means shall be provided to continuously supervise the integrity of the circuit breaker
tripping circuits and to give alarm in case of having any fault in this circuit.

All protection systems shall be provided with an integral local operator interface facility to
enable communication with the relay without the use of external equipment. Any facilities provided
for connection to an external computer shall be an additional feature to the local operator interface.

c. Transformer Neutral point relay (SBEF)

This protection employed shall be of the numerical type including all standard characteristics
(i.e. de 10 sec) The relay shall be connected to the earthing resistance
current transformer and located at 33kV panel. Operation of this relay shall trip both the
33kV and 11kV transformer circuit breakers.

d. Transformer Neutral Over voltage relay

Th 11kV neutral of the

transformer. 11kV switch gear of the main
transformer.

3.12.14 11kV low

voltage compartment, the effective protection equipment for each circuit should be
as indicated at the Single Line Diagram.

a. The 11 kV Transformer side

The protection relays, a microprocessor-based numerical and multiple function type of relays is
preferred for availability and maintainability of relays:

1- The Over Current and Earth Fault relays shall be from the numerical inverse definite minimum
(I.D.M.T.L) in the accordance with IEC 60225-151, Current /
relays shall cover the normal inverse, long inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, instaneous
and definite time characteristics.

Note: A separate back-up protection with same above specifications above (Over Current and Earth
Fault relays) to be operated in case there is no 110 .

26
2- Biased differential relays for the transformers shall be designed in such a way that they shall not
operate on initial magnetization inrush current when the transformer is switched on no load. The
sensitivity shall be set in such a way that no fault tripping can occur on any tapping of the
transformer.

All over-current, earth-fault and differential relays shall be provided with suitable numbers of free
contacts for purpose of signaling etc.

3- Voltage earth fault relay: A voltage earth fault relay shall be provided for 11kV circuit of
11kV VT. This relay
should initiate alarm signal.

4- Power factor control relay.

b. 11

These circuits shall be protected by over current and earth fault relays whose specifications are the
same as above.

Under frequency relays

Load shedding devices shall trip outgoing feeders if frequency of system falls under 50Hz. The
protection consists of definite time lag under frequency relay, with at least four independent
45- 50Hz in 0.1Hz step, with time lag of 0-5 sec. of
precision electronic type relay. The relays should be connected to voltage transformer section of
11kV busbars .

Four Independent load shedding busbars corresponding to each “ stage 1”, “stage 2”, “stage 3” and
“stage 4” shall be provided to send tripping pulses to all circuit breakers of feeders connected to the
respective busbar of the stage. The outgoing feeders shall be provided with a selector switch in the
tripping circuit of each circuit breaker to permit to put the load shedding out of service for that
respective circuit breaker.

When microprocessor based multi functional numerical protection relays are used, the protection of
main power transformer shall be provided two independent protection relays, i.e., a main protection
relay and a back-up protection relay which are each operated independently on a separate
microprocessor.

Recommended setting of each protection relay shall be submitted for approval and contractor shall
set approved setting values into each relay at factory.

All protection systems shall be provided with an integral local operator interface facility to enable
communication with the relay without the use of external equipment. Any facilities provided for
connection to an external computer shall be an additional feature to the local operator interface

27
3.13 External Cabling

3.13.1 Power Cable

a. The cable entry shall be through the bottom plate of the cable box exactly below
the termination point.

b. Termination of power cables shall be plug-in type.

c. Terminal plugs for power cables shall be suitable for use with copper conductor
material.

3.13.2 Control Cables /Wires

a. All external control cables/wires shall be brought to the panel from the bottom,
unless otherwise specified.

b. Control cables/wires shall enter the panel through suitable cable glands to
prevent contact with sharp metal edges. The gland-plate assembly shall be vermin
proof.

3.14 Interface

Control wiring connections between stationary structure and removable element, if any, shall
be provided with self-coupling contacts or manual plug and receptacle for disconnection. The male
contacts shall be placed on the removable element while the female receptacles on the
stationary structure. Secondary isolating contacts shall be so positioned or designed to prevent the
danger of electric shock when disconnected.

3.15 Interlocks and Safety Features

3.15.1
to protect the equipment, operator and service personnel from the dangers of mal-
operation. CB, DS and ES shall be provided with adequate number of auxiliary
contacts for interlocking purposes without the use of contact multiplying relays.

3.15.2 Grounding switches shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked with

associated disconnect such that closing operation of grounding switch shall not be
possible unless the related disconnect is in open position.

3.15.3 Grounding switch of an incoming transformer line shall also be interlocked with
transformer HV breaker and transformer HV disconnect switch such that closing
operation of grounding switch in LV side shall not be possible unless HV breaker and
HV disconnect switch are open and HV breaker closing operation is not possible
unless grounding switch in LV side is open. LV circuit breaker closing shall not be
possible unless HV circuit breaker is closed.

3.15.4 Bus bar grounding switch shall be interlocked with the incoming circuit
breaker and bus section breaker as well as with all outgoing breakers on the
respective bus side, such that losing operation of grounding switch shall
28
 not be possible unless all associated circuit breakers and disconnectors are
open and vice versa, the associated circuit breakers and disconnectors
closing operations shall not be possible unless the bus bar grounding switch
is open.

3.15.5 Capacitor Bank Interlocking

The following additional interlocking for each capacitor bank circuits are to be
incorporated:

1- The capacitor bank circuit breaker shall be tripped when the associated transformer
11kV circuit breaker is tripped for any reason including manual opening.

2- The 11
has elapsed after the last opening of the circuit breaker to allow the associated
capacitor bank to discharge.

3- Locking device of the capacitor fence gate( to be provided under this contract) and
the line side 11kV earth switch of the switchgear shall have the following:

(a) The fence gate cannot be opened unless the earth switch of the associate
capacitor bank is closed.

(b) The earth switch cannot be opened unless the associated fence gate is closed.

3.15.6 Interlocking of 11

The closing of the 11kV circuit breakers of Main Power Transformer 1, transformer 2
and Bus Section is to be allowed for any two circuit breakers out of three. In normal
, the circuit breakers of Main transformer 1 and transformer 2 are
closed. For closing the 11 , a two way selector switch of
selections, i.e., Manual and Automatic, is to be incorporated in the closing circuit so as:

(a) One Main Power Transformer 11kV circuit breaker is to be opened and to be on
OFF status.

(b) The circuit breaker of the main transformer is not tripped by overcurrent or earth
fault protection relays.

(c) If the power transformer has no supply from the source, a voltage relay fitted to
the 11kV side should open the 11kV transformer circuit breaker then the bus
section breaker should close automatically.

(d) A time delay contact should be incorporated in the closing circuit of the bus section
circuit breaker to allow the closing after the set time is passed. To restore the
transformer back to normal service, the opening of the bus section circuit breaker
and closing the transformer circuit breaker should be done manually.

29
3.16 DC Control Power

Unless otherwise specified, the nominal DC control voltage for closing and tripping of all
circuit breakers shall be 110 .
at voltage ranges between 70 Vdc and 140
ranges between 90 Vdc and 140 Vdc.
satisfactorily at voltage ranges between 90 V dc and 140V dc. Voltage dropping resistors shall not be
used in the trip coil and closing coil circuits.

Note: - the details in part (7).

3.17 Wiring and Terminal Blocks

3.17.1 All wiring within the switchgear shall be installed and tested at the factory unless
otherwise specified. All wiring shall be heat and flame retardant, rated 90°C
, rated 600/1000V, insulated, , stranded
annealed copper conductor, and shall not be smaller than 4 mm² for CT circuits. All
wires shall be adequately rated for thermal withstand of short circuit currents, in
accordance with back-up tripping time.

3.17.2 Color coding of panel wiring shall be as follows:

DC circuits: Generally Grey (Trip circuits shall be provided with Red ferrule at the
terminal block) unless MOE specified.

VT circuits: Generally Red unless MOE specified (fitted with R, Y, B sleeves).

Alarm circuits: Blue

CT circuits: Generally Yellow unless MOE specified (fitted with R, Y, B sleeves).

AC power circuits: 4 Core; Red, Yellow, Blue, Black (Neutral)

3 Core; Red, Yellow, Blue for 3 phase

3 Core; Red, Yellow, Black (Neutral) for 2-phase

2 Core; Red, Black (Neutral)

1 Core; Black

1 Core; (Usage limited to grounding conductor) Green or Green with

Yellow stripes

3.17.3 All wiring shall be made without splices. - stranded

flexible and shall be terminated with size 1 hooked crimps or ring type terminals as
applicable. Spade type, pin type or boot lace type crimp terminals are not acceptable.

3.17.4
resistant. If a common termination is required between terminal blocks, preformed
wire jumpers or manufacture’s own shorting bar can be used. Compatible end
stops, end plates, barriers and terminal block identifiers shall be used. Groups of

30
 terminal blocks shall be identified using engraved labels. The comparative tracking
index of terminal blocks shall be at least 500 as per IEC 60112 or equivalent standard.

Not more than 2 (two)

block. In special circumstances where wire sizes exceed the terminal block
capability, correctly sized terminal blocks shall be used after MOE approval. In all
instances, terminal blocks shall be mounted on DIN rails.

3.17.5 , i.e. Power Supplies (AC or

DC), VT, CT, DC controls, annunciation, SCADA etc. and the function shall be
labeled accordingly. Terminal blocks for different voltages (AC/DC) shall be
located on separate DIN rails.

3.17.6
and grounding facilities by means of a copper bar with shorting screws.

Each CT circuit shall be provided with a disconnectable ground link. Opening of the
link shall enable all CT and relay wiring to be tested clear of ground. There shall be
only one ground link per CT circuit.

The termination between the ground bus bar and the isolatable link shall be
numbered C90 for Overcurrent CT, M90 for Metering CT, B90
D90 for Remote Tap Charger Control (RTCC) overcurrent block applications.

CT terminals shall be grouped by function and then sub-grouped by phase. Each

phase shall be labeled by appropriate labels attached to the terminal blocks. Each
complete CT shall be identified by function and reference number. Where a CT has
, such as S1, S2, S3; the CT terminal block shall
have four (4) terminals: S1, S2, S3 and ground.

The shorting bar shall cover the four terminals of each phase. The bar shall be
grounded through the grounding terminal block. The other end of the bar shall be
held by an insulated screw.

Adjacent to the CT terminal blocks two end stops shall be located with an appropriate
label mounted between them. Each stop shall have formed holes that shall be used
to store the CT shorting screws.

3.17.7 All tapping of dual-ratio CTs shall be terminated at the terminal blocks which shall
be clearly marked to designate the CTs phase and ratio in use.

3.17.8 All VT circuits shall be provided with sliding link type terminal blocks to facilitate
isolation of VTs from the circuit to perform voltage injection tests. These terminal
blocks shall be clearly marked with phase, function, core number and ratio.

3.17.9 Not less than ten percent (10%) spare terminals shall be provided on each terminal
block.

3.17.10
terminal blocks for future use. At least two (2) spare (1 NO + 1 NC) contacts of
lockout relay shall be wired to the terminal block for future use.

31
 3.17.11 All wiring internal to the switchgear assembly shall be laid in accessible wiring
troughs throughout the entire length of the switchgear assembly. Internal wiring
between the breaker and the LV compartment shall be bundled and neatly formed.
There shall be no wiring run as single cores through grommets. The AC wiring shall be
bundled separately from DC wiring in the same raceway. Signaling cables shall be
shielded type and run in a separate raceway and shall be separated as far as practical
from all LV power cables and at right angle to such wiring when the spacing is less
than 300 mm.

3.17.12 Cable supports shall be provided for wiring run directly to instruments or devices.
Wiring extensions from raceways or bundles to instruments and devices shall be
neatly formed, securely tied or clamped and supported to the switchgear framework.
Bends in the wiring shall be carefully made in such a manner that the insulation is not
damaged.

3.17.13 Wiring for lights, space heaters and convenience outlets may be run in the same
raceway in individual panels and in rigid or PVC jacketed flexible conduits between
panels. Wiring of meters/relays mounted on doors shall be mechanically protected.

3.17.14 by legible markings at the device

terminals in accordance with the connection diagrams. Each end of every wire
leaving a terminal block shall be identified indicating local termination point and
1. Markers shall be of ferrule type, permanently marked
and shall be made of material that will not deform or deteriorate and shall withstand
a temperature of 90°C. Adhesive type terminal markers are not acceptable.

3.17.15 e field, the 4wiring

between sections shall be provided preformed. One end of the wire shall be
terminated on terminal block and the other end shall be bundled and tagged
properly.

3.18 Device Identification

3.18.1 Appropriate identification in the form of engraved or embossed nameplate shall be

provided on each instrument, relay, control/test switch and other devices. These
nameplates shall be made of non-corrodible material and shall be of appropriate
size.

3.18.2 Each device shall be permanently identified to correspond to the device identification
symbol utilized on the wiring diagrams. This identification shall be adjacent to the
terminals of the device. Standard relay device numbers shall be provided for
protective relays. For switchgears phase conductors when viewed from operating
side, the phase designation shall be R, Y, B from left to right, from front to back and
from top to bottom. For reinforced substations the three phases shall be
designated as per the existing system.

32
3.19 Nameplates

3.19.1 Switchgear assembly shall also bear a nameplate permanently and legibly marked in
62271-200 or equivalent ANSI
Standards, plus the following additional information:

* MOE Purchase Order Number or Contract Number

3.19.2 Each circuit breaker shall have a nameplate as per IEC 62271-100.

3.19.3 The nameplate for the switchgear assembly and the circuit breakers shall be made of
stainless steel of adequate size to indicate the function of the panel. The nameplate
shall be fastened by stainless steel screws or rivets. Other nameplates for CTs, VTs
etc. may be made of non-corrodible material rather than Plastic.

3.20 Grounding

3.20.1 An un-insulated electrolytic copper grounding bus sized for the rated short circuit
current and running the entire length of the switchgear assembly shall be provided.
Provision shall be made for extending the ground bus at either end without the need
for cutting or drilling the copper bar.

3.20.2 Two (2) solderless type ground connectors shall be provided on the ground bus, one
on each end section of the bus. The ground connectors shall be suitable for a bare
copper ground conductor 120mm² thru 240mm².

3.20.3 All hinged doors and panels shall be properly bonded by unspliced flexible wire or
10mm2 Cu braids.

3.20.4 All devices or equipment shall be grounded as required.

to the ground bus shall be arranged so that each may be disconnected without
disturbing the continuity of the ground bus or any other ground connection.

3.21 Accessories

The following accessories shall be supplied as applicable:

3.21.1
protective relay test set and portable test equipment for meters, and laptop including
software and communication cable.

3.21.2 200A.

3.21.3 A suitable box or container shall be supplied for storage of test plugs.

3.21.4 Crank lever or equivalent device for manual charging of the spring-operated stored
energy closing mechanism of the circuit breaker, disconnector and earthing switch.

3.21.5 Any special tools required for circuit breaker maintenance and relay adjustments.

33
 3.21.6 Gas handling devices such as:

• SF6 Gas filling trolley

• SF6 Gas leakage detector

• Gas Purity Test Set

• Dew Point Test set

• Density Monitor Calibrator

• Earthing set (if required)

3.22 Drawings

Manufacturer shall at least provide the following drawings of size ‘A3’ (minimum):

3.22.1 .

3.22.2 Switchgear Layout Drawing.

3.22.3 Single Line Diagram.

3.22.4 General Arrangement and Component List of Circuit Breaker.

3.22.5 .

3.22.6 Panel Wiring Diagram.

3.22.7 Component List of Switchgears with sub-supplier (make) and country of manufacture.

3.22.8 GIS SF6 Gas diagram

4.0 BASIC REQUIREMENTS AND GUIDELINES

4.1 General

a) Switchgear shall be compact, simple for operation with highly secured performance.

b) Switchgear shall be suitable to operate at ambient temperature varying from 55°C to

– 5 °C, under dusty, dry climate out-door conditions as given in (01DMS-01)

c) Switchgear shall comply to the Specifications of MOE and relevant IEC Standards

4.2 Bid Proposal

The Manufacturer shall provide the following along with his bid proposal, in addition
to the requirements stipulated in the Purchase Order or Contract documents:

(a) Scope of Equipment Supply.

(b) Technical literature, brochures and list of users in the electric utility sector.

34
 (c) Complete type test reports/certificates of all major equipment.

(d) A declaration from the Manufacturer that the bid proposal is in accordance with the
technical Specifications and associated MOE, material Standard Specifications. Otherwise
the Manufacturer must state clearly any exception or deviation items from MOE
Standards, these guideline Specifications and drawing plans and the reasons for
exceptions or deviations.

(e) All documentation relating to this project shall be in English.

4.3 Base Design Phase

The base design phase is a period of 4-6 weeks of preliminary design following the issue of
Purchase Order or award of Contract. Six (6)
MOE for review and comments at the base design review meeting which will be held by the MOE
four (4) weeks after the receipt of the base design package.

The base design document shall consist of :

a) Detailed list of equipment to be supplied.

b) Following design drawings, as a minimum, but not limited to:

• Drawing Control Sheet.

• One-Line Diagram (Main one-line diagram, AC and DC auxiliary one-line diagram,

etc.)

 General arrangement of the switchgear (giving details of various

components)

c) Literature (specifications, manuals, brochures, drawings and completed Data Schedules)

of the following materials, as a minimum, but not limited to:

1) Switchgear.

2) Relays.

3) Instruments.

4) Control Panels.

5) CTs/PTs.

d) Following calculations and specifications, as a minimum, but not limited to:

1) CT and PT Sizing, including auxiliary CTs.

2) AC and DC auxiliary supply design with sizing of auxiliary transformer, batteries, chargers,
etc.

3) Grounding Conductor Sizing.

e) Details of site commissioning tests to be carried out.

35
4.4 Design Review Drawings

following the base design phase, other detailed/manufacturer drawings shall be submitted
by the Manufacturer for approval by MOE. The list of detailed drawings to be submitted for approval
shall be mutually agreed to between the Manufacturer and MOE.

4.5

The Manufacturer shall submit to MOE, a monthly progress report on the manufacture
of the switchgear.

The progress report shall include among other items:

a) Design.

b) Procurement of Components.

c) Testing and Commissioning.

d) Overall Completion.

The format shall be mutually agreed to between the Manufacturer and MOE.

4.6

Factory Tests

1) General

Before any item of equipment is packed or delivered from the manufacturer's factory, all tests
itemized in Clause 3.13
to prove compliance with the requirement of the Specifications. According to the Owner practice;
qualified/well known international third party inspector (or company) should witness all factory tests.
This third party should be hired by the Contractor after the approval of the Owner. The Owner may
attend the factory acceptance tests along with the international third party hired inspector. All
tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC requirements and the approved test procedures.

All measuring, testing instruments and devices used for the testing of the equipment should be
accredited by a valid calibration certificate and issued from a well recognised firm.

All results of tests shall be approved by Owner. In the event an additional test requested by the
Owner or its representative indicates Noncompliance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor
shall, at his own expense, make all necessary repairs and perform additional test(s) required to
ensure compliance with the terms of the Contract.

Acceptance of shipment of the equipment after the satisfactory factory test shall be given from the
Owner. The Contractor shall provide Form of Release Note to the Owner for signature.

The approval of the tests, acceptance of the test certificates or waiving of witnessing tests by the
Owner shall not relieve the contractor from his contractual obligations
36
All costs and expenses associated with such tests and inspections shall be borne by the Contractor.

2)

The Contractor shall give access a (3) Owner’s staff and/or his
(1) week excluding travelling days of
major equipment at manufacturer's factory. All costs related to the travelling (air tickets and
transportations), residence, meals, pocket money and any other expenses are deemed to be
included.

The witness items will be as follows;

(a) One (1) visit of 33kV Switchgears

(b) One (1) visit of 33/11.5 kV, 31.5MVA Transformers

(c) One (1) visit of 11kV Switchgears

(d) One (1) (SCS)

(e) One (1) .

Routine, type and special tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 60076 for Transformers.

The Tenderer shall submit Type Test Report on same type and rating of switchgear to be
applied for this project in accordance with IEC 62271-200, IEC

62271-100, IEC 60694 and IEC 62271-110

Authority not associated with the manufacturers

3)

A notification of the exact date, time and place of the test to be attended as well as all necessary
information shall be given to the Owner and/or his assigned representative in writing not later than
four (4) weeks prior to the date of the test.

4) Factory Test Reports

The Contractor shall compile all factory test results, test certificates, type test records etc. into a test
report for each item of the equipment. The test report shall include sufficient information such as
the subject of the test, project name, contract number, document number and the test date. The
factory test report shall be countersigned by the independent third party and the owner witnessed
the test. One (1) copy of the test report or its draft shall be handed over to each person witnessing
the test.

Four (4)
execution of each test. The delivery of the equipment shall be subject to Owner approval to the test
reports.

After completion of all factory tests, the Contractor shall bind all test reports, test certificates, type
test records etc. properly into books of A4 format and submit four (4) sets of the bound factory test
reports to Owner in addition to two soft copies of the full factory test reports .

37
Rectification of Deficiencies

All deficiencies revealed during the tests shall be rectified by the Contractor under the approval
of the Owner. The components or parts to have been rectified shall be re-tested.

All costs and expenses for rectification and re-testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

Tests at the Site

The Contractor shall carry out the Site acceptance Test & Commissioning in the presence of
the Owner.

4.7. Training

The Contractor shall be required to train the Owner’s staff at the factory during the contract
period. This is to enable the Owner’s technicians and skilled personnel to gain skill and experience
in the techniques required for maintain the works. All costs associated with the training are
deemed to be included in the contract price.

The Training for the following equipment shall be provided.

(a) One (1) (8) System (SCS) for two (2) weeks

(b) One (1) (8) members of 33

(1) week

(c) One (1) (8) members of Transformer with OLTC for one (1) week

(d) One (1) (8) members of 11

(1) week

Note: the breakdown for the coast of training each member should be mentioned in case of changing
the number of trainees during the contract negotiations

4.8 Record Books

Upon com , the Manufacturer shall submit eight (8) sets of record books
containing the following documents as a minimum:

a) Approved design and manufacturer drawings.

b) All calculation sheets.

c) Brief technical specification of all components.

d) Operation and maintenance manual consisting of:

• Manufacturer’s instructions manual applicable to each component or material.

• Manufacturer’s set-up procedures, including mechanical tolerances for maintenance or

repair purposes.

• Complete set of Manufacturer’s drawings and catalogs with identified parts for each device and
other essential information for MOE cataloging and ordering replenishment parts

38
Note: All documents in item (d) shall be originals.

4.9 Spare Parts

Manufacturer shall provide recommended spare parts list required for O & M of
switchgear without including as part of bid.

4.10 Guarantee by the Contractor

All equipment and materials under the contract shall be guaranteed for 18 months (and
limited to 24 months maximum) (TOAC). TOAC
will be issued from Owner after completion of the inspection of all contractual equipment and
installation work for a complete and ready Substation for energization.

The warranty shall cover manufacturer's technical defects which might be caused from design,
materials, workmanship, installation and deviations from the latest IEC or EN (or BS & DIN) , and ITU-
T, IEEE standard.

It does not cover defects arising from the Owner’s faulty maintenance or operation, or from
alterations carried out without the Contractor’s consent in writing, or from repairs carried out
improperly by Owner..

4.11 Packing for Shipment

The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage arising from careless
packing or protection up to the place of final destination. After completion of the inspection and
tests at the factory each item shall be packed for export shipment by using wood boxes.

The Contractor shall provide a clear means of identification for items concerning each individual
substation, and is requested to propose specific color to be painted on the upper corners of each
package in order to facilitate distinguishing the materials. Equipment and material items belonging to
each individual substation shall not be mixed with items belonging to other substations.

The method of packing shall be such as to protect all of the items against excessive corrosion or
dampness, and shall afford adequate protection against breakage or other injury, or loss due to
breakage of cases or crates from the time shipped at the factory until finally installed at the
substation.

Each crate of package shall contain a packing list and the copies in triplicate shall be forwarded to the
Owner prior to delivery. All items of materials shall clearly be tabulated for easy identification on the
packing list.

All cases and packages shall be clearly marked on the outside to indicate the total weight, to show
where the weight is bearing and the correct position of the slings and shall bear an identification
mark allocating them to the appropriate shipping documents.

Cases or packages which cannot be marked as above shall have tags made of metal or other durable
materials with the necessary marking on them.

39
The shipping mark shall bear typically the following information in sequence and in a frame
commensurate with size of package:

Consignee Ministry of Electricity Iraq

Project Name: Substation Name: Contract No.:

Port of destination:

Case Number, if applicable: Case Number in sequence: Description of contents:

Net and Gross weight:

Dimension:

4.12 Delivery

4.12.1. General

The Contractor shall deliver all equipment and materials in such time to meet the contractual
completion date.

The Contractor shall notify the delivery information to the Owner and each notification shall include:

(a) a complete shipping list of the contents of each package to be delivered

(b) the anticipated date of delivery

(c) the serial number for each component to be used for identification

(d) evidence of the insurance

The Contractor shall at his responsibility inspect the cargo at site upon arrival and shall report in
writing the particulars, quantities, conditions, damages if any, of the delivered cargo to site. This
(7) . The Contractor is responsible to
arrange all needed equipment and labor for unloading, unpacking for detailed inspection at
substation site.

4.12.2

The Contractor shall be responsible for inland transportation of equipment and materials from
the unloading port to designated substation site.

The Contractor shall furnish insurance for inland transportation to the site with some security guards,
if required. Such cost shall be included in the Contract Prices.

40
5.0 TESTS

5.1 All equipment shall be tested in accordance with the latest applicable IEC

5.1.1 Type (Design) Tests

a. All type tests prescribed in the applicable IEC Standards shall be performed on
the first unit of every new design, rating or size of the corresponding equipment
to be supplied to MOE, in accordance with the table below.

b. Arc-proof test shall also be performed on an identical switchgear panel including

bus bars and cable boxes in accordance with Annexure A of IEC 62271-200.

c. Certified test reports of type tests performed on identical equipment acceptable

to MOE may be submitted for review and acceptance in lieu of the required type
tests above.

5.1.2 ( ) Tests

a. All routine tests prescribed as per the compliance standard to the equipment
(IEC Standards) shall be performed on the corresponding equipment in
accordance with the table below and test reports shall be submitted for review
and acceptance.

b. Routine test reports from original manufacturer of all circuit breakers, instrument
transformers, disconnect switch and grounding switches shall be submitted for
review and acceptance.

c. Timing tests are required on all circuit breakers

5.1.3 The site test shall be performed on the gas insulated metal – enclosed equipment and it
component in accordance with relevant IEC recommendation & MOE commissioning Test
procedure.

5.2 Tests for relays, meters and instruments may comply with the manufacturer’s
standard tests. Relay circuit shall be tested with simulated fault currents for proper
operation.

41
42
43
44
45
PART2: 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA Power Transformer
2.1 General

The transformer shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60076 and be suitable for
outdoor location under the specified service conditions.
The transformer shall be 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA with a self-cooled type of cooling system
(ONAN) complete with all necessary fittings accessories and On-load Tap Changer
(vacuum type) with totally clad cable and boxes on both Primary and Secondary sides,
and shall be shipped with insulating oil filled.
Each transformer shall be equipped with on load tap changer suitable for the rated
current (+20% overload).

2.2 Characteristics of the transformers:

Item Description
1. Rated output 31.5MVA
2. Duty step-down outdoor service
3. Type core, double wound 3-Phase
Nominal voltage at no
load for transformers
4.
Primary: 33kV
Secondary: 11.5 kV
5. System Frequency 50 Hz
Interphase connection
6. Primary: DELTA
Secondary: STAR with neutral brought out
7. Vector relationship Dyn 11
8. Type of cooling ONAN
Temperature rise (i) 45 K in top oil by thermometer
9.
Temperature rise (ii) 50 K in winding by resistance.
The impedance voltage at 75º C at the
principal tapping shall be 10.5%.
10. Impedance voltage
ONAN rating with tolerance stated in the
latest issue of IEC specifications
Terminal arrangement
11. Primary: 33 kV totally clad cable box
Secondary: 11.5 kV totally clad cable box
Note.
The neutral of 11kV side shall be brought out through an outdoor 7.5kV
bushing connected with lightning arrestor.
12. Load break switch To isolate the neutral from the earth
On-load taps provided on the Primary
13. Taps side for variation of HV in equal steps of
1.5% each from plus 7.5% to minus 10.5%
Transformer noise level should not
exceed 55 dB at distance of 3 meters from
14. Noise level
the transformers in accordance with IEC
60076-10.

46
2.3 Cable Boxes (Air insulated type)

The transformers shall be equipped with cable boxes to accommodate XLPE single core
copper cables. The Contractor shall provide Owner with calculations to substantiate
the rating of the cables installed.
High voltage cable box complete with all jointing materials and with gland suitable for
XLPE single core cables designed for 33kV earthed system and rating of 1000Amps,
and should withstand a continuous load of 31.5MVA transformers and overload of 20%
during 2 hours in load conditions.
The exact specifications of the cables shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner for
approval.
Owner standardize on the size of cables used on connections between
transformers and switchgear and typically the cables shall be of XLPE single core type
and according to the following sizes:
(a) 33 kV side 400 mm2 (Cu)
(b) 11 kV side 400 mm2 (Cu)

The cable box shall be so designed that in the event of the transformer is to be replaced
it should not be necessary to break up the cable jointing at the terminal. The Secondary
cable box to be identical to the Primary side but suitable for XLPE single core cables.
The cable boxes shall be provided with earth wire connection with the main tank of the
transformer.

2.4 Fittings and Accessories

The following fittings and accessories shall be provided:
No. Item Specification for component Q’ty
with filter cap and drain valve and
1. Conservator a shut-off valve between the 1 set
conservator and the main tank
marked to indicate normal level at
2. Magnetic oil level gauges 20 °C, one on each side of the 1 set
conservator.
3. Pressure relief valve with one set of contacts for trip. 1 set
with maximum reading pointer
Dial type thermometer to
4. and 2 sets of contacts suitable for 1 set
indicate top oil temperature
alarm and trip.
to indicate the hottest spot
Winding temperature temperature of winding by
5. 1 set
indicator resistance with maximum reading
pointer and two sets of contacts for
alarm and trip
Drain and vacuum valve
6. 1 lot
plugs

47
 Between the cooling radiators and
the main tanks at the inlet and
outlet of each radiators so as to
7. Isolating valve 1 set
permit removal of the radiator
without draining the transformer
oil completely.
Moisture-excluding breather
8. 1 lot
of silica gel
Buchholz relay, double float
type with alarm and trip
contacts and a suitable test
9. from 1.5 meter above ground level 1 set
terminal block and push
button test with facilities for
testing
Adequate size to permit internal
10. Manhole 1 set
inspection of the transformer.
On the top of the necessary
11. Air release plugs 1 set
transformer parts.
12. Filter valves with caps. 2 Nos.
to be chromium plated of the
13. Rating and Diagram plate 1 lot
engraved type.
14. grounding pads 2 Nos.

15. Skid type base for rolling 1 lot

16. Lifting and jacking lugs. 1 lot

Transformer mounted
weatherproof metallic
17. 1 set
marshalling box to house all
terminals, controls etc.
Each drain valve vacuum valves
18. Padlocks with master key 1 lot
and filter valves.
Bushing type current for the line drop compensator of
19. 1 lot
transformer (11 kV) the automatic voltage regulation.
Dismountable from outside of the
20. 33 and 11kV bushings 1 lot
tank.
One on the top and second on the
21. Oil sampling valves 2 Nos.
bottom of tank.
All necessary items to
complete the 33/11.5 kV TR
whether specifically
22. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.
Located between tap changer
23. Protection of tap changer 1 set
conservator tank.

48
2.5 Painting
A primary coat to be applied immediately after cleaning all ungalvanized metallic
parts thoroughly. An oil and weather resistant type with a second coat shall then be
applied and the transformer finished in aluminum paint. Any alternative finishing
which gives better heat radiation is acceptable and must be confirmed by calculation.

2.6 Tolerance
All tolerances are to be in accordance with IEC except for loss evaluation and the
compensation for excess of temperature rise where clause 3.2.14 will be applicable.

2.7 Labels, Rating plates

All labels, rating and name plates shall be in English and shall be non-deteriorating and
non-wrapping. All equipment supplied and all apparatus there on shall be clearly
labeled in an approved manner.
The function of each relay, control, indication, alarm devices, fuses and links shall be
separately labeled, each indoor control and relay panel, and the like shall have a circuit
designation table mounted at both the front and rear. Rating plates, which shall
generally comply with the material requirements for labels, shall be in accordance with
the relevant IEC specifications.

2.8 On load tap changer

2.8.1 General
The On-load tap-changer shall comply with IEC 60214 and shall be capable of 300,000
tap changing operations without the necessity of maintenance.
The tap changer shall be designed so that the selector or diverter (vacuum switch) is
accommodated in an oil-filled chamber separated from the transformer tank. The
selector and diverter shall be accessible via a removable cover on the tap changer
chamber without removing the cover of the transformer main tank.
The tap changer shall be designed for load control through AVR, push buttons and also
for control from the remote panel in the MV switchgear room as well as from SCS and
the Regional DCC.

2.8.2 Tap changing ear

It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual handle is used nor
shall it be possible to operate the manual handle when the electric drive is in operation.
The necessary interlock shall be provided to prevent a simultaneous operations of
manual and electric drive.
The tap changer motor shall be designed for a 3-phase, 400 volts AC supply.
Each transformer shall be equipped with on load tap changer suitable for the rated
Current (+20% overload) of modern design and robust construction complying with the
latest version of IEC60214.
The tap changer shall be so designed that once initiated, the tap changing shall be
completed even in case of power failure to the driving motor. It shall not be possible to
be left in an intermediate position.

49
 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent overrunning of the mechanism and shall be
directly inserted in the main supply circuit to the driving motor to cut off. However,
the limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the driving motor instead
of the main circuit, provided that a mechanical declutching system is incorporated in
the mechanism. In addition, a mechanical stopping or other available means shall be
fitted to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any situational condition.
Tap changer control circuit shall have a protective mean to prevent the operation
during a short circuit fault on main power circuit has happened.
The driving motor, fuses and relays shall be housed in suitable weather proof metallic
cabinets (motor drive unit) mounted on the transformer.

2.8.3 Tap changer control panel

It is to be noted that the two 31.5MVA transformers will have 11 kV single bus-bar (The
sectionalizer being normally open).
The tap changer can be operated either manually or automatic by using the automatic
voltage regulator (AVR).
A three position selector switch, for the selection of manual operation and automatic
control, shall be located at the remote control panel to allow the control of the tap
changer from remote control panel, Substation Control System or from AVR.

The tap changer can be controlled manually from the following locations:
(a) Locally from the motor mechanism drive located at the transformer.
(b) Remote control panel located in the control room.
(c) From the substation control system ( SCS) and Distribution Control Center.

For transfer the control from transformer location to the remote control panel, a selector
switch located at the motor mechanism drive is to be provided to select the control of
the tap changer either from transformer location or from the remote control panel.
To control the tap changer manually from SCS or DCC. The location of control can be
selected by a command from DCC to an electronic selector switch inside the SCS.
Each transformer shall be supplied complete with a suitable sheet steel free standing
indoor remote control panel. All remote control, indication alarm and tripping devices
of the transformer shall be mounted on this panel in addition to any fitting which may
be required for the satisfactory operation of the tap changer.

All alarms of 31.5MVA power transformer, 33kV and 11kV switchgear circuits are to be
collected at the relevant AVR Panel located inside the control room. Also all other
common alarms of the substation are to be transferred to the same control room.

Each alarm shall cause an individual alarm to illuminate and an audible alarm to
sound.

The alarms shall be provided with accept, reset and lamp test facilities. Operating the
accept facility causes the alarm window to steadily illuminate and the audible sound to
silence. Operating the reset facility causes the alarm to extinguish but only after the
fault is reset.

50
Initiation of second alarm after the previous alarm has been accepted shall cause the
second alarm window to illuminate and the audible alarm to sound.

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

Remote tap position
1. Pointer type 1 set
indicator
Digital type
(The secondary output of
2. Tap voltage indicator, voltage transformer on the 11 1 set
kV switchgear shall be tapped
for this purpose).
Local /Auto /Remote
3. 1 set
selector switch.
Raise/Lower switch for
4. 1 set
remote electric operation.
Buzzer and lamp to indicate
5. 1 set
tap changing in progress.
Indication for power failure
6. 1 set
to tap changing mechanism.
1. Buchholz (Second Stage= SS)
Operate horn alarm. The 2. Winding temperature(SS)
7. relays required are for the 3. Oil temperature(SS) 1 set
Trip purposes: 4. Gas receiver
5. Pressure relief valves
1. Buchholz (First Stage= FS)
Operate bell alarm. The 2. Winding temperature(FS)
8. relays required are for 3. Oil temperature(FS) 1 set
Alarm purposes. 4. Out of step
5. Oil level
All necessary items to
complete the 33 kV circuit
whether specifically
9. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

51
 2.8.4 Automatic voltage regulator (AVR)
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) complete with line drop compensator shall be
provided to operate with motor-driven tap-changers and have facilities to keep the
voltage constant.
The motor-driven mechanism receives the corresponding control signals from the
voltage controller. With these signals, the tap-changer moves to the next position and
the transformer’s voltage value is adapted to preset reference voltage level.
The voltage set point can be varied locally. The recommended preset range is between
10.7 - 11.3 kV on 11kV side of the transformer. Facilities to operate the tap changer i.e.
Auto - Remote - Local and Raise - Lower switches or push button should be provided.
A full description of AVR and its controls should be submitted with the Tender. Failure
of AVR should keep tap-changer in position and gives an alarm.
The control equipment (AVR) and Line drop compensation shall be housed in the
transformer remote control panel inside the switchgear room.

2.8.5 Sub-contractor for tap changer

In the event the on-load tap changing equipment is supplied by subcontractor the
Tenderer shall give an under taking that he shall be responsible on behalf of the sub-
contractor to Owner with all spare parts. Operation and maintenance instructions and
other technical information during the life-time of the transformer.

2.9 Control and instrument wiring and terminal boards

All electrical equipment mounted in or on control panels, relay panels and the like shall
have readily accessible connections and shall be wired down to terminal blocks for the
reception of external cabling. Both ends of every wire shall be fitted with interlocking
ferrules of white insulating material engraved in black.

All wires which if interfered with may cause tripping currents to flow shall be fitted
with an additional red ferrule. Wiring shall be supported by insulating cleats
connection to apparatus mounted on doors, or between points and subjected to relative
movement shall be made in a flexible corrugated pipes arranged in such a way that
have to be under torsion not bending. Terminal boards shall have separate terminals
for internal and external connections and not more than two wires shall be connected
to each terminal. For CT and VT secondary terminals, it should be used a shorting to
earth/open terminal type, to allow short circuit to earth or to CT in case of testing.

2.10 Insulating oil

The transformer shall be supplied with first filling oil together with 10% extra quantity
which will be kept as spare. The insulating oil shall be complying with IEC60296 and
with this specification and should be approved by Owner.

52
2.11 Continuous Maximum Rating, temperature rise and overload
The transformers shall be capable of delivering their rated kVA under steady load
conditions without exceeding the limits of temperature-rise specified in the following
table when the rated primary voltage. At the rated frequency is applied to the
principal primary tapping and as tested in accordance with IEC regulations.

IEC cooling Temperature rise li it

Classification Winding by resistance K Oil by thermometer K
ONAN 50 45

The transformers shall be capable of operation, continuously without injurious heating

at their Continuous Maximum Rating (C.M.R) at any ratio and with the voltage of the
untapped winding maintained at the no-load voltage stated. The transformers shall
comply with the temperature rise limit specified on all tapping.

2.12 Short circuit guarantee

The transformers shall be capable of withstanding without damage an external short-
circuit between phases, and between one phase and earth on either winding when the
fault-free winding is energized at full design voltage in accordance with the latest
issues of IEC specification.

2.13 Insulation levels

The first unit of transformers manufactured in the contract shall be tested and subject
to Owner approval to prove the impulse withstand-voltage as specified in IEC 60076.
The transformers shall be liable to impulse testing to prove the impulse voltage
withstand values specified by the following a) & b).
1) Winding designed for use on 33kV system shall comply with the following
provisions of IEC recommendations.

a. Highest system Voltage 36 Kv

b. Insulation to earth uniform
c. Impulse test voltage 170 kV peak
d. Power frequency test voltage 70 kV R.M.S

2) Winding designed for connection to the unearthed 11 kV System shall comply with
the following provisions.

a. Highest system Voltage 12 kV

b. Insulation uniform
c. Impulse test voltage 75 kV peak
d. Power frequency test voltage 28 kV R.M.S

53
2.14 Loss Evaluation and Penalty
The power transformer losses shall be capitalized for tender evaluation as below
mentioned and also shall be subjected to the reduction of the contract price as penalty;

(1) Ie= Iron (No-load) losses: 1800USD per kW at rated voltage and frequency
(2) Cu=Copper (Load) losses: 600USD per kW at rated power and principle tapping
at 75oC
Loss Evaluated Cost = Q x (Guaranteed Ie x 1800 + Guaranteed Cu x 600)

Where, Q is quantity of the transformers.

The auxiliary transformer losses will not be considered in the capitalization of the
tender.
The maximum permissive tolerance is +10% of the individual Guaranteed Losses,
otherwise the transformer shall be rejected.
For transformer with losses exceeding the guaranteed values, the contract price shall
be reduced by the difference between the evaluated cost of the measured individual
losses and the 100% of the guaranteed individual losses according to the individual kW
price as following:
Penalty= Q x (Measured- Guaranteed) Ie x 1800 + (Measured - Guaranteed) Cu x 600)]
For any transformer with individual losses less than 100% of the guaranteed losses, no
variation to the contract price shall be made.

2.15 Earthing resister and others of Transformer Neutral

2.15.1 General
Neutral Earthing Resistor shall be provided in order to protect from damaging fault
currents of power transformer. Earthing of the Neutral is limited the ground fault
current of a high-level by operation of protective fault relays. These devices are then
able to quickly clear the fault, usually within a few seconds.
Neutral Earthing Resistor shall be suitable for outdoor service with 300Amp rated
current for 30 sec rated time is to be connected via a load breaking disconnector and
11kV cable to the Neutral of transformer, and shall be mounted in an enclosure.
The Outdoor type enclosure shall contain resistor, lightning arrester, disconnector and
CT & VT.
The Neutral Earthing Resistor shall be designed and factory-tested to IEEE Standard
32, and it shall be designed to conform to Seismic, Zone 3.

54
2.15.2 Specification
- System Voltage : 11kV
- Line-to-Neutral Voltage : 11kV/√3
- Type: Outdoor use

The transformer neutral earthing circuit shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty
1. On load disconnector 400 A, 25kA 1 pc

2. Lightning arrester 7.5 kV, 10 kA 1 pc

3. Neutral earthing resistor 21.1 Ohm 300A, 30sec 1 pc

4. Current transformer 300-150/5A 1 pc

Voltage transformer
( outdoor type ) with 11kV/110 V
5. suitable fuses on the HT and 1 pc
Class 3P
LT sides ( Single phase)
Transformer neutral XLPE Terminals, cable glands and
6. cables complete with all cleats, etc for 11 kV, XLPE 1c x 1 set
necessary jointing materials. 150mm2
Earth fault relay (51N) with
test terminal blocks Numerical type, IDMTL
7. 1 set
(location shall be 33kV characteristic
Metal-Clad switchgear)
Over-voltage relay (59) with
test terminal blocks Numerical type, Instantaneous
8. 1 set
(location shall be 11kV characteristic
Metal- Clad cubicle)
9. Outdoor type enclosure Punched (IP 33) 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 33 kV and
11kV circuit whether
10. 1 lot
specifically mentioned or
not shall be deemed to be
included in the above items.

2.15.3 Design Details

The Neutral Earthing Resistor shall be provided with an outdoor safety enclosure. The
enclosure will have a solid top, screened bottom, side covers, and top mounted eye-
bolts for handling ease. The enclosure finish will be hot- dipped galvanized steel. The
enclosure will have 10 cm legs unless otherwise specified.
The Resistor will consist of stainless steel stamped grid elements for higher currents or
edge wound Resistors for lower currents, double insulated. The Resistor terminals
must be stainless steel. All Resistor end frames, hardware, and non-current carrying

55
 spacers must be zinc plated steel at a minimum. Neutral Earthing Resistor must be
delivered to the jobsite completely assembled and ready for installation.
The Neutral Earthing Resistor shall be provided with a nameplate which shall be fixed
to the exterior of the enclosure.
The Contractor shall submit approval drawings in most suitable time and shall submit
certified test reports in accordance with IEEE Standard 32-1972.
The Contractor shall submit complete Instruction and Maintenance manuals at the time
of shipment. The manuals shall give complete and detailed instructions for unpacking,
installation, inspection, connection, and maintenance.

2.16 Spare parts and special tools

2.16.1 Spare parts

The Contractor shall provide spare parts for 5 years normal operation itemized prices
as SECTION 3 – SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES AND PRICES.
The Contractor shall recommend the spare parts of itemized prices for Transformer &
On load tap changer shall be quoted.

2.16.2 Special tools

All special tools and handling equipment are to be listed in the tender proposal and to
be included in the tender.

56
PART 3: REMOTE CONTROL AND INDICATION

3. 1 General

The substations shall be remotely controlled and monitored from DCC.

All the requirements to connect the substation to DCC should be part of this contract.

Note: Specification of the communication equipment shall be submitted by client prior

to the contract agreement.

For the remote control of 33/11kV substations, a selector switch shall be used to select
remote/local, when the selector switch is selected to remote, the substation equipment
will be controlled from SCS in substation or the DCC.
In case of selecting the switch to local, the control shall be only from the front of 33kV,
11kV switchgear and transformer control panel.
The measurement readings of A, V, MW, MVAR…. , tariff metering readings, position
indications and alarms shall be continuously displayed on the SCS and VDU of the
DCC independently of the remote/ local selector switch.

57
3.2 Commands and indications list
The substation equipment shall be provided to give the following facilities at the
substation SCS and DCC.

3.2.1 Controls/Commands

Item Description SCS DCC

No.
1. 33kV Circuit Breakers Open √ √
2. 33kV Circuit breakers Close √ √
3. 33kV Transformer On Load Tap Raise tap
√ √
Changer
4. 33kV Transformer On Load Tap Lower tap
√ √
Changer
5. 33kV Transformer AVR Auto √ ‫ـــــــ‬
6. 33kV Transformer AVR Manual √ ‫ـــــــ‬
7. 11kV Circuit breakers Open √ √
8. 11kV Circuit breakers Close √ √
9. Trip relays Reset √ √
10. MWh counter Reset √ √
11. MVArh counter Reset √ √
12. Acceptance of all active alarms incoming from a
√ √
substation ( Alarms Accept)
13. Delete of all active alarms incoming from a
√ √
substation (Alarms Reset)
14. 11kV Load shedding Stage 1 √ √
15. 11kV Load shedding Stage 2 √ √
16. 11kV Load shedding Stage 3 √ √
17. 11kV Load shedding Stage 4 √ √

58
3.2.2 Status/Indication

Item Description SCS DCC

No.
1. 33kV Circuit breakers Open √ √
2. 33kV Circuit breakers Close √ √
3. 33kV Circuit Breakers selector switch Remote √ √
4. 33kV Circuit Breakers selector switch Local √ √
5. 33kV Circuit Breakers Out of service √ √
6. 33kV Disconnecting Switch Open √ √
7. 33kV Disconnecting Switch Close √ √
8 33kV Earthing Switch Open √ √
9. 33kV Earthing Switch Close √ √
10. NER switch position Open √ √
11. NER switch position Close √ √
12. 33kV Tap position 1-n √ √
13. 33kV Transformer On Load Tap Changer In progress
√ √
14. 33kV Transformer AVR set voltage 4 digits √ √
15. 33kV Transformer AVR Auto √ √
16. 33kV Transformer AVR Manual √ √
17. 33kV Transformer AVR Off √ √
18. 11kV Circuit breakers Open √ √
19. 11kV Circuit breakers Close √ √
20. 11kV Circuit Breakers selector switch Remote √ √
21. 11kV Circuit Breakers selector switch Local √ √
22. 11kV Circuit breakers Out of service √ √
23. 11kV Earthing Switch Open √ √
24. 11kV Earthing Switch Close √ √
25. 11kV Load shedding Stage 1 Feeder No. √ √
26 11kV Load shedding Stage 2 Feeder No. √ √
27. 11kV Load shedding Stage 3 Feeder No. √ √
28. 11kV Load shedding Stage 4 Feeder No. √ √

59
3.2.3 Alarms

Item Description Critical/Non- SCS DCC

No.
critical
1. 33kV VT Failure Non-critical √ √
2. 33kV Circuit breakers Failure (Trip Non-critical
√ √
circuits supervision)
3. 33kV Overcurrent protection Critical √ √
4. 33kV Earth fault protection Critical √ √
5. Inter tripping Critical √ √
6. Buchholz protection (1st stage) Non-critical √ √
7. Buchholz protection (2nd stage) Critical √ √
8. Oil temperature (1st stage) Non-critical √ √
9. Oil temperature (2nd stage) Critical √ √
10. Winding temperature (1st stage) Non-critical √ √
11. Winding temperature (2nd stage) Critical √ √
12. Gas receiver relay Critical √ √
13. Pressure relief valve Critical √ √
14. Transformer Oil low level Non-critical √ √
15. Differential protection Critical √ √
16 Neutral Over-voltage protection Critical √ √
17. Neutral point protection (SBEF) Critical √ √
18. Tap changer upper position Non-critical √ √
19. Tap changer Lower position Non-critical √ √
20. Tap changer failure Non-critical √ √
21. 11kV VT Failure Non-critical √ √
22. 11kV Circuit breaker Failure (Trip Non-critical
√ √
circuits supervision)
23. 11kV Overcurrent protection Critical √ √
24. 11kV Earth fault protection Critical √ √
25. Capacitor bank unbalance protection Critical √ √
26. Aux. TR Buchholz (1st stage) Non-critical √ √
27. Aux. TR Buchholz (2nd stage) Critical √ √
28. Aux. Transformer failure Non-critical √ √
29. AVR failure Non-critical √ √
30. E/F-O/V Alarm Non-critical √ √
31. 11kV Load shedding Stage 1 Critical √ √
32. 11kV Load shedding Stage 2 Critical √ √
33. 11kV Load shedding Stage Critical √ √
34. 11kV Load shedding Stage 4 Critical √ √
35. AC Supplies Failure Non-critical √ √
36. 110V DC charger Failure Non-critical √ √
37. 110V DC earth fault Non-critical √ √
38. 110V battery electrolyte Level Non-critical √ √

60
39. DC station service under voltage Non-critical √ √
40. Inverter Failure Non-critical √ √
41. Annunciator fail Non-critical √ √
42. Substation Control System Faulty critical √ √
43. Supervisory command Failure critical √ √
45. Communication "TX" Failure Non-critical √ √
46. Communication "RX" Failure Non-critical √ √
47. PABX Failure Non-critical √ √
48. Fire Alarm (Switchgear Building) Non-critical √ √
49. Fire Alarm (Guard House) Non-critical √ √
50. Door open Alarm (Switchgear Non-critical
√ √
Building

3.2.4 Analogue Measurements

tem Description SCS DCC

No.
Span
1. 33kV Transformer voltage 0-36 kV √ √
2. 33kV Transformer current 0-80 A √ √
3. 11kV Busbar voltage 0-13 kV √ √
4. 11kV Transformer current 0-1 00 √ √
5. 11kV Transformer MW 0-31.5 MW √ √
6. 11kV Bus Section current 0-2000 A √ √
7. 11kV Feeders current 0-300 A √ √
8. 11kV Aux. transformer current 0-30 A √ √
9. 31.5 MVA Transformer ncomer (33kV)
√ √
MWh
10. 31.5 MVA Transformer Incomer (33kV)
√ √
MVarh
11. 31.5 MVA Transformer Output (11kV)
√ √
MWh (MDI)
12. 31.5 MVA Transformer Output (11kV)
√ √
MVArh (MDI)
13. 11kV Capacitor Bank MVArh √ √

61
3.3 Technical Requirements of transducers
Where the contractor needs to use transducers for transmitting the measured values,
the output of these transducers should be in accordance with the following technical
specifications:

No. Item Specification for component

1. Nominal voltage input 120 volt
2. Nominal current input 5 Amps
3. Full scale calibration 1000 volts
4. Output at full scale (D.C) 4-20 mA
0-2000 ohms(with max 3000
5. Output load required
ohms)
6. Accuracy/linearity at 20 ºC ± 0.5 at full scale
7. Power factor range 0 lag- l - 0 lead
8. Temp : range + 10 ºC to + 60ºC
9. Temp effects on accuracy ( max) ± 10%
10. Frequency range 45 to 55 Hz
11. AC component ( peak ) 1%
Response time to 99% of
12. 200 milliseconds
final value
13. Voltage range 85 to 135 volts
14. Input overload limit voltage 150 volts
10 Amps. continuous and 100
15. Input overload limit current
Amp for l sec.
Voltage burden ( max for
16. 4 VA
element )
Current burden ( max for
17. 2 VA
element )
18. Calibration adjustment 0 to 110%
19. Zero adjustment ± 2%
Dielectric test - Input to
20. 1500 volts r.m.s.
output
Dielectric test - Input to
21. 1500 volts r.m.s.
earth

3.4 Humidity and Temperature Measurement

One set of humidity and temperature measuring instruments/ transmitters and their
associated transducers shall be provided for each new substation. The output of these
transducers will be wired to the SCS interface cubicle to transmit the measured values
to the DCC.

62
 PART 4: Substation Control System

4.1 General
The Substation control system (SCS) shall be installed as a Local SCADA system to
monitor, measure and control the substation.
The SCS shall be provided to enable the substation equipment to be monitored,
measured and controlled from a substation control room.
The SCS shall also be capable of serving as an RTU to the DCC, acquiring and
transmitting substation data to the DCC and executing commands sent from the DCC.
The interface between SCS and substation equipment shall be done by Intelligent
Electronic Devices (IEDs) and/or the bay control unit (BCU).
The SCS shall conform to the latest editions of the International Electro technical
Commission (IEC) Standards, ISO Standards, IEEE Standards, International
Telecommunications Union (ITU) Specifications and the this Technical Specification.
Equivalent national standards may be acceptable subject to approval by the Owner.

4.2 Design Principles

The SCS shall be designed to achieve a high level of availability, reliability and safety in
operation. The design shall be ‘fail safe’ such that failure of any single component shall
not result in all functions affected.
The failure of any single component within the overall system shall not affect the
ability of the remaining healthy components in the system to continue to operate
normally and for its functionality to remain available.
Essential functionality i.e. that required for the continued overall operation of the SCS
shall be tolerant to single component failures.
The communications links between components within the overall SCS shall be
regarded as essential functionality and the SCS must continue to operate with full
functionality if any Single communications link is out of service.
The system shall continuously monitor its own health and produce alarms for all
detected failures.
These alarms shall be presented in the alarms lists on the operator workstation and, as
far as possible, by lighting ‘fault’ warning LEDs on the affected equipment itself, e.g.
on individual circuit cards.
There shall be no cases in which undetected failures could occur anywhere within the
overall SCS, including within the communications links between the components of the
system.
The equipment and the enclosures it is mounted in shall be designed to facilitate easy
maintenance, particularly fault-finding and replacement of components, e.g.
replacement of rack mounted circuit cards. As far as possible, and consistent with safe
operation, it shall be possible to ‘Hot swap’ components such as I/O cards.
The equipment shall be robust, suitable for the operating environment in which it is
installed and require minimal maintenance.
Each sub-system within the SCS shall be designed to meet an overall availability of at
least 99.98 % based on MTTR (a Mean Time To Repair) of 8 hours.
The Contractor shall provide a Functional Design Specification that will allow the
Employer to review and approve the facilities being provided in the SCS, and on which
the testing documentation can be based.
The functional system configuration diagram as shown refer to Dwg. No. IQP8-
SP06/07-E-005.
63
4.3 System Architecture
The SCS shall be based on a distributed architecture complying with the relevant IEC
Standards. The proposed configuration of the equipment and the availability and
security provided by the proposed architecture shall be described fully in the Tender
proposal.

The SCS shall typically comprise the following components:

(a) Two Master Control Units (MCUs)

(b) Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) and/or the Bay control unit (BCU)
(c) Two Workstations for Operator / Engineer
(d) Local Area Network (LAN)
(e) Communication Links to DCC
(f) GPS Receiver with Antenna
The MCU shall typically provide overall supervision and management of the entire
SCS. It may also provide communications ports supporting various data transfer
protocols to enable the substation connected to SCS to be monitored and controlled
from operator workstations in the substation control room and from DCC.
The IED and/or BCU shall normally be mounted on 33/11kV switchgears and
transformer control cubicles. They shall be connected to the control and indication
circuits of each cubicle to provide the interface between the substation and the SCS.
The IED and/or BCU shall include facilities for the control, status indication (in a
mimic diagram format), analog readings and alarms of the switchgear and transformer
taps, and general alarms /information (fire alarms, power supply alarms, etc.) for
substation.

At least two workstations shall be provided comprising a graphical user interface for
monitoring and control of the substation.
Although normally one workstation is used for Operator and the other for Engineering,
both of the two workstations shall have full access to all of the SCS facilities at the same
time. They shall be located in the control room and each shall be powered from UPS
source to ensure continued operation.
A GPS receiver with antenna, for time synchronization of the SCS internal real-time
clock, shall be provided in order to provide accurate time stamping of alarms and
recorded events.
The GPS receiver shall be equipped to cater for the specified requirements and, in
addition, be equipped with three spare ports.

4.4 System Functions

4.4.1 General
The SCS shall provide, but not be limited to, the following functions that are generally
intrinsic to SCS and DCC.
The Tenderer shall provide details of the full range of facilities provided by their
system in their Tender submission.

(a) Display of the substation single line diagram and individual feeder diagrams with
status Indication.
64
(b) Indicate at the single line diagram, voltages, currents, frequency, together with
power factor, active and reactive power flows. High/low limit excursions of
measured shall be alarmed and programmable. Measurements (currents and
voltages) of 11kV feeders / transformers shall be collected for each of 3 phases at
SCS, average to a single reading for DCC.
(c) Acquire, display and printout substation events and alarms with date and time
stamp.
(d) Acquire status, check of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, and earthing switches.
(e) Be capable of performing sequential control functions, such as taking feeders
in/out of service, load shedding and load curtailment.
(f) Provide switch interlocking such that the operation of substation equipment is
prevented unless specified conditions are met. Interlocking function shall be
available at bay and substation level. (The hard-wired interlocking scheme as
specified shall also be provided and the SCS Scheme shall provide an additional
interlocking facility to ensure safe operation, based on the same logic).
(g) Perform supervised monitoring operations (Close/Open) on circuit breakers,
busbar and line disconnections.
(h) Perform reporting of acquired data in user-defined formats (numerical and
graphical logging) including data from tariff metering. This data shall also be
suitable for transmission in text format to another device for further data
processing.
(i) Read relay settings, measured values and evaluate stored data.

(j) Storage of process data in managed files for future use.

(k) Resetting of electrical trip lockout relays.

(l) Receive and process commands from the DCC, process and transmit status,
measurements and alarms to the DCC. It shall be possible to generate summary
data to send to the DCC.

(m) Provide access security to both operational and administrative functions,

separately, by username and password.

(n) Be self-supervising; display its own system alarms and hardware status.

(o) For tap changers of transformers Raise/Lower Control shall be available at SCS
and DCC as one tap for each command. AVR Set-point Control can be done
locally by using a maintenance tool such as laptops.

(p) Selector switch function (i.e., SCS or DCC) for receive and process a control
command of the circuit breaker and tap changer. The control of the selector
switches can be done for individual equipment , circuit or substation bases from
SCS/DCC.

65
4.4.2 Commands
All commands available at the substation in the SCS shall be capable of being operated
at the DCC, subject to the agreement of the SCS Overall Facility Schedule.
All command sequences shall be performed using a select then execute routine.
The routine shall minimize the likelihood of accidentally performing the execute step
as part of the selection step.
Furthermore, there shall be a maximum time between the selection step and execution
with the Command sequence being cancelled if the execution is not performed within
that time, this time should be adjustable from 0.5-60 sec.
Prior to the execution of any command, the software shall perform a check to validate
that the user has the authority to execute the command. Authority violations shall be
indicated to the operator via a message on the VDU.
A ‘cancel’ key and/or poke point shall be provided to allow termination of any
command sequence before it is executed.

4.4.3 Alarm and Indication Handling

All alarms and indication changes annunciated in the SCS shall be treated in the same
way i.e. as an event. Each event shall be capable of being repeated to DCC, subject to
the agreement of the SCS Overall Facility Schedule.
Two types of alarms shall be supported, these being fleeting and non-fleeting. The
alarm type shall be configurable on a point-by-point basis. Single point indications
shall be used where no intermediate state needs to be identified. The indication type
shall be configurable on a point-by-point basis.
All events shall be brought to the attention of the operator. The operator shall have the
facility to accept (acknowledge) events individually or as a page of events at a time.
The name of the operator acknowledging an event shall be recorded and displayed in
the event list.
When an event occurs, the workstation audible alarm shall sound and the appropriate
entries shall be highlighted in the event list. Indications of changes of substation state
shall flash the substation symbol on the SCS diagram and alarms shall flash the
“Alarm” symbol adjacent to the substation on the mimic. Silencing events shall not
inhibit the annunciation of further events or constitute an acknowledgement of the
event.
Facilities shall be provided for the processing and display of events on the operator
interface, and shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Grouping on bay basis.
(b) Grouping on the basis of event types
The event list shall be displayed in chronological order. Each event entry shall include
the time and date of occurrence, location, device, or other identifier, action, status, and
value and normal status limits.

4.4.4 Measured Values Lists

Measured values comprising circuit loadings (A, MW, MVAr), voltages (kV), counter
and integrated values (MWh, MVArh) and frequency (Hz) shall be available for display
and to be transferred to the DCC. Where required, these shall be derived from
transducers. Transducers shall be mounted to avoid long AC cable runs.

66
4.4.5 Supervisory Requirement (DCC)

The SCS shall provide for control the following from the DCC:

(a) Close/open of all circuit breakers.

(b) Control of transformer taps.
(c) Resetting of all electrically reset trip relays.
(d) Acceptance of all active alarms incoming from a substation.
(e) Resetting of all alarms.

The facilities actually made available for each substation shall be as detailed in the SCS
Overall Facility Schedule, and shall be agreed with the Owner’s Representative.
The “Local/Remote” switch, located at the Local Control Cubicle shall allow the
control from the SCS & DCC only when in the “Remote” position.
The transfer of control from the SCS to DCC shall be achieved through software,
without affecting the safe operation and control of the substation as required on
3.5.4.1.(p).
On/off (open/close) and other position indication shall be provided to the DCC for the
following items:
(a) Circuit breakers.
(b) Disconnectors.
(c) Line earth switches and temporary earths.
(d) Local or remote control in service.
(e) All necessary indications to allow proper operation of the transformer Automatic
Voltage Control facility.
These indications shall be transmitted to the SCS / DCC irrespective of the position of
the “Local/Remote” selector switch.

Measurement signals shall generally be provided for the DCC as follows:

(a) 33kV Incoming circuits Busbar (phase to phase) voltage

(b) 33kV Incoming circuits MW and Current (A)
(c) 33kV Incoming circuits energy (MWh and MVArh)
(d) 31.5 MVA transformer secondary MW and Current (A)
(e) 31.5 MVA transformer secondary energy (MWh with MDI and MVArh)
(f) 11kV Busbar (phase to phase) voltage
(g) 11kV Busbar frequency.
(h) 11kV Feeders and Bus section A
(i) 11kV Feeders for future capacitor bank energy (MVArh)

These signals shall be transmitted to the SCS /DCC irrespective of the position of the
“Local/Remote” selector switch.

4.4.6 Trending
The SCS shall be capable of displaying any analog value in graphical form to show the
trend of the value over a selected time period. The trend display shall have adjustable x
and y axis, indicate up to 10 values and operate either using real-time or historical data
from the database.
67
4.4.7 Data Logging

The SCS shall incorporate long-term data logging facilities for all analog, digital and
other internally generated signals.
Any analog or digital value defined on the SCS database shall be available for storage
and subsequent re-call.
All signals shall be scanned periodically and updated values or digital status changes
stored. Date and time tags shall be allocated to each signal. Data shall be stored for up
to three months on a suitable storage medium for subsequent re-call at a later date. An
alarm shall be given to the operator when the storage of data approaches the capacity
of the storage medium.
All data shall be capable of being archived and retained for future reference.
The operator shall have the facility to recall data held in the data logger memory or
from archives over a specified period of time. The information may also be restricted to
specific the SCS data points.

The requested information may be presented on the operator’s workstations either in

tabular form or as selected variables on a trend display. Information on print-outs may
be either in tabular form or in a preformatted report form and may be produced
automatically at specific times or on request.

It shall be possible to compare on the same display, trends, real-time data and historical
data from the archives. This shall not affect the operation of the on-line data logging.
One printer shall be designated primarily as the operational “on demand” log. In the
event of a printer failure facilities shall be provided, both automatic and manual to
enable changeover to another similar printer which shall be provided by the
Contractor.

The Operational log shall record and print on demand when required, the following
information:

(a) Status changes

(b) Onset and clearance of all alarms with facilities for distinguishing between the
types of alarm, e.g. ‘urgent’, ‘non-urgent’, ‘group’, ‘individual’, etc.
(c) Control operations (both successful and unsuccessful).
(d) Operator actions such as alarm limit changes, tagging, hand-dressing, removal of
parameters from scan, inclusion of new parameter into scan, alarm
acknowledgement, log on, log off, etc.

This information shall be printed on the designated printer with each item consisting of
the data and time of occurrence, together with a description of the operation, event or
alarm, and sufficient information to enable full identification of the feeder/item of
plant affected.

The operation log shall also be available as a VDU list of sufficient size to allow the
display of information covering 5000 alarm/events. In addition to the logging printers,
a color printer shall be provided to enable screen dumps and graphical displays etc. to
be printed.
68
4.4.8 Hand-dressing
The single line diagram will contain variable elements, some of which are updated
automatically by the application and some that are hand-dressed by the operators e.g.
equipment where remote indications are not available.
Hand-dressed data shall be suitably indicated by a symbol or tag. The hand-dressed
changes shall be inserted automatically in the database.
It shall be possible for the operator from the operator workstation to remove from scan
any measurement, alarm or indication that comes within his area of responsibility. This
shall be suitably indicated on the display and additionally a symbol or tag shall be
used to indicate the removal from scan.

It shall then be possible, from the workstation, to insert a new (hand-dressed) value for
the element, with the hand-dressing also suitably indicated by a symbol or tag. The
hand-dressed changes shall be inserted automatically in the database.

On manual restoration of the elements back into service, the readings shall again be
recorded in the database, returned to their normal presentation and hence regularly
updated on the displays.

Hand-dressing operations, as described above, shall be suitably tagged for logging

purposes. The system must recognize an attempt by the operator to make an invalid
hand-dressing operation and this should be blocked, with a suitable error message on
the screen.

4.4.9 Operator Interface

The design of the operator interface shall be based on standard software packages and
provide a Windows, Icons, Menus and Pointer (WIMP) style of presentation and use
interaction with the system.
All user actions shall be initiated using the pointer/keyboard and standard ‘windows’
methods. The system shall provide facilities for the display of the entire substation
single line diagram as a single display along with other displays for specific purposes,
as required.

Pan, zoom, decluttering and windowing facilities shall be provided to allow the
operator to navigate through the displays and adjust the level of displayed detail to
that appropriate to the task they are performing.
To ensure the interpretation of information from displays is intuitive and not confusing
to the operators all displays and lists shall be constructed following a consistent overall
design philosophy. For example, all lists shall display in the same manner with new
entries always being added to the top of the list or to the bottom of the list.
The software shall also guide the user, step-by-step, through each sequence by
identifying, preferably via a visual technique on the workstation, the remaining valid
entries.
Any invalid entry shall be detected by the software, ignored and an explanatory
message displayed on the VDU.
It shall then be possible to continue the sequence with a valid entry. The system shall
support context sensitive on-line help facilities. The help screens shall be easily
customized to suit the owner’s needs.
69
 4.4.10 System Operating Points
The substation will normally be manned, but also it will be monitored / controlled
when selected from DCC via the SCS. It shall be possible to operate substation’s
equipment in the following ways:

(a) Supervisory - from the DCC

(b) Remotely - from the substation control room
(c) Local – from the cubicles
(d) Maintenance – from the cubicles with a special tool, for maintenance purposes
only.

The design of the SCS and the substation equipment shall be such that control of any
item of substation equipment is only possible from one control point at any particular
time and the transfer of control between these points shall be achieved without
affecting the safe operation, monitoring or control of the substation.

4.4.11 Modes of Operation

As a minimum, the system software shall be capable of supporting five different levels
of user, e.g. operator, engineer and system manager, etc. For example:
(a) Operators are responsible to control and monitor the substation using the SCS.
(b) Engineers are responsible for any fundamental changes made to the SCS software
or configuration.
(c) System managers are responsible for the system security, back-up and database
maintenance.
The availability of functions to each user shall be configurable, allowing the user’s area
of responsibility to be defined.
The maximum number of different user levels supported and the degree of
configuration available of each level shall be stated in the Tender.

4.5 System Capacity

The design shall meet the following general requirements with regard to capacity and
expandability.
The SCS shall be designed, delivered and commissioned with sufficient capacity for
performing the requirements of this specification. Tenderer shall provide capacity and
technical parameters for each unit within the SCS.
The SCS shall be equipped with control, indication and measurement functions
required by the Scope of Work.
The maximum system capacity and system loading shall not be less than 200% of the
specified system capacity, including the specified future expansion.
In addition to the facilities detailed in the Facility List section, approximately 30% spare
input/output capacity shall be provided within the contract (this figure shall be
confirmed at the specific site survey in agreement with the Owner’s Representative).
These spare facilities shall be fully fitted and prewired to the terminal of IEDs.
The design shall provide for future expansion, modification and testing with the
minimum of disruption to existing facilities.
A minimum of 30% of the future expansion capacity shall be demonstrated during the
FAT.

70
4.6 System Performance
The SCS scanning and polling frequencies shall ensure the following overall
performance. If better performance is necessary to ensure satisfactory operation of
certain SCS functions, the Tenderer shall state this.
The SCS shall process, enter into the database and update all relevant displays
currently on view within less than two seconds of a change occurs at IED's input.
This time shall include for any calculation or other processing required to enter derived
or compiled information into the files, logs, reports or displays.
The SCS shall also process all information required at the DCC (e.g. status,
Measurements and alarms) and have them available for transmitting to the DCC with
less than two seconds of a change occurring at IED's input.
The elapsed time between selecting a display and the full display appearing on any
screen shall be less than one second for 50% of requests, less than two seconds for 90%
of requests and less than three seconds for 100% of requests.
The System shall give priority to commands such that commands issued from an
operator’s workstation shall have confirmation of action (from IEDs) displayed within
four seconds of issue from the workstation (not including the time taken for equipment
to operate).
The SCS shall be capable of handling all alarms and status changes occurring during
avalanche conditions without loss of any data. Avalanche conditions are defined as
follows:
(a) A fault on a MV switchgear busbar (resulting in the generation of multiple alarms)
(b) Occurrence of 100 + 0.1N + √N changes is 5 seconds where N is the total number of
data inputs (double signals count as two data inputs).

4.7 Software Requirements

4.7.1 General
The software shall be of modular construction, developed using structured design
techniques and written in a commonly used programming language. Wherever
possible, standard library software shall be utilized.
The contractor shall identify all standard proprietary software and any software
specially developed for this project.
The application software shall ensure the secure execution of SCS functions. The
operator workstation software shall run under a well proven, widely used, industry
standard and internationally supported operating system.
It shall also ensure the secure execution of RTU functions.
Protocol IEC 60870-5-101 has to be included with other protocols.

4.7.2 Real-time database

A real-time database shall be maintained within the SCS system. A general check shall
be initiated at intervals to retrieve all data points from the remote I/O to ensure
validity of database entries. This interval shall be configurable between 30 minutes and
36 hours.
The real-time database shall be open and the data dictionary published.
The real-time database shall support the import/export of data via standard interfaces
such as SQL, ODBC, etc.

71
 4.7.3 Database management
Engineering facilities shall be provided for database and graphic display creation and
modification for the operator workstations.
Facilities shall be provided so that the operator workstations can be used as
engineering consoles to modify and configure the overall SCS system. It shall be
possible to prepare modifications in advance and implement them with minimal
disruption to the running system.

4.7.4 Data processing

In the event of detection of the failure of I/O components, indications and alarms from
the previous successful scan of the failed I/O shall continue to be displayed on the
operator workstation. However, facilities shall be incorporated to indicate to the
operator that the relevant data is not presently being updated.
The system shall have the ability to differentiate between status changes resulting from
operator actions and apparently spontaneously occurring actions, the latter drawing
attention to the operator via an audible alarm and highlighting the status change on the
workstation.
The processing of analogue signals shall include:
(a) Scaling for display in engineering units.
(b) Alarm supervision between adjustable limits, e.g. Low Alarm, Low Warning, High
Warning & High Alarm.
(c) Devising values such as summated power flows.

4.8 Hardware Requirements

4.8.1 General
The design of all SCS equipment shall be such as to ensure satisfactory operation in an
electrically hostile environment typical of high voltage electrical installations.
The equipment may be either of single board design or of rack mounted modular
construction.
All computer equipment shall be supplied with a real-time multi-tasking operating
system which conforms to a recognized industry standard and not unique to one
manufacturer.
Interconnecting cables shall be made via substantial, secure plugs and sockets, which
shall be mounted in accessible positions and clearly labeled.
A technical description of each item of equipment, together with evidence to show that
the stated guaranteed reliability figures are supported by actual service conditions,
shall be supplied with the Tender.

4.8.2 Master Control Units

The Master Control Unit shall have an interface to a portable maintenance terminal
through which it can be configured and operated locally. One portable maintenance
terminal shall be provided with the SCS.
The power supply to the Master Control Unit shall be derived from the UPS AC
supply.

72
4.8.3 Remote Communications Interface

The SCS should have all hardware/software necessary to provide an optical interface,
or any serial interface to the IEDs or through a serial communication links.
All necessary fiber optic cables, fiber optic modems, termination boxes, plastic pipes
needed to be laid and installed into existing cable duct, as well as all works related to
connection to SCS will be responsibility of the contractor.
There must be a minimum two RS232 ports and one Ethernet port for high data
transfers. All hardware and software requirements should be available to support
communication ports of the SCS.
The SCS shall support for at least four most common standard communication
protocols to communicate upstream (master control center) or down stream (IEDs) or
network.
The SCS protocols shall be non-propriety for use, so the contractor shall provide all the
details and parameter settings for each protocol used through (upstream or
downstream or network) communications. Owner shall be authorized to disclose the
SCS protocol to third party suppliers.
As a minimum, the SCS device providing the remote communications interface shall
support the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol along with any other protocols specifically
requested in the Scope of Work. The Tenderer shall provide details in their Tender of
the SCADA communication protocols of DCC supported by their system.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply and installation that may be
required for the correct interfacing of the SCS equipment with the existing DCC,
including all protocols and communications as required.
It is essential that the Contractor carries out tests to demonstrate that the full SCADA
facilities of DCC are available over the communications interface and that the
implementation of the standard protocols at the existing DCC Master Station and the
new SCS are the same.
The rights to access the SCS indications and controls from remote systems shall be
programmable within the SCS for each communications link connected to the SCS.
The power supply for this equipment shall provide a 8 hour standby capacity such that
it is able to continue to communicate and exchange control and data with the DCC
SCADA Master Station in the case of mains failure of the source of supply e.g. mains or
charger failure.

4.8.4 IEDs (BCUs)

Each IED shall be individually programmable for integrated functions such as control,
interlocking logic, metering with/without transducers and status / event / alarm
acquisition.
Each IED shall have an interface to a portable maintenance tool through which each
IED can be configured and operated locally. This is in addition to any integral facilities
to allow operation from the IED itself.
Generally, one BCU shall be provided for each of switchgear equipment. It shall
generally be located front the cubicle, to provide a suitable environment.
Additional IEDs may be used for substation general alarms and substation common
services, as necessary, and located so that signals of such alarms and services are
connected to the IEDs as close as is practically possible to where those signals are
derived.

73
Power supply to the IED shall be derived from the substation 110V DC control supply
and shall provide for an 8 hour standby period in the event of failure of the source
supply.
Its Interface with substation equipment will be specified below:
The IEDs shall be connected to the substation bus through Ethernet Switch device in
the same manner as protection relay and other bay level devices.

4.8.5 Local Control Mimic

A Local Control Mimic shall be provided to interface between IED (BCU) and 33kV &
11kV switchgear.
It shall contain all facilities for control, indication, local/remote control selection,
protection and alarms associated with that switchgear section. A mimic diagram
incorporating switches, contactors and relays necessary for local electrical control of
circuit breakers, disconnectors and earth switches together with position indication
shall be included.
The Local Control Mimic shall enable control of the plant even if IED ( BCU) is
unavailable. The electrical interlocking system will apply to the controls operated from
the local control Mimic.

4.8.5.1 Digital Input

Equipment alarms and indications shall be supplied with voltage free contacts.
A single point indication shall be represented by a binary digit. Double points shall be
represented by a pair of binary digits, including illegitimate states.
Equipment with two normal states e.g. circuit breakers and disconnector s, shall be
represented by two source contacts to provide a positive indication of state, including
illegitimate states (double indication).
Alarm signals may be derived from contacts that either close momentarily (fleeting) or
remain closed for the duration of the alarm condition (sustained).
The change of status of certain digital inputs shall be time-tagged to a resolution of 1
ms for Sequence of Events (SOE) reporting. The time-tag recorded with each event
shall be generated from a real time clock synchronized by an external GPS time
receiver in the SCS.

4.8.5.2 Analog Input

Analogue inputs shall be capable of processing standard CT and VT secondary circuits
and milliamp current inputs continuously. The inputs shall be digitized to a resolution
of at least 11 bits plus sign bit.

4.8.5.3 Binary Coded Value Input

An input capability for Binary Coded Values shall be provided e.g., for transformer tap
changer positions.

4.8.5.4 Command Output

Command outputs shall be designed to provide “select and execute” operation. The
select output shall energize the interposing control relays allowing the open or close
command to actuate the appropriate control relay.
The period of the command pulse shall be configurable between 0.5 second and 60
seconds to allow for circuits with synchronizing facilities. The command pulse timer
shall reset immediately the command is executed or the synchronizing is cancelled.
74
4.8.5.5 Pulse Counting (Accumulator) Input
Pulse counting inputs shall acquire and count impulses produced by “volt free”
contacts, which can be either normally open or normally closed. Pulse counting inputs
shall be provided as either a separate input module or using digital inputs.
The accumulative values must be treated as instant analogue values for the purposes of
the equipment at the DCC reading the data.
The SCS shall be capable of counting and storing the number of pulses generated by
metering equipment external to the SCS. The metering equipment will provide
isolated normally open or normally closed contacts.
The pulse counter shall be incremented one count for each cycle of the input (pulse)
until the end of the configured metering period that count shall be stored. The pulse
counter shall be capable of accepting pulses at a rate of ten counts per second.
The SCS shall be capable of responding to commands (Freeze, Reset, Freeze and Reset)
generated internally within the SCS at a regular time, and shall support the use of
external reset pulses for accumulators, and the SCS shall be able to accumulate any
(impulse) occurring while the counter is being read it to avoid losing any input counts.
The count shall be “frozen” (transferred to a buffer register) when commanded by the
master station or when commanded by locally generated contact inputs, also it can
freeze and reset. SCS shall be capable of storing a series of accumulator values, in the
event of loss of communication to the master station for a period not less than three
days and subsequently transmitting them upon request the metering or counting
period should be configurable and possible to down load remotely.
A minimum count of 2 *24 (i.e. 24 bit binary number) shall be capable of being held by
the accumulator.
The Bidder shall describe his method for ensuring the value recorded at DCC (master
station(s)?) corresponds precisely with the value indicated by the pulsing instrument.
Pulse counting inputs shall be provided as either a separate input module or using
digital inputs.

4.8.6 Operator Workstations

The operator workstations shall be rugged, industrial type units and shall be equipped
with a high resolution color visual display unit (VDU), alphanumeric keyboard and
pointing device (mouse/trackball).
The visual display unit (VDU) shall be fitted with high quality Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD), minimum 23-inch screen size, to ensure good resolution and clarity of
information in all areas of the screen. The VDU shall have power on/off switch and
indicator along with brightness, contrast and any other necessary controls, all of which
shall be readily accessible to the operator.
It shall be possible to align the colors accurately once installed in its final position.
The pointing device shall enable quick and accurate movement of the cursor on the
VDU to designate the selected points on the displays. On workstations with more than
one VDU, it shall be possible to freely move the pointer over the contiguous screen
area.
The workstations shall be provided with adequate memory for the required tasks with
25% spare capacity. A highly reliable mass storage device shall be provided in each
workstation sized to satisfy the requirements of the operating system, applications
software and anticipated stored data plus 40% spare capacity.

75
Each workstation shall be supplied with a CDROM drive/writer/re-writer for loading
software and backing-up/restoring software and data.
The operator workstation shall be equipped with a low level audible alarm.
The operator workstations shall be fully configured and set into operation by the
Contractor.
This shall include populating the I/O databases and preparing all graphical screen
displays necessary to provide a user interface suitable for full operation and
monitoring of the substation equipment.
The design and layout of the screen displays shall be approved by the Engineer.
The workstation shall be provided with an operator’s control desk as follows:
The control desk shall be 75 cm high, double pedestal type of reinforced and stiffened
steel construction with flush paneling throughout the knee-hole, sides and front.
Each pedestal shall contain one utility drawer with pencil tray and dividers, and one
file drawer with two adjustable dividers.
Utility drawers shall be mounted on silent-action nylon bearings. File drawers shall be
mounted on telescoping tracks with ball bearing rollers. Drawer pulls shall be bright
chromium plated.
All steel paneling and drawers shall receive two coats of baked enamel finish
throughout the exposed interior and exterior surfaces. Desk tops shall be finished in
plastic laminate, firmly bonded to the substrate.
The tops shall have a 10 cm high plastic laminate edge banding finished flush with the
side panels and drawers. A 20 cm high plastic laminate finished base shall extend all
around the desk perimeter and pedestals also flush with side panels and drawers.
Enamel and plastic laminate colors shall be as selected by the Engineer.
The Tenderer shall submit in his Tender an overview drawing of his proposed operator
workstation and desk.

4.8.7 Printer
All printers shall be high performance and of robust construction, suitable for
continuous duty. The maximum noise level for the operation of any printer is 50 dB (A)
at 1m distance. The printers shall contain off-line self-test facilities that allow
adjustment and maintenance without interfering with the remainder of the computer
system.
Printer consumables shall be readily available locally in Iraq.
All printers shall be A4 size and print on single sheets. The printers shall hold at least
500 sheets of paper, and a paper low alarm shall be provided at the SCS workstation.
The on-demand logging printers shall be black and white laser type. The color printer
shall be either ink jet type or laser type.

4.8.8 Local Area Network (LAN)

The SCS shall utilize a high speed optical fiber LAN that conforms to the recognized
industry standards for the interconnection of SCS equipment.
The LAN shall be complete with all necessary repeaters, bridges, routers, etc., required
for the operation of the SCS equipment.
The LAN is of a fiber ring configuration. Failure in any single point of the substation
LAN shall not result in any loss of substation control functionality.
The Tenderer shall state in their tender submission the protocol used by their proposed
LAN.
76
4.9 Maintenance and Spares
The intended maintenance strategy for the SCS is that the Employer will be able to:
(a) Perform ‘first-line-maintenance’ of all subsystems, i.e. be able to locate faulty
hardware components and replace them with spare parts with the faulty parts
being returned to the original equipment supplier for repair or replacement.
(b) Analyze and define software faults and protocol interface problems with DCC
(c) Re-configure and extend the SCS facilities with minimal assistance being
necessary from the original equipment supplier, including updating databases,
modifying and building new display screens and adding new equipment and
devices to the SCS.
Spare parts for the SCS shall be provided to support the maintenance strategy
described above, particularly bearing in mind the ‘turn around time’ to repair/replace
faulty components.
The Tenderer shall include an itemized and individually priced list of recommended
spare parts in their offer. It is anticipated that this list would include at least one item of
each hardware component used within the SCS for use in first-line-maintenance (or
10% of the components for components that occur in larger numbers within the system,
e.g. I/O cards).
Any special tools, including software and hardware (e.g. lap-top computers)
maintenance tools shall also be itemized.
The Employer shall be at liberty to purchase any numbers of those items at
the tendered price until the end of warranty period.

4.10 Documentation
Documentation for the SCS shall be provided in line with the general provisions
specified in the Tender documentation.
The documentation shall include the complete functional specification of all hardware
and software and complete maintenance and user manuals for both hardware and
software.
In particular, the maintenance documentation shall include detailed fault finding flow
charts to assist with first line maintenance of all subsystems and the user manuals shall
provide detailed instructions on system configuration such that the Owner may re-
configure and extend the SCS facilities without assistance being necessary from the
original equipment supplier.
Complete and original copies of all software programmes, operating system, protocols
analysis and parameters, drivers, data bases, tools, catalogs maintenances documents,
tools, and emulators etc shall be provided as hard copy and as a soft copy on CD all in
English.

4.11 Warranty and Support

The Warranty Period shall be as stated in the contract conditions and ongoing support
for the SCS shall be available for a minimum of five years after Taking over of the
Works.

77
 The Contractor shall provide both hardware and software support for all elements of
the works supplied under the Contract during the warranty period. The warranty
period should start after SAT test.
The Contractor shall describe proposals for providing this service including details of
site staffing level (if any), number of specialist visits, procedure for return & repair of
faulty modules, fault reporting procedures, availability of telephone support, etc.
The Contractor shall install and test all new software releases relating to the existing
functionality that are required to resolve identified problems or maintain warranty
support, at no extra cost during the warranty period.
The Tenderer shall provide details of maintenance agreements as optional prices in
their tender, for the various levels of support that may be purchased after the
completion of the Warranty period.
Prices quoted shall include the costs for providing guaranteed attendance within 24
hours of call-out. Costs for providing a quicker response shall also be stated.

4.12 SCS Testing

4.12 .1 Approach to Testing
The testing philosophy for the SCS shall ensure that the equipment functionality and
site specific facilities are thoroughly exercised and validated at the Contractor's
premises before delivery, and that the site specific facilities are confirmed during
commissioning. The test methodology shall complement the design methodology and
the two shall be developed in parallel.
This document does not constitute a Test Specification or Test Procedure for any part of
the system, rather it sets out the stages at which tests are required and the subjects,
location and purpose of each stage.
All test documents for all tests shall be written by the contractor and submitted to
Owner for approval prior to site testing at least 12 weeks before they are first used.
Where any equipment is not connected to the SCS, but has its facilities marshalled in
the marshalling cabinet, these connections shall be included in the testing regime.
The confidence testing of the operation of the substation equipment from the DCC and
other control and monitoring from the SCS and the DCC is included in the Works.
The equipment shall be entirely compatible with the communications protocols as may
be required by the DCC and with the communications media available.
The Contractor shall undertake specific testing to demonstrate the compatibility of the
SCS with the DCC.

4.12.2 Testing Stages

The SCS shall be subject to acceptance testing as specified in this document. The stages
of testing to be performed at higher levels shall be based on the following:
1) Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT)
To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in
accordance with the Contract requirements.
Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT) shall be performed with the SCS assembled at the
factory as a complete system.
The FAT shall exercise and prove the correct operation of all functions of the
supplied SCS whether used in this project, and the site specific facilities, using
simulation where necessary, including the interface for connection to the DCC.
The Tenderer shall state how they would undertake the FAT of the SCS in their
offer.

78
 2) Site Acceptance Testing (SAT)
To check that the totality of the equipment supplied under the Contract performs in
accordance with the Contract requirements and interacts correctly with equipment
supplied by others and interfaces correctly to the Works.
Site Acceptance Testing (SAT) shall be performed with the complete SCS
installed on site with all interfaces to the substation plant connected and functional
and be conducted after the successful completion of the Contractor’s own testing of
the system.
The SAT shall exercise and prove the correct operation of the functions of the
supplied SCS used in this project, including all the testing of all facilities between the
DCC and SCS. The Tenderer shall state how they would undertake the SAT of the
SCS in their offer.
3) Testing with DCC
Contractor and Owner should check that all indications, status of equipments,
measurements are transferred and indicated at DCC point by point, and to conform
the operation of all commands from DCC.
Contractor shall have the responsibility to approach the Owner (DCC) to perform
these tests and to be agreed jointly between them.

4.12.3 Notice & Witnessing of Tests

The Contractor shall provide, as part of the Programme of Work documentation, a
master plan showing the scheduled dates of testing and shall provide updates to this
plan, when any changes are known, at least 4 weeks in advance of the tests.
The Contractor shall advise Owner in writing of the actual date of commencement of
every test at least 10 working days before the commencement.
Owner shall have the right to witness any tests whether conducted at the Contractor's
premises or elsewhere. Records of every test, whether witnessed or not, shall be taken
by the Contractor and copies sent to Owner within 3 weeks of completion of the tests.

4.12.4 Test Procedures and Result Sheets

The Contractor shall prepare test procedures and result sheets for all tests. The
Contractor shall also prepare a cross reference listing to show that all of the
requirements of the Functional Design Specification have been included in the tests.
Separate test procedures and result sheets shall be provided for factory and site
acceptance tests.
All test procedures and result sheets will be subject to review and approval by Owner.
Test result sheets will be retained as part of the permanent QA record for the SCS.

4.13 Overall Signal Point List

Refer to the Alarm List of Section 3.4

79
PART 5: Wireless Communication System
5.1 General
Wireless Communication system shall be provided to communicate between the SCS
and DCC for the purpose of Data and voice transmission.
The applicable frequency band and frequency shall be confirmed by Owner/ client
during contract stage.
The Contractor shall aware/study the existing system and to be incorporated to his
design if necessary.
The contractor shall consider the space for equipment to be installed in the future at
substations other than Baghdad.
The communication system shall include the transceiver, terminations, coaxial cables,
antenna, tower (not less than 30m high from the ground) and lightning protection
device.
The required equipment shall be fully suited for the existing wireless communication
system at the Contractor’s responsibility.
The wireless system shall be capable of supporting data interfaces complying with ITU-
T G.703, V.11, V.24, V.28, V.35 and X.21.
The wireless system shall be powered from 230Vac (an output of UPS AC distribution
panel). The power supply input to individual items of the wireless system shall be
individually fused.
For all substations , expansion space for wireless system including Antenna shall be
provided under this contract.
5.2 Remote Terminals
The remote terminals of the wireless UHF system shall be of a digital type, and shall
have:
(a) Radio transceiver/receiver units.
(b) Interfaces.
• Asynchronous RS232 interfaces for SCS
• RS485 interfaces
• n*64 Kps synchronous V.35&G.703 at 64Kbps interfaces
• 2- wire telephone interfaces line
• 4-wire E&M signaling interfaces
• Tele protection signaling interfaces.
(c) Telephone handset.
(d) Alarm indications.
(e) Network management interface.
A 1+1 transceiver hot standby redundant conafiguration for ensuring minimum down
time in case of equipment failures shall be provided. Hot standby is the configuration
where the two transmitters and the two receivers operate at the same frequency. The
transceivers are connected to the antenna by a passive combining network, with one
transceiver operational and the other on hot standby.
The main and standby units shall be powered by independent power supplies for full
hot standby operation. Any failure of the operating transmitter shall produce
automatic switch-over to the standby transmitter and initiation of an alarm. The two
receivers are operating at the same time the information is taken for the best received
signal.

80
 The system shall be capable of providing proper performance throughout the life
expectancy of the substation.

5.3 Coaxial cable for Antenna feeder

Antenna feeder coaxial cables and terminations required to complete the installation
shall be provided and correctly fitted. The antenna feeder cable shall be armored and
compatible with the radio equipment supplied and the operating frequencies used. To
get the radio connected to the antenna, an LDF4 type cable shall be required.
The antenna cable shall have the following features:
(a) Impedance: 50 Ω
(b) Losses: less than 0.5 db per 100 m at 500 kHz frequency
(c) Steel wire armored
(d) Fire retardant.
(e) Low attenuation.
(f) High power rating.
5.4 Antenna
Antenna shall be of the type “Yagi” and shall be constructed from stainless steel or hot
dipped galvanized steel parts finished with suitable corrosion resistant paint.
Antenna polarization shall be determined by the Contractor to ensure that adequate
protection against over-reach and front to back interference is provided.
Antennas shall be mounted on the top of the provided steel tower wherever possible
and shall be able to withstand all weather conditions on site. All antennas and feeder
cables shall be equipped with protection devices to ensure that no damage occurs to
the radio system during lightning storms.
The antenna gain shall be 10 dBi or more.
5.5 Tower
The tower shall be of a self-supporting, non-tubular, lattice structure type suitable to
carry the required antenna together with the associated feeders and be able to
withstand the continuous wind pressure and wind gusting encountered on site. Details
of the wind speed withstand capability shall be submitted during the contract period.
The tower design shall be such that under maximum site wind speed from any
direction the maximum change in azimuth and elevation of any antenna shall be no
more than 0.25 degree. It shall not be less than 30m high from the ground.
Any cantilever member or other components subject to fluctuating stress shall be
designed in such a way that it will not fail due to fatigue. The climbing ladder shall be
provided and shall be fitted with safety hoops or another suitable fall protection
arrangement.
Some system of security shall be provided at the bottom of the tower to prevent
unauthorized climbing.
Radio antennas shall be mounted on the faces of the tower rather than on the corners.
Feeder supports shall be provided at 1 meter intervals.
All connections at site shall be made by nut and bolt with means of locking the nut.
Where possible all bolt threads shall be inside the tower.
Lightning protection devices shall be provided to protect and prevent equipment from
malfunction or damage caused by lightning strikes. The design life of the tower shall be
in excess of 30 years.
81
 The Contractor shall be responsible for excavations, setting of foundation and removal
of all surplus soil and restoration of the site to the satisfaction of the Owner.
An earthing system shall be provided and shall be electrically bonded to the tower. A
suitable earthing point shall be provided for the feeders. Details of the proposed
method of earthing shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Owner.
On completion any damaged areas of galvanizing including nuts and bolts shall be
subject to rust removal and cleaning. They shall then be treated with approved zinc
rich epoxy paint.

PART 6 : 11/0.416kV Auxiliary transformer

The auxiliary transformer 250kVA, 11/0.416kV, Dyn11, shall be oil immersed, outdoor
and self-cooled type (ONAN), and shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 60076.
The transformer shall be utilized as auxiliary low voltage AC power supply unit for the
substation. The low voltage winding shall be of star connection with a neutral point
solidly earthed so that 3phase 4wire of 400-230V AC distribution system is composed.

The auxiliary transformers shall include but are not limited to the following features:

(a) Rating plate

(b) Off-circuit tap-changer with ±(2 x 2.5)% voltage variation in 4 equal steps.
(c) O.il level & temperature indicator
(d) Oil preservation system :
May be conservator with Buchholz and dehydrating breather or sealed type (gas
cushion).
(e) Earthing pads/terminals (2 pcs.)
(f) Lifting lugs.
11kV and 0.416kV connections shall be via air-filled cable box with separable polymeric
connectors or heat-shrink termination to PVC cables.
The LV (auxiliary) terminals of the auxiliary transformer shall be provided with an
adequately rated fuse-switch unit suitable for outdoor duty and cable connections

82
PART 7: Station DC System
7.1 General
The Contractor shall provide DC system of a suitable design is used for site operation
equipment and the UPS AC system.

7.2 110V System

The Contractor shall provide One Bank of the battery and two battery chargers
including one DC distribution panel which suit the provided equipment and the
batteries are not less than 100 AH-each.
The equipment shall be suitable for operation from a 230V, 1 phase, 2-wire, 50 Hz
supply with supply voltage variation of plus and minus 10%.
The Contractor shall provide 2-wire, 110 V DC (nominal voltage) fed from the battery
chargers and battery bank, and any fail to two of them will leave the load supplied
with voltage without any interruption. Each supply shall be capable of feeding the
entire station load continuously for the rated duration of 8 hours.
Under normal and emergency operating condition, the voltage at DC output busbars
shall be maintained within the limits of 110V plus and minus 10% with r.m.s. ripple
voltage less than 1 %.
The 110V DC system shall be supplied to the loads imposed by the operation, control,
indications, and alarms of 33kV, 11kV and 400V switchgears and the tap changer
operation of the power transformer.
The Contractor shall base his assessment of these loads on a fully developed substation.
The final arrangement is subject to the approval of the Owner.
On a total loss of AC supply, the discharge capacity of 110 V batteries shall be such that
it can supply the following loads for 8 hours emergency period whilst maintaining the
voltage at the 110V bus bars within the above prescribed limits.
In assessing this emergency loading the Contractor shall again assume a fully
developed substation:
(a) At the beginning of the emergency period, the consecutive tripping load of
all 33kV & 11kV circuit breakers.
(b) An emergency lighting load for period of 8 hours for the substation building which
should not more than 600 W (using saving energy lamps) and the source of the
emergency lighting should be fed from 110V DC batteries (30 % of these lamps
should operate automatically in case of missing AC voltage and the others
operated manually).
(c) Lamps for status indication, auxiliary relays, protection & tripping circuits
of all VCBs, transformer tripping relays, numerical type protection relays,
etc., shall be maintained alive during emergency period.
(d) At the end of the emergency period, the consecutive closing of 33kV
circuit breakers.

Hi-discharge type Ni-Cd battery cells fulfill all requirements according to IEC 62259.

The battery charger are to be provided each being capable of supplying the DC load
requirements under normal operating conditions and at the same time provide the
boast charging requirements of the battery. The two chargers are to be suitable for
operating in parallel with each other.

83
The battery charger is to be supplied from the LV AC distribution switchboard. All
incoming and outgoing feeders to the 110 volt DC control and distribution board are to
be controlled by means of Molded case circuit breakers (MCCB). The Contractor shall
submit the drawings of construction showing such arrangements to the Owner for
approval. The general desired arrangement for the DC distribution system is to suit
Contractor’s equipment particular requirements to the approval of the Owner.
The two battery chargers together with the feeder equipment are to be accommodated
in a common metal clad enclosure, or suit of adjoining cubicles, of pleasing appearance.
Automatic battery and cell regulation shall be the type of control used to ensure that
the DC voltage is kept within the prescribed limits under all operating conditions.
The batteries shall consist of cells of the nickel-cadmium alkaline (Ni-Cd) type with
normal voltage of 1.2V, and be contained in transparent and alkaline-resistant synthetic
resin containers with cover fitted with combined venting and filling opening having
spring closed caps. Inter-raw and inter-cell connections shall be made with hard drawn
copper rod or strip of adequate cross-section and suitably protected against corrosion.
Where cell terminals and connections are exposed to accidental contact they shall be
insulated or shrouded by means of a material which is resistant to attack by the
electrolyte.
The 110V DC control and distribution board shall comprise a floor mounting free
standing enameled sheet steel enclosure of dead front construction equipped with
hinged access doors fitted with locks. On the front of the enclosure, all necessary
instruments, indicating lamps and control switches shall be flush mounted.
Each charger shall be capable of supplying the DC load requirements under normal
operating conditions, and the same time automatically trickle charging the battery at
the required rate to keep it fully charged under the conditions of the specified incoming
AC supply voltage variation whilst maintaining the voltage at the DC bus bar at 110 V
+ 10%.
Each charger shall also be capable of supplying the DC load requirements and at some
time charging the battery from the fully discharged condition to the fully charged
condition during a period of 8 hours with the stated variation in incoming AC supply
voltage. The quick charge rate is to be partly automatic but with possibility of being
manually controlled.
The voltage at the DC bus bars during battery quick charging is to be maintained at
110V ± 10% by automatic and cell tapping. Switches shall be provided to control the
AC supply to the battery chargers.
The battery chargers shall be connected to the DC bus bars through Mold case circuit
breakers (MCCB). All outgoing feeder circuits shall be individually controlled and
protected by double pole circuit breakers. All MCCB's are to have auxiliary contacts
(N/C) for indication of tripping. Each leakage and DC failure relays with minimum of
one pair of normally open contacts for remote indication purpose on each.
The charger shall be equipped with a switch to change-over charging mode from
automatic to manual operation and vice versa (Auto-Manual switch) as well as from
boost charging to trickle charging and vice versa (Boost-Trickle switch).
All such switches and knobs etc. for setting and control for charging operation shall be
flush-mounted in the front panel of charger together with DC voltmeter and ammeter
without opening the front panel.
The 110V DC system will not be earthed at either pole.

84
 A high resistance shall be connected between the positive and negative poles of the
system, and the center point of it connect to earth through an earth fault relay. If an
earth fault had happened on the positive or negative pole of the system that shall be
indicated at the general alarms panel.
The value of the resistance to be connected across the positive and negative poles shall
be such that the event of an earth fault on either side of pole, the earth leakage current
will not exceed 10 mA.
The DC voltage relay with adjustable voltage setting and variable time delay shall be
provided to initiate an alarm at the general alarms panel in the event of DC bus bar
Voltage falling 99V (minus 10 % from the rated voltage).
An emergency changeover contactor shall be provided to automatically switch the
indoor emergency lighting circuits in the event of loss of supply to the AC distribution
board feeding the normal lighting circuits.
The following points to be considered for the chargers and other DC equipment:
The following facilities shall be provided:
(a) Charge and discharge ammeter.
(b) Selector switch for “float”, “boost” and “manual” charge.
(c) Voltmeter with selector switch to permit the “charger current”,
”battery current” and load current to be displayed.
(d) Indication signals for faults etc.
(e) All live parts to be insulated.
(f) The battery cells to be constructed on racks with different heights.
(g) All DC circuits in the circuit breakers panels should be provided with suitable DC
MCCB.
The outgoing circuits shall consist of the following as minimum:

No. Item Q’ty

Control for 33kV Metal
1. clad Switchgear Incoming 2 Nos.
& Transformer
33kV C.B Charge motor
2. 2 Nos.
source
Remote Control panel of
3. 2 Nos.
power transformer
Control for 11kV Metal
4. 2 Nos.
clad Switchgears
11kV VCB Charge motor
5. 2 Nos.
source
Inverter for SCS &
6. 2 Nos.
communication
7. Common panel 1 No.
8. Emergency lighting 1 No.
9. Exterior Lighting 1 No.
10. Guard House 1 No.
11. Spare 4 Nos.
7.3 (deleted)
85
PART 8: Station LV AC System
The Contractor shall provide the 400/230V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz system with solidly
earthed neutral for the AC station services.
The supply will be taken from the 11/0.416kV Aux. transformer. Arrangement and
connection details of the AC system are as shown in drawings.
The LV AC switchboard shall be of free standing metal clad totally clad indoor type
designed for 400/230V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz with solidly earthed neutral and bus-bar
rating of 500A. The switchboard shall comply with IEC 60947.
The incoming of the main 400/230V distribution circuit shall be supplied through a 4-pole
Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) of nominal current rating of not less than 400A. The
protection to be provided by thermal and magnetic release for over load and short circuit
trip with time lag and compensation for ambient temperature .The adjustment of the over
load protection shall be between 80 to 120% of the full load rating.
The incoming circuit shall also be provided with voltage meter & ampere meter, AC
under-voltage relay, phase-sequence relay, earth fault sensing relay and the respective
alarm indication.
The rated symmetrical breaking capacity shall be not less than 35kA.
The outgoing feeders from the main distribution circuit shall be individually controlled
and protected by means of MCCB rated at the pertaining circuit loads. The nominal rating
of each unit shall not be less than 20A.
The outgoing circuits shall consist of the following:

No. Item Q’ty

MV switchgear Building
service As
1.
(air conditioning suitable
equipment, lights, sockets)
Guard man house service
2. (air conditioning 2 Nos.
equipment, light, socket)
3. 33 kV switchgear panels 2 Nos.
Remote Control panel of
4. 2 Nos.
power transformer
5. 11 kV switchgear panels 2 Nos.
110V battery & charger
6. 2 Nos.
incoming circuit.
7. Outdoor lighting panel 1 No.

8. Spare 4 Nos.

86
PART 9: Cables
9.1 General
The Contractor shall provide the 33kV & 24kV Power cables in substation and all LV
auxiliary control and protection cables of a suitable design is used for site operation
equipment.
The materials shall be of first class quality and designed for continuous satisfactory
operation as continuity of supply is of prime importance and to operate satisfactorily
under variation of load, voltage and short circuit or other conditions which may occur
on the system provided that these variations are within the assigned rating of the
apparatus.
The materials used shall be suitable for the clause 2.1.1.3 service conditions and the
soil conditions.
All cables provided under this Contract shall be of type approved by Owner and
shall be provided with the cover which resists a termite and a vermin.

9.2 Medium Voltage Power Cables

Note: All the cables used in 11kV system should be of a rated voltage 12/20 (24) kV.

33kV, 24kV Power Cables shall, as a minimum, meet all the requirements of IEC
standard IEC 60502, 60228, 60949 and BS 6622. Cables laid within buildings and shall
have a low emission of smoke and corrosive gasses and shall also meet the Flame
Propagation, smoke emission and corrosive and acid gas test requirements of BS7835.
The Contractor is required to provide calculations to demonstrate that the cables meet
the required cable cyclic loadings as specified for the transformers at the site
conditions.
(a) Continuous rating calculations are to be performed in accordance
with
IEC 60287.
(b) Short circuit ratings must be calculated using the adiabatic
methods described in IEC 60949.
(c) Cyclic and emergency ratings should be calculated in accordance
with
IEC 60853.
33kV and 24kV Power Cables connecting from switchgears to power transformer’s
primary and secondary shall be of XLPE (cross linked polyethylene), unarmored single
core cable. 24kV Power Cables connecting from switchgear to Aux. transformer’s
primary shall be of XLPE (cross linked polyethylene), armored three cores cable.
General Cable Characteristics
For Conductor
Compact electrolytic annealed stranded plain circular copper Conductor of high
conductivity 99.9% purity in accordance with IEC 60228.
For Conductor Screen
A layer of extruded semi-conducting compound forming a nonmetallic screen. The
extruded semi- conducting compound shall be firmly bonded to the insulation.

For Insulation
Extruded XLPE cured with dry curing process
(a) 24kV nominal thickness 5.5 mm
87
 (b) 36kV nominal thickness 8 mm

For Insulation screen

(a) Nonmetallic screen applied directly over the XLPE insulation and shall consist of a
layer of extruded semi conducting compound and of 50% overlap semi-
conducting swelling tape.
(b) The metallic screen must be a combination of copper stranded and copper tape.
• For 33kv cable the equivalent cross-section area to be 35 mm2
• For 24kv cable the equivalent cross-section area to be 25 mm2

For Filler & bedding

The three cores then laid up with suitable extruded (low thermal resistivity material
easy to remove good flexibility and to be mentioned with the offer such as (EPR) or
(PP)) fillers, a compact circular assembly and bedded with a layer of extruded P.V.C.
2mm thickness.

For Waterproof tape

A layer or suitable tape (swelling tape) for water proofing to be laid over the bedding.

For Metallic Armor

The three cores then armored with double galvanized steel wires according to
IEC60502 clause 12.4.

For PVC Jacket

Over all extruded PVC seamless sheath to prevent moisture from penetrating and
provides good corrosion protection thickness not less than 3 mm and to be anti-termite
treated (non polluted material).

Marking of 24kV or 33kV in the English language should be stamped each one meter
length and treated. Also name, year of manufacture, Voltage & cross section in the
English language.
The colors are to be :
(a)RED for 33kV
(b)BLACK for 24kV

Clause 14.3 IEC 60502

Note: the thickness shall be checked and meet the following formula as minimum:
Ts = 0.035D+1mm
where D = Fictitious diameter immediately after the sheath
Ts = thickness in mm

Type of Cables
36kV Cables (1 x 400 mm2) with rated voltage VO/V=18000/30000 V (suitable for
highest system voltage of 36000 V)
11kV Cables (1 x 400 mm2) with rated voltage VO/V=12000/20000 V (suitable for
highest system voltage of 24000 V)

11kV Cables (3x 150 mm2) with rated voltage VO/V=12000/20000 V (suitable for
highest system voltage of 24000 V)
88
The power cables in substation are to be thermally independent circuits laid in trenches
and ducts generally as shown in the layout drawing.
(a) 33kV cables from switchgear to 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA transformer
(b) 11kV cables from 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA transformer to 11kV switchgear
(c) 24kV cables from 11kV switchgear to 11/0.416kV Aux. transformer circuit
Technical Information for cables
The Contractor shall be required to give following information in Section 2 Technical
Data in the Bidder.
(a) Resistance of copper per km of cable
(b) Inductance per km of Cable
(c) Capacitance per km of Cable
(d) Insulation resistance in M.ohms between core /screen
(e) Weight of copper per km of cable
(f) Overall weight of cable per km of cable
(g) Overall diameter of finished cable in mm
(h) Type of chemical treatment against termite in the outer sheath
(i) Cross section drawing and details of cable layers and catalogues
33 kV, 24 kV cables accessories shall, as a minimum, meet all the requirements of the
latest editions of IEC standard IEC 60502-4 and BS 7888.
Tests
Cables and accessories shall be subjected to inspections and tests by the Owner’s
inspectors or international inspectors at any time during manufacture. The
manufacturers shall provide inspection facilities for the said inspection shall be made at
place of manufacture or at international testing facilities.

Cable terminations
33kV 400mm2 Cables Termination & 24kV 400mm2 & 150 mm2 Cables should be fitted
by cable terminations.

Cable terminations to be slip on or cold/heat shrinkable type complete with all

necessary materials suitable for 36 kV Cable & 24kV Cable from qualified
manufacturers, The terminations should be as follows:

(a) For 33kV 31.5MVA transformer cables

• Outdoor terminations suitable for cable （Tr Cable box)
• Indoor terminations suitable for cable（Metal clad Switchgear)

(b) For 11kV 31.5MVA transformer cables

• Outdoor terminations suitable for cable （Tr Cable box)
• Indoor terminations suitable for cable（Metal clad Switchgear)

(c) For 11kV Aux. transformer cables

• Outdoor terminations suitable for cable
• Indoor terminations suitable for cable

89
9.3 Low voltage Power Cables
Low voltage Power Cables shall, as a minimum, meet all the requirements of IEC
standard IEC 60502-1, 60228.

General Cable Characteristics

For Conductor
Compact electrolytic annealed stranded plain circular copper Conductor of high
conductivity 99.9% purity in accordance with IEC 60228.
For Insulation
Extruded PVC (polyvinyl chloride) according to IEC table.
Core colors
Colored for identifications (Red, Yellow, blue for phase) and black neutral.
For Filler & bedding
The four cores then laid up with suitable fillers to form a compact circular assembly
and bedded with a layer of extruded P.V.C.
For Metallic Armor (for multi-core cables)
The four cores then armored with double galvanized steel wires according to IEC60502-
1 clause 12.4.
For PVC Jacket (PVC grade: ST2 table 4 in IEC 60502-1)
Over all extruded PVC sheath water proof gray color of thickness according to
IEC6052-1 and across section marking of (400V) in the Arabic language should be
stamped each one meter length and treated. Also name, year of manufacture, Voltage &
cross section in the Arabic language.

Type of Cables
400V Cables (1 x 240 mm2) with rated voltage VO/V=600/1000 V (suitable for highest
system voltage of 1200 V)

Four cores cables

These cables are required to meet the current rating of each circuit.
Technical Information for cables
The Contractor shall be required to give following information in Section 2 Technical
Data in the Bidder:
(a) Resistance of copper per km of cable
(b) Inductance per km of Cable
(c) Capacitance per km of Cable
(d) Insulation resistance in M.ohms between core /screen
(e) Weight of copper per km of cable
(f) Overall weight of cable per km of cable
(g) Overall diameter of finished cable in mm
(h) Type of chemical treatment against termite in the outer sheath
(i) Cross section drawing and details of cable layers and catalogues
400V cables accessories shall, as a minimum, meet all the requirements of the latest
editions of IEC standard IEC 60502-1.

90
 Tests
Cables shall be subjected to inspections and tests by the Owner’s inspectors or
international inspectors at any time during manufacture. The manufacturers shall
provide inspector’s facilities for any said inspection shall be made at place of
manufacture or at international testing facilities.

9.4 Control & Auxiliary Cables

All control, alarm and indication cables shall be of single-core or multi-core, PVC
insulation and overall over sheath, stranded copper conductors with galvanized steel
wire armor as a minimum, meet all the requirements of IEC standard IEC 60502-1 and
BS6346.
The conductors shall be plain annealed copper wire complying with IEC 60228 as
applicable or equivalent and all cores shall be clearly identified by printed numbers at
regular intervals.
Many instances of rats eating away the outer PVC insulation cover are reported,
therefore, a suitable non-corrosive wire armor to make the cable vermin-proof shall be
provided for all low voltage auxiliary and control and protection cables.
The minimum conductor size shall be not less than seven strands of 0.67 mm diameter
wire, or in the case of single wire conductors the minimum cross-sectional area shall be
not less than 2.5 mm2 for control and auxiliary circuits and 4 mm2 for current
transformer circuits. When the Contractor uses a less than 2.5mm conductor for an
electronic circuit, the approval of Owner shall be needed.
The Contractor is responsible for checking all cable routes for burden on CT's and VTs
for voltage drop on DC control and trip circuits and for satisfactory service with the
supplied equipment. It is also the Contractor's responsibility to take precautions to
prevent damage to cable sheaths from system earth fault current.
The Contractor shall provide fully detailed wiring diagrams covering all parts of the
substation.

9.5 Termination of cables and wires

The cable cores shall be long enough to be terminated to any terminal in an enclosure
without extension.
All cables shall enter cubicles and boxes from bottom side. PVC sheathed cables shall
be terminated by compression glands complying with BS 6121 or equivalent.
Where cable cores are liable to be in contact with oil or oil vapor the insulation shall be
unaffected by oil. The Contractor must terminate all power and control cables inside
the appropriate cubicle.
The spare cores of all multicore cables shall be numbered and terminate at a terminal
block in the cubicle. AC terminals shall be clearly color coded and shrouded.
Colors shall be marked on cable box, cable tail ends and single core cables at all
connecting points and/or any positions. Cable boxes shall be marked with stamped
stainless steel labels indicating the purpose of the supply where such supply is not
obvious.

91
9.6 Cable installation requirement
The following requirements shall apply
LV power cables, multicore cables and communication cables (if necessary) shall each
be routed in separate trays, racks, ducts, troughs or compartments separated by steel
sheet barriers.
Fibre optic cable (if necessary) shall be routed and installed such that they are protected
from deformation or damage by auxiliary power or control cables throughout their
installed length when available.
Sufficient space shall be allowed to run in each duct or compartment the necessary
draw wires, being of non-corrosive metal and having devices for securing the
conductors. A spare capacity of 20% shall be provided on cable trays, ladder racks,
ducts, compartments, or openings in walls and floors.
Openings in floors and foundation pads shall be large enough to permit free movement
of cables during installation. Openings in walls and floors shall be sealed after the cable
installation with a fireproof barrier.
Cabling and wiring installations shall be arranged to minimize the risk of fire and
damage which might be caused in the event of fire.
Only one layer of power cables shall be laid on one tray or in one cable channel.
All cables leaving buildings for outside plant shall be laid in cable ducts or trenches
when available.
Where cables emerge from grade they shall be protected by a section of steel pipe
extending 150mm above grade.
Cables above ground shall be run on galvanized cable racks, tray or supports, suitably
clipped to prevent movement. Care shall be taken to provide for differential movement
between structures.
Protection from direct sunlight shall be provided by means of suitable continuously
covering the cable and of the same materials as the rack/tray. Cable strap shall be
made of stainless steel.

9.7 Cable trays, racks, ladders and associated materials

The Contractor shall furnish and install all cable trays, horizontal and vertical, required
as specified below.
Cable tray systems shall be made of straight sections, fitting and accessories.
Trays shall have an overall side rail height of 100mm, with a minimum loading depth
of 75mm.
Widths shall be 300mm and 600mm.
Straight section side rails shall be of I-Beam design with a rung retaining weld bead. All
straight sections shall be supplied in standard lengths of 4000mm.
Bolted joints between tray sections shall be made up tight and rigid, using a full
complement of splice plates, bolts, washers, and locking devices, as called for by the
manufacturer’s design.
Cable tray covers shall be provided for all trays located outdoors, including open
building structures, and wherever exposed to falling debris in all areas. Cable trays
shall be supported not more than 2000mm.
The vertical distance between the two (2) cable trays shall be minimum 300 mm, unless
specifically indicated.
Where equipment is mounted on walls and/or columns, Contractor shall provide
structural steel supports and suitable anchors.

92
9.8 Conduit and installation of conduit system
All rigid conduits to be furnished shall be galvanized, unless otherwise noted.
Minimum size of all conduits shall be 20mm. All embedded lighting conduits shall be
galvanized intermediate metallic conduit (IMC). Exposed lighting conduit may be
electrical metallic tubing (EMT). Switches and receptacles may be surface or flush
mounted.
Each piece of conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects and threaded
at each end. Coupling shall be cleanly cut. The manufacturer’s name shall be attached
to or stamped on each piece.
In areas with corrosive atmosphere, steel conduit shall be provided with an epoxy
coating. In no case shall the conduit be filled by more than 40%.
Flexible metallic tubing may be used for small runs. Flexible conduit shall be used only
in location dry, non-hazardous, and not exposed to oil, corrosive fume or steam.
Minimum size of the flexible metallic tubing shall be 12mm.
Exposed conduit shall be run in straight lines parallel to column lines, walls, or beans.
Where conduits are grouped, the bends and fittings shall be installed so as to present
an orderly appearance. Unnecessary bending or crossing shall be avoided.
Conduit shall be supported on approved type of galvanized wall brackets, ceiling
trapeze, strap hangers, or pipe straps, secured by means of anchor bolts on hollow
masonry units, expansion bolts in concrete or brick, and machine screws on metal
surfaces. Wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete shall not be used as a base to
secure conduit support.
Concealed horizontal and vertical runs in hollow space shall be supported at intervals
of 3 m or less. Tapped conduits and conduits terminating in end boxes or fittings shall
be supported not farther than 300mm from the terminals.
The groups of exposed conduits run together, the conduits shall be supported by racks,
made of steel channel or angle iron, which shall be hung from floor slab or the building
steel. All conduits shall be clamped to the supporting channel or angle with “U”-bolts,
each being clamped at every rack. Special wrenches shall be used to avoid injuring the
galvanized coating on conduits.
Conduit joints and connections shall be made thoroughly watertight and rustproof by
means of the application of a thread compound, which will not insulate the joint. Each
threaded joint shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all cutting oil before the
compound is applied. Red lead is suitable for application for embedded conduits, and
white lead is suitable for application for exposed conduits. Running threads shall be
avoided.
Coupling may be used in dry and exposed locations. They may also be used in wet
exposed locations in vertical runs only, provided they are installed with fixed threaded
connection at top.
They may be used in concrete if adequately waterproofed to prevent leakage.
Standard radius bends are generally to be used for steel conduits but special long
radius bends shall be used whenever specifically required. The long radius bends are to
have radii as the physical conditions will permit. Field bends of metallic conduit shall
be made in such a manner the internal diameter of the conduit is not materially
changed, and the protective coating on the inside of the conduit is not injured. The
bends shall be free of kinks, indentation, or flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be
applied in making any conduit bends.

93
 Galvanized structural steel members may be drilled or punched for conduit supporting
bolts, provided the holes are immediately painted with aluminum paint and
galvanized or rust-resisting bolt are used.
Templates shall be provided where embedded they shall be properly braced on the
inside so that the concrete will not defect them. Thread holes in box frames shall be
protected from injury.

Conduits shall be provided wherever possible, at least 300mm away from heating
devices, or similar equipment, when it is evident that such proximity might impair the
service life of cables.

9.9 Painting
The painting at site of electrical apparatus and equipment shall be limited to touching
up any surfaces scratched or marred during shipment or inland transportation or
installation.

PART 10 : Earthing System

The earthing system shall be designed to meet the requirements of this specification and
shall be in accordance with IEEE 80. The Contractor shall present calculations to show the
earthing system meets these requirements and can be shown to be safe in terms of touch,
step and transferred potentials.
The Soil Resistivity of all substations sites are preliminary measured and found as shown
on Appendix E, these measurements are preliminary, the Contractor himself should
perform a new measurements to be used in the substations earthing calculations.
A maximum earth resistance of one (1) ohm shall be obtained. The calculation shall take
into consideration the soil resistivity of the places where the substation will be installed.
Design calculations must be provided by the Contractor to obtain the above result
together with calculations for the step and touch voltages.
Earth rods of copper weld type 19 mm diameter and 2500 mm long shall be disposed in
groups at locations in particular adjacent to surge diverters to ensure that the connections
from these items to the earthing system are as short and as straight as possible. A
separate set of rods shall also be installed for independently earthing each substation
fence at suitable intervals.
Main earth bar installed in the form of a ring around the substation comprising stranded
copper cable of not less than 95 mm2 minimum cross sectional area.
Subsidiary connections from this main earth bar shall be not less than 70 mm2 cross
sectional area. The size of the earth bar to be used at each specific site shall need to be
supported with calculations.
The subsidiary and branch connections also being stranded copper cables, where these
earth conductors run through concrete, they shall be PVC sheathed in order to protect the
conductors against corrosion.
All apparatus and cable glands may be earthed by a separate connection. These branch
connections being grouped and each group jointed to the main earth bar by a subsidiary
connection.
Mechanism boxes for disconnectors and earthing switches shall have earth connections
separate from these for the associated equipment.

94
Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a separate earthing terminal on a vertical
face above ground level, fixing and foundation bolts will not be used for making earth
connections.
All metal parts of 33kV and 11kV switchgear other than those forming part of an electrical
circuit shall be connected to a hard drawn, high conductivity, copper earth conductor on
each unit.
It shall be bolted to the main frame and shall be located so as to provide convenient
facilities for earthing cable sheaths and for use with the earthing devices.
Means shall be provided for coupling earth bars of adjacent units to form a continuous
earth bar. The joints shall be tinned, bolted and sweated.
The neutral of the 11 kV side of the transformer shall be separately connected to around
with a Lightning arrester in parallel with a single pole on-load disconnector connected in
series with a 21.1 ohm resistor as shown in the attached single line diagram including the
equipment complete with all necessary structures and connections.
After installation of earth system the Contractor shall measure the resistance of the
substation earthing mesh.
The method used shall preferably be the “fall of potential” method, requiring the
availability of a local low voltage supply but other methods using an earth resistance
megger will be acceptable in the event of a local supply being unavailable

95
PART 11: Inspection and Tests

11.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out Factory tests, Type test and Site test in accordance with
the latest IEC standard. The Contractor shall submit all test procedures to the Owner
for approval.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the approval test procedures.
All tests results shall be approved by Owner. The approval of the tests, acceptance of
the test certificates or waiving of tests shall not relieve the contractor from his
contractual obligations.

11.2 Inspection and Tests

The equipment's/material shall be subjected to inspection and tests by the Owner at
any time during manufacture. The Contractor shall provide all inspection facilities for
the said inspection and testing.
All testing and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture.
The Owner shall have the right of rejecting any portion of the equipment's/material at
any time during manufacture if it does not meet the requirements of this specification
in all particulars. He shall oversee the packing and shipping of all
equipment's/materials to be supplied.

11.3 Test at manufacture's work

Test at Contractor work shall comprise type tests and routine tests.
11.3.1 type test
These tests are in general those detailed in the IEC which pertain to the equipment
being tested. Type tests are to prove the general design of the equipment and the
manufacturer may submit test certificates of tests which have been carried out on
identical equipment not withstanding any provision in an IEC, the Owner shall have
the right to accept such certificate in lieu of the specified type test or to reject them. The
type test prescribed shall be carried out in all cases where such certificates are not
available or are rejected.
Certified test certificate issued by ASTA, KEMA or other internationally recognized
testing authority for type test carried out on identical C.B will be accepted in lieu.
1) One circuit breaker of each type and rating shall be subjected to following
type test in accordance with the latest issue of the IEC specifications
(a) Operation test.
(b) Mechanical endurance.
(c) Test of temperature rise.
(d) Making capacity, breaking capacity and short time current test.
(e) Short circuit test.
(f) Insulation level.
2) 33kV & 11kV Metal enclosed GIS Switchgear Should be type tested according to the
relevant IEC.
3) 33/11kV 31.5MVA Transformer
One transformer shall be subjected to the relevant type tests including the following
tests in accordance with the latest issue of IEC.
(a) Dielectric type test (IEC 60076-2).
(b) Sound level measurement.
96
 (c) Determination of capacitance winding- to- earth and between windings.
(d) Measurements of insulation resistance to earth of the windings and
dissipation factor (Tan Delta) of the insulation system capacitances.
(e) Temperature rise test (only the first unit need for a type test)
(f) Lightning Impulse chopped on the tail as item 14.3 of IEC 60076- 3.

Short circuit test shall be submitted for a transformer of the same rating and voltages
with tap changer in accordance with IEC 60076-5
A certified test short circuit test issued by ASTA, KEMA or other internationally
recognized testing authority for type test carried out on a transformer with higher
rating and relevant calculations may be accepted in lieu.

4) 11/0.416kV 250kVA Auxiliary Transformer

One transformer shall be subjected to the relevant type tests including
chopped wave test in accordance with the latest issue of IEC.
5) Protection relays are to be type tested in accordance with the latest IEC 60068,
IEC60255.
One relay from the outgoing feeders protection relays shall be type tested according
to applicable IEC and to be witnessed by MoE staff.

11.3.2 Routine Tests

The following routine test items, but not limited to, shall be carried out at
manufacturer's factory in accordance to the latest issue of IEC specifications:
The test of the Substation control system shall be executed referring to item 3.5.12 (SCS
Testing).
1) 33kV Metal enclosed GIS Switchgear
- 33kV Circuit Breaker cubicle
(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test ( Interlocking test D.S and C.B)
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d) Power-frequency voltage withstand test
(e) Mechanical operating tests of C.B
(f) Timing test of closing and open operation of C.B
(g) Primary injection tests on current transformer including measurement of current
ratio and check of relative polarity
(h) Residual voltage test of arrester
(i) Partial discharge test of arrester
(j) Operation test of surge counter and surge recorder
(k) Protection relays test
(l) Indicating meters test
Note: Magnetization curves and DC resistance values shall be submitted
for each current transformer.

- 33kV disconnector, earthing switch and lightning arrester cubicle

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test ( Interlocking test DS and E.S)
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d) Power-frequency voltage withstand test
97
 (e) Tests on voltage transformer including measurement of voltage ratio and
check of relative polarity
(f) Indicating meters test
Note: DC resistance values to be given for voltage transformers

2) 33/11kV 31.5 MVA Transformer

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Measurement of winding resistance
(c) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
(d) Measurement of short-circuit impedance and on-load loss
(e) Measurement of no-load loss and current
(f) Function test of instruments
(g) AC voltage Dielectric routine tests
(h) Mechanical test for tank (Oil tightness check and Vacuum test)
(i) Tests of on-load tap-changer
(j) Temperature rise test (only the first unit need for a type test)
(k) Impulse test (only the first unit need for a type test)
(l) Measurement of acoustic sound level (only the first unit need for a type test)

- Transformer control cubicle

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Insulation resistance test
(c) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit

3) Neutral Earthing Resister cubicle & arrester of 33/11kV neutral

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test of DS
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d) Power-frequency voltage withstand test
(e) Primary injection tests on current transformer including measurement of current
ratio and check of relative polarity
(f) Tests on voltage transformer including measurement of voltage ratio and check
of relative polarity
(g) Residual voltage test of arrester
(h) Partial discharge test of arrester
(i) Operation test of surge counter and surge recorder
(j) Protection relays test
(k) Indicating meters test
Note: Magnetization curves and DC resistance values shall be submitted for each
current transformer. DC resistance values to be given for voltage transformers
as well.

4) 11kV Metal enclosed GIS

Switchgear
- 11 kV transformer cubicle
(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test ( Interlocking test C.B and E.S)
(c) Insulation resistance test
98
 (d)Power-frequency voltage withstand test
(e)Mechanical operating tests of C.B
(f)Timing test of closing and open operation of C.B
(g)Tests on voltage transformer including measurement of voltage ratio and
check of relative polarity
(h) Primary injection tests on current transformer including measurement of
current ratio and check of relative polarity
(i) Protection relays test
(j) Indicating meters test
Note: Magnetization curves and DC resistance values shall be submitted for each
current transformer. DC resistance values to be given for voltage
transformers as well.

- 11kV Outgoing , Future capacitor bank and Aux. transformer cubicle

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test ( Interlocking test C.B and E.S)
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d)Power-frequency voltage withstand test
(e) Mechanical operating tests of C.B
(f) Timing test of closing and open operation of C.B
(g) Primary injection tests on current transformer including measurement of
current ratio and check of relative polarity
(h) Protection relays test
(i) Indicating meters test

- 11kV Bus coupler cubicle

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Functional operation test (c) Insulation resistance test
(d)Power-frequency voltage withstand test
(e) Mechanical operating tests of C.B
(f) Timing test of closing and open operation of C.B
(g) Primary injection tests on current transformer including measurement of
current ratio and check of relative polarity
(h) Protection relays test
(i) Indicating meters test

5) Communication equipment (a)

Design and Visual check (b)
Functional operation test (c)
Insulation resistance test

6) 11/0.416kV 250kVA Auxiliary transformer

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Measurement of winding resistance
(c) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
(d) Dielectric routine tests

99
7) DC system (Battery and Chargers) (a)
D e s i g n and Visual check
(b) Circuit test (conductive check by tester)
(c) Insulation resistance test
(d) Discharge test
(e) Operation test for load voltage compensator
(f) Relay operation test
(g) Indicating meter test
(h) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit
(i) Measurement of no-load current and DC voltage
(j) Low voltage test (Check of voltage decrease from threshold setting)

8) DC panel
(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Insulation resistance test
(c) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit

9) Inverter
(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit

10) UPS AC panel

(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Insulation resistance test
(c) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit

11) AC LV panel
(a) Design and Visual check
(b) Insulation resistance test
(c) Function test for control circuit, indicating circuit and alarm circuit

12) 33kV and 11kV power cables

(a) Design and visual check
(b) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductors
(c) Partial discharge test
(d) Voltage test
(e) Check of dimensions

13) LV power & control cables

(a) Design and visual check
(b) Measurement of electrical resistance of conductors
(c) Voltage test
(d) Check of dimensions

100
11.4 Site test
After complete installation, the equipment shall be tested at Site to ensure the proper
operation and the readiness for service. All tests shall be performed according to
specifications of the equipment manufacturer.
All tests shall be performed to verify that the equipment comply with approved drawings,
specifications and manufactures instructions.
The test of the Substation control system shall be executed referring to item 3.5.12 (SCS
Testing).
1) 33kV & 11kV Switchgear
The following items have to be tested after installation.
(a) General inspection
(b) Checking against the complete assembly equipment specification for compliance
of ratings of all major components, i.e. bus, circuit breaker, fuses, relays, etc.
(c) Checking the correct phasing of equipment connections.
(d) Checking of tightness of connections and fastenings for bus insulators, supports,
etc., and use of proper tools
(e) Measurement of gas condition.
(f) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits.
(g) Testing of measuring instruments
(h) Secondary injection tests on all protection relays.
(i) Primary inject test on all protection relays and associated current
(j) transformer circuit
(k) Complete electrical functioning tests from Local/Remote/ DCC for CB’s, DS’s,
Earthing Switches etc including the function of all interlocks.
(l) Power frequency voltage withstand test
(m) Dielectric tests on auxiliary circuits
(n) Gas tightness tests .

Measurements and tests of circuit breakers shall include as a minimum:

• Insulation resistance measurement;
• Measurement of contact timing and travel analysis in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions;
• Testing of mechanical operating;
• Testing of operating, such as, installation and removal from breaker cell, test
position operation, tripping via relays & controls, correct interlocks operation,
alarms, meters, etc.
Measurements and tests of current transformers shall include as a minimum:
• Inspection of the general condition
• Insulation resistance measurements to earth and between windings
• Secondary winding resistance measurement and burden checks
• Ratio checks
• Magnetizing voltage
• Polarity test
Measurements and tests of voltage transformers shall include as a minimum:
• Inspection of the general condition.
• Insulation resistance measurements to earth and between winding.
• No-load test with normal applied voltage on secondary terminals for a minimum
of 30 minutes (1VTs only)
101
 • Ratio checks.
• Polarity test
• Burden measurement.

2) 33/11kV 31.5MVA Power transformer

After the transformer has been assembled the following tests shall be executed as a
minimum requirement.
(a) General inspection
(b) Measurement of Winding Ratio on all tap positions
(c) Vector group test
(d) Turns ratio test
(e) Dielectric Strength of the Insulation Oil
(f) Insulation resistance tests between windings and each winding to earth
(g) Measurement of dc winding resistance (All taps)
(h) OLTC function tests including remote control systems.
(i) Alarm and trip function tests of protection i.e. Bucholz Relays, Oil levels,
Pressure protection.
(j) Measurements and tests of bushing current transformers
(k) Energizing and setting to work.
(l) Measurement of noise level.

3) Communication equipment
(a) Physical Site Inspection
(b) Operational checks

4) 11/0.416kV 250kVA Auxiliary transformer

(a) General inspection
(b) Measurement of Winding Ratio on all tap positions
(c) Vector group test
(d) Turns ratio test
(e) Dielectric Strength of the Insulation Oil
(f) Insulation resistance tests between windings and each winding to earth
(g) Measurement of dc winding resistance (All taps)
(h) Energizing and setting to work.

5) 33kV and 11kV power cables

(a) General inspection of the cable routes, verification of proper installation, fixing
to the racks, bending radius, etc.
(b) Verification of proper earthing of the screen and armouring.
(c) Measurement of Conductor Resistance;
(d) The Contractor shall measure and record the following as-installed circuit data;
• As-installed circuit length in m
• DC conductor resistance
• AC conductor resistance(Measured and/or derived)
(e) Verification of proper condition of external surfaces.
(f) Measurement of cables insulation resistance.
(g) Circuit phasing check and marking.

102
 (h) Capacitance of circuit
(i) Sheath continuity checks.
Test On Sheath Protective Covering; A voltage of 12kV DC for one minute shall be
applied between the sheath and ground on each length of cable sheath, with all
sheath voltage limiters disconnected

6) LV cables and multi-core control cable

(a) General inspection of the cable routes, verification of proper installation,
(b) fixing to the racks, bending radius, etc.
(c) Verification of proper earthing of the screen and armouring.
(d) Measurement of cables insulation resistance.
(e) Verification of proper condition of external surfaces.

7) DC Systems
- Battery charger
(a) Physical Site Inspection
(b) Testing of breaker trip settings
(c) Measurement the continuity of each current carrying connections by
MEGGER
(d) Testing the changing output voltage function by disconnected battery
(e) Testing the quick charge and trickle charge mode;
(f) Testing the charging current limiting (maximum current) by short-circuited
DC output;
(g) Testing earth-fault monitoring
(h) Testing the Battery Charger inputs/digital outputs and control (LED’s) and
protection functions at/from the Battery Charger Board , from the station
level via the SCS System (in control room) and from the Regional DCC.
Testing the Battery Charger inputs/digital outputs, alarm indications (LED’s) and
fault monitoring at the Battery Charger Board and at the sequence event recorder (in
control room) and at the Regional DCC.

- Batteries
(a) General Inspection
(b) Checking of the battery assembly to verify clearances
(c) Checking of properly installed cell terminal coverings
(d) Battery cells are properly installed and numbered;
(e) Check Battery electrolyte i.e., level, color and specific gravity
(f) Charging the battery with constant-current in manual mode and recording
the charging current, voltage of each cell and electrolyte temperature of pilot
cell(s) every hour.
(g) Discharging the battery to a final voltage of min. 1.0 V and recording the
battery voltage, cell voltage and electrolyte temperature of pilot cell(s) every
hour.
(h) Measurement of insulation resistance against the ground. For new batteries
the value shall not be > 1 MΩ.

103
 - Distribution panel
(a) General inspection (Physical and visual checks)
(b) Operational checks
(c) Voltage test 2000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
(d) Insulation resistance 500 VDC, R > 50 M Ohm

8) Grounding System-Inspection
Measuring of earthing impedance, touch and step voltage will check the
effectiveness of the installed earthing system. Measurements will be carried out
with the current injection using ‘Current and voltage measurement’ method.
(a) Evidence of damage to cables. Repair or replace damaged cables.
(b) Bolted connections made up tight.
(c) Welded or brazed connections are tight.
(d) Exposed cable runs adequately supported and clamped.
(e) Test the resistance of the grounding system by use of Ground Megger Method.
(Resistance to earth shall not exceed 1 ohm.)
(f) Test shall be made at the following locations:
(g) All grounding wells
(h) Substation transformer

9) Cable Tray Systems

- Physical Site Inspection
Checking of the cable tray attachments to brackets and supports, if according to
instructions and this specification and whether appropriate number and quality of
anchor bolts or expansion bolts have been used;

10) Station Auxiliary

- LV AC Distribution panel
Checking of interior to verify clearances between live electrical parts, insulation of
phase and neutral bus from panel, and tightness of all mechanical connections;
(a) General Inspection
(b) Checking of wiring termination and conductor sizes including cable
dentification
(c) Electrical & Mechanical Operational tests
(d) Voltage test 2000 V, 50 Hz, 1 min
(e) Measurement of insulation resistance 500 VDC, R > 50 Mohm

104
 Part 12 : Civil Specification
1. General
1.1 Scope of Work:
The Civil Works, including foundations, buildings, roads, path ways, etc., to be
constructed, shall consist of design, construction, testing, supply, delivery,
supervision, installation, commissioning and guaranteeing of all works shown on
the drawings and specified herein.
The material and workmanship shall be the best of their respective kinds and to
standards not less than specified herein.

1.1.1 Extent of Work

Reference should be made to the drawings and soil investigation reports.
The details shown on the drawings and soil investigation reports(which is made by
the contractor) shall be used for the purpose of tendering. The Contractor shall note
that it is his responsibility to submit all designs and engineering drawings for all
elements of the works as required and specified, in accordance with the actual soil
conditions and design data that prevail at each substation site .
Make provision to prepare and design drawings to approval of the Owner, liaise
with all local, government, and other relevant authorities for activities including and
not limited to obtaining approvals and clearances for services, obtaining building
permit and permanent services connections such as water, drainage, telephone and
making necessary payments, etc.
The Contractor is bound to provide complete works, even if the constructions,
equipment or services to be provided are not specifically mentioned in the
specification.
The Contractor shall be responsible for, but not limited to, the following for all
substations civil works;
- Detailed design, construction drawings including bar bending schedule,
overall construction schedule and documents necessary for completion and
maintenance of required civil works.
- Topographical surveys and soil investigations.
- Testing of soils, water and materials used.
- Earthworks, grading and landscaping.
- Temporary access roads to the Substation from public roads, and temporary
service roads inside the Substation.
- Asphalt or concrete paved permanent access roads from gate of Substation
to outside the Substation based on site layout of the Tender drawings.
- Concrete paved permanent service roads inside the Substation.
- MV switchgear and auxiliary building to accommodate the 33 kV and 11 kV
switchgears and associated control as well as protection
equipment.
- 33/11 kV Transformer foundations, bunds, oil containments and fire walls.
- Guard house.
- Cable trenches should be with a depth of 180 cm (-30 cm from zero level
and +150 cm from the zero level), ducts and draw pits.
Boundary wall with main, sub and personnel gates based on site layout of
the Tender drawings.

105
 - All structure and plant foundations.
- Foul, surface water drainage systems and septic tank.
- Building services including plumbing system, heating, ventilation and air
conditioning system, drainage and sewers, small power installations,
normal and emergency lighting, telephones, fire detection and alarm as well
as firefighting systems, etc.
- Water storage tanks.
- All temporary works.
- Preparation of as-built documents and drawings.
- Any other works required and approved by the Owner.

1.1.2 Site Facilities for the Owner & Consultant / Contractor:

The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary construction facilities such as
site office with facilities, electric power supply, water etc. for each substation. The
Contractor's site office shall include at least two desks and chairs for the Owner.
After the completion of the work covered by the Contract, all facilities at work are as
shall be removed by the Contractor, except those directed by the Owner to remain.
The Site shall be cleared and cleaned by the Contractor.
1.1.3 Standards and Design Criteria
Except where otherwise specified, implied or otherwise agreed in the Contract, the
design, and the specification of materials and workmanship shall comply in all
respects with the requirements of the latest applicable ACI,ASTM,AASHTO and
Other International Standards
The Contractor shall submit all design calculations to the Owner for his approval
prior to the commencement of preparation of working and shop drawings. After the
Owner has approved the calculations, the Contractor shall prepare all necessary
working and shop drawings and submit same for approval by the Owner, as
specified under the "Submittal" Section of the Specifications.
1.1.4 Design Loading
(a) Dead and live loading
International standards shall be used to determine all dead and imposed loads
amended only as follows. Snow loading shall be considered if appropriate. Roofs
without access should be designed for sand loading of 1 kN/m2, and where access is
provided it should be designed for a loading of 1.50 kN/m2.
(b) Wind loading
Wind loadings as determined in CP3 Chapter V plus all amendments, shall be
applied to all buildings and structures. Although CP3 is a superseded document it
may be used for reference in this case. In determining Vs in the code for wind
loading, basic wind speed of 40 m/s equivalent to V of 34.2 m/s 12 m above GL,at
15 °C, should be used and factors S1 and S3 should be taken as unity. Factor
S2should be determined from Table 3 in Part 2 of the Code surface category 1 -"Open
country with no obstruction”.
(c) Seismic loading
All structures including buildings and their foundations shall be designed for
seismic events as defined in the “Uniform Building Code” Zone 3.
(d) Short Circuit forces
The dynamic load during the short circuit loading shall be considered.
(e) Operation Loads
Any kind of operation loads during the maintenance shall be considered.

106
1.1.5 Load Combinations and Factors of Safety
The load combinations for Dead, Live and Wind loadings, and factors of safety, shall
be in accordance with the design Standard being used for the building or structure
being analyzed as followings;

Load Factor
Load Loading
Combination Condition
Dead Load Conductor Wind /
Tension Imposed Earthquake
Adverse Beneficial (if applicable)

1 Dead + Short 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2

Circuit +wind
2 Dead + Short 1.2 1.0 1.2 1.2 1.2
Circuit +
Earthquake
3 Dead + Mechanical 1.2 1.0 N/A 1.2 1.2
Operation + wind

1.1.6 Submittals
The Contractor shall comply fully with the requirements specified in these
documents. The following requirements are specific to the Civil and Building works
under the contract. The Contractor shall not commence manufacturing or fabricating
any structure, building or other civil works until his working and shop drawings
have been approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit the following
preliminary drawings for approval, together with such details of his calculations and
methods adopted as the Owner may require, all in accordance with these
Specifications and the Contract Schedule.

(a) The General Arrangement of each Substation showing the principal dimensions
and positions of buildings, roads, services, transformers, etc.
(b) Drawings showing the dimensions of the principal members of all structures. The
final working and shop drawings, which shall be submitted to the Owner, after the
approval of the preliminary drawings and details of calculations specified above,
shall be in sufficient detail to show:
i. The general arrangement, details and dimensions of all parts of buildings,
steel structures and of all other civil works to be supplied under the Contract.
ii. The nature of the materials from which the various parts are to be made
together with their surface finish.
iii. Weld details, machining and assembly tolerances for all assemblies.
iv. The manner in which such parts are designed to function.
v. Schedules of materials and details in full for all structural steel members and
reinforcing bars.
vi. Detailed arrangement of various equipments in the MV switchgear and
auxiliary buildings.

In addition to the above, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner any further
information that the Owner may require to enable him to approve the final working
and shop drawings. After the drawings have been approved, no changes shall be
made to the drawings without the written permission of the Owner. The Changes to
107
 facilitate fabrication, to speed up delivery or to permit substitutions of material,
which is in short supply, may be made if approved in writing by the Owner. The
Contractor shall furnish the Owner with duplicate copies of certified mill test reports
before fabrication is commenced on any materials covered by such reports.
Approval by the Owner of the Contractor's drawings shall not relieve the Contractor
of responsibility for the correctness thereof, nor for the results arising from errors or
omissions, nor for any faults or defects, nor for failure in the matter of guarantee,
which may become evident during erection or subsequent operation.

1.1.7 Soil Investigations

The details shown on the soil investigation reports(contractor responsibility) shall
be used The Contractor shall carry out whatever soil investigations and the testing
deemed necessary for the proper foundation design and construction to suit the site
conditions.
No claim from the Contractor for price adjustment on account of any changes in the
foundation works will be accepted under any circumstances.
The results and interpretation of all soil investigations including the testing and the
calculations in respect of the soil bearing capacity values for the sites shall be
submitted for approval by the Owner prior to the foundation design and the
drawings.
No working drawing(s) will be approved by the Owner until such test values have
been submitted and approved.
Where necessary the Contractor shall adopt pile foundations for heavy equipments
and buildings with no extra cost .
The design loading capacity of piles shall be confirmed by pile loading tests, as
directed by, and to the approval of the Owner.
The type of loading test shall confirm to the international standards or equivalent,
and the number and location of actual piles to be tested shall be designated by the
Owner.

1.1.8 Topography and Finished Grade Elevation

The topographical survey for the Substation shall be responsibility of the Contractor.
No extra cost shall be paid to the Contractor on account of any increase in quantity
of the work to fulfill the requirement given in the tender documents and the
drawings.
The dimensions and elevations shown on the site layout of the tender drawings are
only for reference for the tender purpose. The Zero level will be based on the nearest
main road

1.2 Clearing and Site Preparation

1.2.1 General
The work in this Section shall consist of all clearing, grubbing and stripping of the
topsoil from the Sites as directed by the Owner and specified herein. The Work shall
also include the transportation and disposal of all waste materials off the site to the
areas arranged for by the Contractor, and to the approval of the Owner.

1.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

Clearing shall include cutting and removing trees, bushes and other vegetation and
removing fallen timber and other surface litter. Grubbing shall consist of digging out
and removing stumps and roots remaining after the clearing operation.
108
 1.2.3 Stripping of Topsoil
The Contractor shall, after clearing and grubbing, strip to a minimum depth of
200mm all topsoil or other surface deposits. If, in the opinion of the Owner, topsoil
extends to a greater depth than 200 mm, the Contractor shall remove all such soil as
directed by the Owner. The Contractor may stockpile approved topsoil for reuse as
specified herein subject to the Owner's approval. The stripped surface should be
compacted to 95% proctor dry density before the starting of the filling operations.

1.3 Excavation

1.3.1 General
Excavation shall include the removal of all material of any nature including rock,
which interferes with the construction work. The Contractor must clear all
excavations of mud, loose material, dirt and debris, and if required by the Owner,
the bottom 150 mm of excavation shall not be removed until just before the
commencement of construction. All necessary safety precautions shall be taken to
avoid injuries. The surfaces of excavation shall be protected at all times from erosion
or collapse due to weather or other conditions. Sides of excavations shall be shored
up where necessary to the satisfaction of the Owner.
The Contractor shall at all times keep all excavations and trenches free from water.
The contractor shall use pumps, well points or any other method necessary to
remove water in a manner that will prevent loss of soil and maintain stability of the
sides and bottom of the excavation, all to the approval of the Owner. If excavations
are carried beyond the lines or elevations shown on the drawings or specified herein,
the Contractor shall be required to backfill such excavation with C15 concrete or
crushed stone as directed by the Owner at the Contractor's own expenses. The
Contractor shall investigate the water table level at the proposed Substation Site, and
no extra cost on account of any difficulty arising out of a high water table will be
entertained.

1.3.2 Excavation for Foundations

The underside of all foundations shall be at a minimum depth of 200 mm below the
stripped surface. Immediately after excavation for foundations is completed and
approved by the Owner, C15 concrete 100 mm, thick is to be laid as blinding for the
structural concrete foundations.

1.3.3 Excavation for Underground Services

The minimum area of excavation shall be the project plan area of the various items
being installed. However, the Contractor shall make due allowance for working
space that the Contractor considers necessary and also for placing the specified
concrete or other bedding material as shown on the drawings. Variances in unit cost
shall be based on the above. Trenches shall be excavated to the general lines and
depths specified and as shown on the drawings.
If the bottom of any trench or excavation is found to be unstable or unsatisfactory,
the Contractor shall excavate such unsuitable material to the width and depth
ordered by the Owner. The sub-grade shall then be restored by back-filling with
approved materials so as to provide a uniform and continuous bearing and support
for the service pipe or duct.

109
 1.3.4 Excavation for Roads Areas
Any soft areas, which develop during rolling, as specified herein, shall be excavated
as directed by the Owner. All loose rock or boulders and all ridge rock encountered
in the excavation shall be removed. The excavated surface shall be compacted to
95%modified proctor dry density.

1.3.5 Disposal of Excavated Materials

All materials obtained from the excavations, and approved by the Owner, for use as
general backfilling materials shall be laid aside and afterwards deposited as and
where directed by the Owner. Any materials not so approved shall be removed by
the Contractor and disposed of in areas off the site arranged for by the Contractor at
his own cost, and approved by the Owner. The deposited material shall be spread
and trimmed to a uniform surface.

1.4 Fill and Back Fill

1.4.1 Materials
(a) General filling material
The general fill material shall consist of approved natural material obtained directly
from the excavation or from borrow areas approved by the Owner. Only material
approved by the Owner shall be used for general fill, and such material shall be free
of vegetation, topsoil, roots, logs, stumps or any other organic, perishable or
unsuitable material. All necessary precautions, to the approval of the Owner shall be
taken to exclude termites from the filling material.

(b) Borrow area operations

Detailed planning of the excavation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and
shall be subject to approval by the Owner. The Contractor shall pay particular
attention to the natural water content of the material. Prior to the commencement of
the work, the Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner, a plan showing
details of the Contractor's proposed methods, and the sequence, and the schedule of
operations in the borrow area. During construction, the plan shall be reviewed and
modified as required. A copy of the modified plan and schedule shall be provided
for the Owner's approval prior to implementation of any changes.

A system of surface drainage in the borrow area consisting of ditches and other
means shall be installed to ensure that precipitation drains away from the borrow
area; and that pounding and infiltration is prevented. After completion of
excavations, the drainage system shall be left in such a condition that drainage of the
borrow area shall continue to be effective. All final slopes shall be trimmed to stable
slopes and shall not be steeper than three horizontal to one vertical.

(c) Granular class A and class B materials

All granular materials intended for use on the work shall first be approved by the
Owner. The Contractor shall submit an analysis from an approved testing
laboratory, to show that the materials conform to the specifications. If, in the opinion
of the Owner, further tests are required, then these tests shall be carried out as
directed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor.

110
1) Granular class A
Fill material shall consist of crushed rock or gravel obtained from quarries, deposits
of pit-run gravel, Talus rock, disintegrated granite, mine waste and slag, clinkers,
cinders and other material which has a physical structure not affected by water or
the elements. Materials such as shale, limestone or stratified limestone are not
acceptable. The material shall contain a minimum of 30 per cent of crushed particles.
Crushed particle shall have at least one surface or face formed by its fracture from a
larger particle. The percentage of crushed material shall be determined by examining
the fraction retained on a 5 mm mesh sieve and dividing the weight of the crushed
particles by the total weight of the sample.
The sizing and grading of granular Class materials shall conform to the
requirements specified herein.

2) Granular class B
Fill material shall consist of either:

(i) Gravel from bank run material; where no crushing is required, but oversize
particles shall have been removed and the physical characteristics and
sizing and grading shall be according to the specification ,or
(ii) Crushed rock screening; having physical characteristics in sizing and grading
according to the specification.

Materials shall have a physical structure not affected by water or the elements; and
materials such as shale, shale limestone and clay will not be acceptable in any
quantity whatsoever.

(d) Grading of granular fill materials

The grading of the granular Class A and Class B fill materials shall be within the
following limits for B.S or equivalent AASHTO: Percentage by Weight Passing

Sieve No. Granular Type A Granular Type B

Crushed stone Gravel or Crushed
Rock Screenings
B.S. Sieve No. or 100 0-15 0-25
Equivalent metric 52 5-20 5-40
sizes 25 10-30 5-60
14 15-35 10-85
Aperture Sizes 7 25-45 15-95
(mm) 5 35-60 25-100
10 50-80 40-100
20 90-100 55-100
25 - 60-100
100 - -

111
Where rock is deficient in the grading in Granular A, the Contractor may add an
approved filler to meet the grading specifications. The Granular B material shall
contain no particle over the maximum of 100 mm. The oversize material may be
used if crushed to the required size or it may be removed by screening at the
Contractor's expense. All material passing 5 mm sieve shall be recently well graded.
Filler may be used to add to the Granular B material to bring the final product to the
required grading. The filler shall be acceptable to the Owner and shall not contain
any organic matter or hard cohesive lumps.

1.4.2 Workmanship

(a) General
The work in this Section shall include handling, transporting, depositing,
compacting, grading of surfaces and trimming of side slopes and verges.
The Contractor will be required, as the Owner may direct, to adjust the moisture
content of the materials used for filling, either by spraying with water or allowing it
to dry before placing. No fill of backfill material shall be placed until the formation
level has been inspected and approved by the Owner.

(b) General filling

The general filling, approved by the Owner, shall be deposited in regular successive
layers, not exceeding 250 mm in depth and shall be thoroughly compacted passing
at least twice over all parts of each layer, or by any other approved means to the
required grades and levels.
The dry density of the soil after compaction shall be at least 95% of the maximum
obtainable Standard Proctor dry density measured in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. 1377 or other approved standards.
The general fill shall be laid and compacted in layers as specified, until the elevation
at the top of the compacted fill is 50 mm below finished grade level.
The Site shall be drained properly to the satisfaction of the Owner.

(c) Chemical treatment of soil

To prevent the ingress of termites into the works at the Substations, soil treatment
shall be carried out by the Contractors as specified below and to the entire
satisfaction of the Owner. The chemical used to treat the soil shall be of chlordane or
equivalent approved by the Owner.
The rate of application to the soil of the ready for use solution shall be as follows:

(i) Before casting walkways surrounding buildings, excavate perimeter

trench1.0 (one) m deep by 500 mm wide adjacent to the external walls. Apply
6 liters/m2 to the excavated bottom of the trench and to each of the 250 mm
compacted layers of backfill.
(ii) The protection shall be 6 liters/m2 over all building area and associated
paved walkway area including the outer faces of all trenches. Applications to
be on top of fill below concrete slabs.
(iii) The entire Substation Site including the bermed areas outside the boundary
wall shall be treated with an approved vegetation/weed killer to the
complete satisfaction of the Owner. This treatment shall be chemically
compatible with the soil treatment for termites outlined above.

112
Once the soil has been treated, it is important that it should not subsequently be
disturbed. Any areas of soil, which are subsequently disturbed, shall be retreated at
the expense of the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner.

(d) Backfilling of trenches and foundations

Class "B" material shall be used for backfilling trenches and foundations. Backfill for
trenches shall be considered as starting at the top of the bedding over the pipe or
conduit. Any materials below this point shall be considered as bedding.
Backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 250 mm in thickness. Backfill for
manholes shall start at the sugared and shall be brought up simultaneously to the
same elevation on all sides of the manhole in layers not exceeding 250 mm.
Except where the pipe must remain exposed for leakage tests and subject to the
provisions herein, the Contractor shall proceed as soon as possible with the
backfilling operations. Care shall be exercised so that the pipe will not be damaged
or displaced.

The material shall be compacted to 95% of maximum density as determined by the

modified Proctor density test. The backfill material shall not be dropped from the
side of the trench so that there is a clear fall onto the partially covered pipe.
Backfill material may be pushed from the filled and of the trench into the partially
filled section so that it will roll down onto the covered pipe.

(e) Road foundations

Following the site strip to a minimum depth of 200 mm, described previously, the
areas of the Site covered by a road, and for a distance of 1 m outside the roadway,
shall be compacted to a dry density in the upper 500 mm of at least 95% of the
maximum density as determined by the modified Proctor test. Soft areas, which
develop during compaction, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's
expense with approved fill material. When completed the formation shall be smooth
and free from ridges, cracks or loose material.

Approved granular materials shall be placed in-layers, such that, after compaction,
the thickness of each layer does not exceed 100 mm, up to the underside of the road.
Each layer shall be compacted to obtain 95% modified Proctor density before
proceeding to apply a subsequent layer. Compaction shall be performed with a
wobbly wheel roller or an equivalent vibratory roller, as approved by the Owner.

The rolling shall be done longitudinally, commencing at the edge and overlapping
each run until the centre line is reached. The rolling shall continue until satisfactory
compaction is obtained. On sections inaccessible to the larger equipment, the
compaction shall be obtained using approved mechanical vibratory equipment. The
compaction requirements shall be the same as for the rest of the base.
Any irregularities or depressions, which develop from the rolling, shall be corrected
by loosening, adding or removal of material and re-rolling until the surface is
smooth and uniform. The layers of material shall be bladed to the required shape,
and the material shall be sprinkled with water to aid compaction and/or reduce dust
nuisance. When used to aid compaction, water shall be applied immediately ahead
f the compaction equipment. The amount of water added shall be controlled so that
the optimum moisture content of the material is not exceeded.

113
1.5 Concrete and Asphalt Paving, Finish Grading and Reinstatement

1.5.1 General
The work of this Section consists of paving roads, general surfacing and surface
grading, Kerbs and paving slabs. The work shall include supply of all
materials placed and compacted as specified herein, all to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
Roads shall be concrete paved service roads inside the Substation and asphalt or
concrete paved access roads from gate of Substation to outside the Substation based
on Site layout of the Tender drawings, except where fuel spillage may occur where
suitable concrete block paving shall be provided.

1.5.2 Concrete Paved Service Roads

The concrete roads shall be designed and constructed to resist stresses and
deflections produced by maximum applied axle loads from the transformer, delivery
vehicles and all other construction and delivery vehicles. The minimum longitudinal
and transverse reinforcing steel area shall be 0.4% of the gross cross-sectional area of
the road.
Keyed contraction joints shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 12 m and the
longitudinal reinforcement shall be continuous across these joints. No panel section
shall be poured adjacent to another panel, which is less than 7 days old.
Where expansion joints are provided they shall be adequately dowelled and totally
effective in providing load transfer across the joints.

1.5.3 General Site Grading and Landscaping

The whole are of the Substation sites, except for areas surfaced with other material as
specified herein, is to be surfaced with approved gravel or crushed stone of particle
size between 20 mm and 40 mm. The thickness of the surfacing layer shall be 100
mm minimum.

1.5.4 Asphalt Paved Access Road

(a) General
Foundations and base courses for roads may be laid early in the contract and used
for construction purposes. Roads shall be designed on the basis of a 25 year life
assuming 325 commercial vehicles/day, including construction and plant delivery
traffic. After the construction wear is over, and as near to the end of the contract as
possible, the surface shall be cleaned of any debris and foreign matter, and any
damage to the foundations and base courses of the new roads shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Owner before the wearing course is laid. Traffic shall not be
allowed on any road until the Owner permission for it has been obtained.
Notwithstanding the following requirements, the Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that the loads he proposes to transport do not overstress the final road
designs shown on the drawings.

(b) Materials
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the design mixes for the asphalt
which shall be designed in accordance with international standards approved by the
Owner.
Aggregates for the base and wearing courses shall be approved by the Owner.

114
Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean river gravel, screened and if necessary
regarded.
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean natural sand, free from organic or other
injurious material. These aggregates shall be thoroughly combined in such
proportions as will give an analysis conforming to the grading specified below for
base and wearing courses.

(c) Workmanship
Before laying the base course, a tack coat of approximately 0.4 kg/m2, bitumen shall
be sprayed on the road formation. The base course shall consist of between4% and
5.2% by weight of bitumen mixed with the base course aggregate and shall have a
consolidated thickness as shown on the drawings.
Mixing is to be carried out in mechanical mixers of a type approved by the Owner
and suitable for giving accurate control in batching. Immediately before mixing, the
bitumen shall be heated to 120° - 150 °C and the aggregate to 90° -120 °C. The hot
bitumen shall be added to the aggregate and mixed for three minutes.
The mixture shall be laid hot by means of an approved mechanical spreader.
Rolling shall be carried out by means of a roller weighing at least 10 tons (or metric
equivalent) and passing at least twice over each part.
Before laying a wearing course, the surface of the base course shall be sprayed with a
tack coat of approximately 0.4 kg/m2 of bitumen.
The wearing course shall consist of between 5.5% and 6.5% by weight of bitumen
mixed with between 10% and 12% by weight of Portland cement and with the
wearing course aggregate.
Mixing and application shall be carried out in a similar manner to that specified
above except that the mixing shall be interrupted after one minute for the addition of
the cement. All internal roads shall be of reinforced concrete suitable for
transporting transformers, heavy machinery and equipment. Necessary drains
slopes, camber etc. shall be provided.

1.5.5 Kerbs and Paving Slabs

Kerbs shall be provided to roads. The Kerbs shall be constructed in accordance with
minimum C25 concrete to the sizes and forms as shown on the drawings. Expansion
joints shall be formed with bitumen impregnated fiberboard approved by the Owner
and as shown on the drawings.
Paving slabs shall be cast on site from minimum C25 concrete. The slabs shall be
1000mm x 800 mm x 100 mm thick as shown on the drawings.
Joints between adjacent slabs shall be filled with a lean sand/cement mix brushed
into the joints to the approval of the Owner. The paving slabs shall be laid on a bed
of Grade M grit sand, as specified herein to a compacted depth of 35 to 50mm, or on
lean sand/cement mortar if a stronger bed is required.

115
 1.5.6 Reinstatement
The work shall include the reinstatement of all excavated and filled areas and areas
damaged by the Contractor during the execution of this Contract. Each area shall be
reinstated to match in line, grade, type, texture and appearance the material
removed by the excavation work and the surfaces adjacent to the reinstated work.

1.6 Building and Associated Work

MV switchgear and auxiliary building shall be single 1-storey or single 2-storeys
buildings in the Tender drawings containing 33/11kv switchgear room, Control
room, Communication room, Panel room, Corridor, Battery room and Toilet shall be
designed as reinforced concrete framed structure with reinforced concrete
foundations, columns, floors and roofs, and non-load block work walls unless
otherwise noted in the offer .
The overall dimensions will be the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the
actual room sizes and arrangements are adequate for the satisfactory operation and
maintenance of the type of equipment that he proposed to provide.
The Guard house shall be single 1-storey building containing Guard room, Shower
room and Toilet shall be designed as reinforced concrete framed structures with
reinforced concrete foundations, columns, floors and roofs, and non load brick work
walls unless otherwise noted in the offer .
All buildings shall be provided with suitable ladders to roof for inspection and
maintenance.
Details of these foundations shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified
herein. The structural framing for all buildings and roof slabs shall be designed in
accordance with international standards for reinforced concrete design. Infill panels
between the structural frames shall be constructed using insulated block work to
achieve the required 'U' value. External walls shall be insulated to achieve a thermal
transmittance value of 0.57 W/m2 K or better. This 'U' value must also achieve the
requirements of the Local Authority if greater.
All structural roofs shall be doubling pitched or flat and be overlaid with a screed, to
create falls towards the drainage outlet points as shown on the drawings. The
buildings shall incorporate a parapet for architectural effect, and have direct
rainwater run-off from the roof gutters at predetermined locations by downpipes
discharging into the surface water system.
A protected bituminous membrane inverted roof waterproofing system shall be
provided as specified, and shop drawings showing the buildup of the complete
waterproofing system and the detailing at all junctions, abutments and penetrations
shall be submitted for approval prior to the commencement of the installation. The
protective slabs over the roof insulation shall be of a weight to prevent them being
dislodged by suction forces in high winds.
Live load deflections of beams shall be limited to 1/500 of the span.
Fire exit signage shall be provided on all escape routes and at all fire exit doors.
The construction and finishes required for the Substation buildings are set out
below:

116
Building frame Cast in-situ reinforced concrete columns, and beams
integrated with concrete roof and floor slabs.
Roof and floor Cast in-situ reinforced concrete slabs integral with the
slabs beams, with roof slabs overlaid with a screed laid to 1 to 80
minimum fall with minimum thickness of 50 mm,
Reinforcement Deformed high yield bar to be used.
Walls (external) Block or brick works incorporating insulation to give the
specified "U" values.
Walls (internal) Non-load bearing block or brick works with soft joint
between the top of block or brick works and the underside
of the concrete slabs and beams.
Where the internal walls have a fire rating, the soft head
joint should incorporate a fire seal of the same fire rating as
the rest of the wall.
Wall finishes Block or brick works to be rendered with a painted finish
(external) above DPC level, and bituminous paint to all areas below
DPC level. The finished face of the render should be in the
same plane as the surface of surrounding exposed fair faced
concrete, and should have render stops at all edges.
Exposed fair-faced concrete in beams, columns, parapets
etc. - painted finish to match the rendered areas. The
external wall finishes should be suitable to withstand the
heavy pollution in the area.
Wall finishes Generally painted plaster to all internal wall surfaces unless
(internal) noted under.
Battery Room shall be alkaline resistant ceramic wall tiles
with a low surface permeability shall be used to resist the
alkaline electrolyte in the nickel cadmium batteries. The
tiles shall be bedded on alkaline resistant adhesive and be
finished with an alkaline resistant grout up to a height of at
least 600 mm above the top of batteries, or to the top of the
door frame.
Toilets and Shower rooms shall be glazed ceramic tiles up to
top of doorframe, and plaster with paint finish above, up to
soffit level.
Ceilings Fair-faced concrete with a paint finish.
Exposed building services fixed to the underside of the
slabs should be painted the same color as the concrete.

117
Floor Finishes Control room, Communication room, Guard room,
Weaponry, Hall and Corridor shall be mosaic floor tiles.

33/11 kV switchgear and Panel rooms shall be terrazzo

floor tiles.

Store shall be 75 mm sand/cement screed with wire mesh

finish with proprietary floor paint.

Battery room shall be 6 mm thick. Non-slip alkali resistant

ceramic floor tiles with a low surface permeability. The tiles

shall be bedded on alkaline resistant adhesive and be

finished with an alkaline resistant grout. Movement joints at
the perimeter of the tiling, and any intermediate movement
joints shall have an alkaline resistant filler, and be finished
with an alkaline resistant sealant.
Toilet and Shower rooms shall be non-slip ceramic floor
tiles.
Cableways shall be non-slip epoxy paint.
Windows Aluminum thermal break frames with SynthaPulvin
powder coated colored finish to the Owner's approval,
complete with security grills. All windows double-glazed
with solar reflecting glazing with low heat transfer value.
Doors (external) Steel doors with paint and tempered bar provided with sun
shaded/canopies.
Steel doors should meet thermal transmission requirements
and all doors shall be provided with door closers.
Doors (internal) Steel doors with paint and doors to all rooms shall be
provided with door closers.
The provision of locking for internal doors shall be agreed
with the Owner.
Electrolyte resistant paint to be provided on internal surface
of Battery room door.
Battery room doors should have seals to prevent air
movement from the battery room and have door signs
“keep this door closed”.
Roof Bituminous roofing and protective precast concrete tiles.
waterproofing: The insulation shall achieve the specified 'U' value.
Stairs Stairs and landings shall be constructed in concrete, with
stair flights a minimum of 1000 mm wide, with tubular
posts and rail balustrade.

118
 Skirting Control room, Communication room, Guard room,
Weaponry, Hall, Entrance and Corridor shall be 150mm
height mosaic floor tiles.
33/11kV Switchgear room shall be 150mm height terrazzo
floor tiles.
Store shall be 150mm height varnished hardwood skirting.
Battery room shall be 150mm height alkali resistant ceramic
tiles.
Toilet and Shower rooms shall be ceramic tiles.
Cableways shall be epoxy paint

1.7 Oil Containment for Transformer Bunds, and Firewalls

(a) Oil Containment

Power transformers and reactors shall be sited in oil containment areas and drain via
a flame trap to an underground facility to remove oil away from a fire in the event of
an incident. The capacity of the underground containment shall be equal tithe
volume of oil contained within the transformer plus 50% to allow for firefighting
materials externally applied by the firefighting service.
Where there is more than one power transformer on a site, it may be economic to
link the oil containment drainage areas of these to a single underground tank with
capacity for the largest transformer alone, thus reducing the excavation required.
Connecting pipe work shall be designed to ensure rapid discharge of oil to the
underground facility that, together with the pipe work, shall be resistant to
transformer oil at a temperature of up to 80°C. Underground oil containment
facilities shall be provided with a means of inspection and allow for pumping out of
accumulated rainwater or oil. The area within the transformer enclosure shall be
designed as water retaining structure to international standards and coated with 2
coats of bituminous paint and be surfaced with a 100 mm thick layer of gravel on
steel grating.
The road immediately adjacent to transformers used by oil handling equipment for
maintenance shall be bounded/kerbed to contain any oil, and shall also drain to the
containment facility to prevent ground pollution in the event of accidental spillage.
(b) Firewalls
Plant within close proximity of power transformers shall be protected by reinforced
concrete fire barrier walls. Protection should be provided for other circuits and
transformers, control equipment, and external property.
Fire barrier walls and building fireproof walls will be designed for 4-hour fire
resistance and a blast pressure of 0.5 kN/ m2. Each fire barrier wall width shall be a
minimum of 1,000 mm wider at each side than the transformer, and the height shall
be a minimum of 500 mm above the highest part of the transformers.
119
1.8 Concrete
1.8.1 Design, Materials and Workmanship
Standards of design, materials and workmanship are to be equal to or better than
those laid down in the latest amended editions of international standards.

1.8.2 Testing General

Testing methods are to be in accordance with the international standard approved
or requested by the Owner. Tests required by the Owner will normally be carried
out at an independent testing station. The cost preparing, storing and transporting
test specimen to the place of testing is to be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner shall have the right to order that any materials, which do not meet with
his approval, shall not be used in the Works. The Contractor shall have the right to
sample, test and give an opinion on such materials. If after this, the materials are
rejected by the Owner they shall be immediately removed from the Site by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with facilities for materials
testing on Site. The facilities may be those normally used by the Contractor. All
testing facilities on site shall be calibrated at regular intervals in the presence of the
Owner's representative and whenever deemed necessary by the Owner.

1.8.3 Ready Mixed Concrete

Ready mixed concrete(if used), batched off the Site, may be used only with the
agreement of the Owner and comply with all requirements of the Contract. Truck
mixers shall carry the concrete. The concrete shall be compacted and in its final
position within two hours of the introduction of cement to the aggregates, unless
longer time is agreed by the Owner. The time of such introduction shall be recorded
on the delivery note, together with the weight of the constituents of each mix. When
truck-mixed concrete is used, no additional water should be added after the batching
process is complete.
Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner, truck mixer units and their mixing and
discharge performance shall comply with the manufacturer's requirement. Mixing
shall continue for the number and rate of revolutions recommended in
manufacturer's instructions. In the absence of instructions, mixing shall continue for
not less than 100 revolutions at the rate of not less than seven revolutions per
minute.

1.8.4 Cements - General

The cements shall comply with all the requirements international Standards latest
edition. Sulphate resisting cement shall be used for concrete below ground level. All
cement shall be obtained only from a source approved by the Owner. The Contractor
shall not use cement varying from that used in the preparation of trial mixes until
the permission of the Owner has been obtained and until any further trial mixes
required by the Owner have been made and tested. Additional protective measures
such as bituminous painting should be applied on below concrete surfaces.

120
1.8.5 Cement Total Alkali Content
The cement shall be tested to determine the total alkali content in accordance with
international standards .

1.8.6 Cement Delivery and Storage

The cement shall be delivered to site packed in sealed bags or proper containers,
bearing the name of the brand and manufacturer and the number of the
consignment. The approximate weight of the cement shall be legibly marked on each
bag. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for deliveries to be made
sufficiently frequently to ensure freshness and in sufficient quantities to ensure that
there is no suspension or interruption of the concreting work at any time.
The Contractor may use cement delivered in bulk; delivery arrangements shall be to
the Owner's approval and each delivery must be accompanied by a manufacturer's
test certificate. Each consignment of cement shall be brought to the site in sufficient
time to allow any tests to be carried out before the cement is required to be used.
Cement in bags shall be unloaded under cover and stored in a well-ventilated and
weatherproof building used exclusively for this purpose. The floor of the building
shall be at least 150 mm off the ground and an air space shall be left between the
floor and bottom layer of bags.
If delivered in bulk an approved type of cement silo shall be used. Each consignment
shall be stored separately so as to permit easy access for inspection and a record
shall be kept so that each consignment may be identified. Storage shall be arranged
so that the cement is used in order of delivery. Cement, which is more than 12 weeks
old from the date of delivery, shall be retested on site for fineness, setting time
strength and soundness in the presence of the Owner's representative and full test
reports shall be submitted within 24 hours.

1.8.7 Cement Test Certificates and Samples

All cement shall be certified by the manufacturer as complying with the
requirements of the appropriate specification. The Contractor shall, when required
by the Owner, obtain for him the manufacturer's test certificate for any
consignments soon as possible after delivery. For every 50 ton of cement delivered to
site and whenever required by the Owner the Contractor shall take samples, under
supervision, of the cement stored on, or delivered to the site. The Contractor shall
test all samples as required/instructed by the Owner.

1.8.8 Aggregates General

Before the Owner can approve any aggregate source the Contractor shall furnish the
following data:
(a) Petro logical group of rock
(b) Rock type within the group
(c) Shape
(d) Surface texture
(e) Site content
(f) Grading curves
(g) Specific gravity
(h) Impact value
(i) Water absorption
(j) Soundness
121
(k) Salt content
(l) Alkali reactivity
Where quarries win aggregate from bedrock, especially limestone of the dolomite
type, the rock shall be checked for surface alternation to hardpan. This may affect the
surface for well over a meter depth and result in salt concentrations near the surface.
Such rocks are also prone to other undesirable characteristics, including pockets of
clay, salt, chalk or other friable material. Rigorous initial physical inspection is
essential.

1.8.9 Aggregate Chemical Requirements

(a) Fine and coarse aggregates shall not be potentially reactive with alkalis and shall
be regularly tested in accordance with ASTM standard tests C228, C289, C342
andC586.
(b) Fine and coarse aggregate shall not contain more than 0.5% by weight of acid
soluble sulphates (as SO3).
(c) Fine aggregate shall contain no more than 0.1% by weight of chlorides (as
NaC1)and coarse aggregate not more than 0.03% should these figures be exceeded
the aggregate may still be considered acceptable in this respect provided the total
sodium chloride concentration is not greater than 0.32% by weight of cement in the
mix, irrespective of the origin of the chloride.
(d) Marine aggregates may be used provided that the content of chloride salt in the
aggregate, expressed as the equivalent anhydrous calcium chloride percentage by
weight of the cement to be used in the concrete, does not exceed 0.3% but where the
proportion exceeds 0.1% by weight of cement, marine aggregates must not be used
with high alumina cement or for pre-stressed concrete in circumstances where
calcium chloride admixtures are not permitted. In addition, in concrete containing
embedded metal, calcium chloride shall not be added.

1.8.10 Aggregate Storage

The aggregate shall be stored at mixer positions in such a manner that intermingling
of different sizes and types of aggregate is prevented. The stockpiles are to be
protected from rubbish or windblown dust. Heaps of fine aggregate shall be capable
of draining freely. Wet fine aggregate shall not be used until, in the opinion of the
Owner, it has drained sufficiently to ensure proper control of the water/cement
ratio.

1.8.11 Aggregate Sampling and Testing

The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor at any time, to draw
samples of aggregate from stockpiles on the Site or any other location to be indicated
by the Owner. All sampling and testing shall be in accordance with international
standards. For each new source of aggregate and for each class of aggregate to be
used sampling and testing shall be done at the rate of six samples and set of tests for
each new source and each new class.

The Contractor shall allow for the whole range of tests to be carried out. For routine
sampling and testing from an approved source the rate shall be one sample per 50m3
of aggregate to be used or one sample per month whichever is greater. Such testing
shall include those tests international standards as are considered useful by the
Owner for comparison with the results of the initial set of tests but the Contractor
122
shall allow for the full range to be carried out. Testing is to be carried out at an
independent laboratory approved by the Owner or else on the site in the presence of
the Owner's representative, where approved by the Owner.

1.8.12 Water for Concrete

The water used for making concrete, mortar and grout shall be clean, fresh and
freeform injurious amounts of oil, vegetable or organic matter or any other
deleterious substance in suspension or solution. The mix water shall be continually
monitored for salt content and the concrete mix designed accordingly to limit total
salt content. The water should comply with the requirements of BS 3148.

1.8.13 Admixtures
Ad mixtures shall not be used without the approval of the Owner. Before the use of
any admixture can be approved the Contractor must prove by trial mix procedures
that the concrete will in no way be adversely affected even when twice the
recommended dose is batched.

1.8.14 Plant
The concreting plant shall be suitable in type, capacity and design for its purpose.
The performance of the plant and its disposition shall be to the satisfaction of the
Owner. The plant shall be maintained regularly and standby plant shall be available
to avoid any delay in the progress of the works.

1.8.15 Concrete Strength Requirements

All concrete mixes shall be in accordance with the requirements of approved and as
designated on drawings approved by the Owner.
(a) Reinforced compressive cube strength shall not be less than 30 N/mm2 after28
days, designated C28 for transformer foundations.
(b) Reinforced compressive cube strength shall not be less than 30 N/mm2 after28
days, designated C25 for other reinforced concrete foundations and structures.
(c) Compressive cube strength of the plain concrete shall not be less than
15N/mm2after 28 days. Plain concrete shall be laid under reinforced concrete
foundations, ground beams, trenches etc., with thickness not less than 100mm,
designated C15.
(d) Compressive strength of the plain concrete, which is used for unreinforced parts
of the structures, shall not be less than 20 N/mm2 after 28 days, designated C20.
At least seven weeks before concrete construction is programmed to start the
Contractor shall submit for approval all the details as listed in tender/contract
documents for each proposed grade of concrete. No concrete drawing will be
approved until this data is received. Sampling rates shall comply generally with
international standards. The strength requirements for each grade of concrete
proposed in the design shall be proven by means of preliminary trial tests as
specified later. The minimum cement content shall be 240 kg/m3 for 40 mm nominal
size aggregate and 280 k/m3for 20 mm aggregate. The maximum free water-cement
ratio shall be 0.55. These figures shall be revised if the sulphate content of the soil is
greater than 0.5% (totalSO3.)

123
The Contractor's designs and drawings shall show clearly the characteristic
strengths, mix proportion and permissible deviation proposed for each grade of
concrete to be used. The Contractor shall carry out frequent tests to the satisfaction
of the Owner to check the relationship of the strength of concrete cured under site
conditions to that cured under laboratory conditions.

1.8.16 Concrete Mixing

All concrete except where specially permitted by the Owner in writing shall be
mixed in weight batch mixing machines. The machine shall have a large water
storage tank with a gauge so that a predetermined quantity of water can be injected
direct into the mixer drum. The dry concrete ingredients shall be mixed until a
uniform color is obtained. After the addition of the water the concrete shall be mixed
for a further two minutes or until a uniform color is achieved. The total water in the
mix shall not exceed the amount used in the trial mix.
In computing the quantity of water to be added, due account must be taken of the
water contained in the aggregates. The amount of water shall be sufficient to ensure
through hydration, good workability and high strength. The Contractor shall take all
precautions to the satisfaction of the Owner to protect the concrete from the
injurious effects of the elements.

1.8.17 Workability
The concrete shall be of such consistency that it can be readily worked into the
corners and angles of the formwork and around reinforcement without segregation
of the materials or bleeding of free water at the surface. On striking the formwork it
shall present a face which is uniform, free from honey combing, surface crazing or
excessive dusting and which shall not, in the opinion of the Owner, be inferior to the
standards laid down in later clauses in this section.
In order to satisfy the Owner that the workability of the proposed mixes in the
various grades is adequate for the requirements of the Specification, the Contractor
shall carry out a series of workability tests on the preliminary trial mixes required
elsewhere in this section. These tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881,
or such other procedure as may be approved by the Owner. When a specific
workability is called for a check shall be maintained by measuring slump at the rate
of one test for each ten cubic meters of concrete or three tests for each day of
concreting.

1.8.18 Transportation
The concrete shall be discharged from the mixed and transported to the Works by
means that shall be approved by the Owner and which shall prevent adulteration,
segregation or loss of ingredients and ensure that the concrete is of the required
workability at the point and time of placing.

1.8.19 Placing
The concrete shall be placed in the positions and sequences indicated on approved
drawings, in the specification or as directed by the Owner, within one hour of
mixing. All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from
standing water, snow or ice immediately before the placing of the concrete. The

124
Owner shall be given 24 hours notice of concrete placement in order that its
concerned staff may check the work.
Except where otherwise directed, concrete shall not be placed unless the Owner or
his representative is present and has previously examined and approved the
positioning, fixing and condition of the reinforcement and of any other items to be
embedded, the cleanliness, alignment and suitability of the containing surfaces and
the adequacy and position of the plant. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as
possible in its final position and in such a manner as to avoid segregation,
displacement of the reinforcement, formwork or other embedded items. Placing
shall be continuous between specified or approved construction joints. Works shall
be brought up to full thickness in 500 mm maximum compacted layers as the work
proceeds.
Where chutes are used to convey the concrete, their slopes shall not be such as to
cause segregation and suitable spouts or baffles shall be provided to obviate
segregation during discharge. Concretes shall not be allowed to fall freely more
than1.5 m except with the approval of the Owner. Where pneumatic placers are used
the velocity of discharge shall be regulated by suitable baffles or hoppers where
necessary to prevent segregation or damage and distortion of the reinforcement,
other embedded items and formwork, caused by impact.
Upon arrival at the places of deposition the concrete truck driver must present to the
Owner's representative a chit from the concrete batcher stating (a) the grade of
concrete (b) the workability (c) the aggregate size (d) type of cement and (e) time of
batching of the concrete. Records shall be maintained detailing the placement
location of each batch within the works.
If concreting is not started within 24 hours of approval being given, approval shall
again be obtained from the Owner. Concreting shall then proceed continuously over
the area between construction joints. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-sit
concrete, which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction
joint is formed in accordance with this specification. When in-sit concrete has been in
place for four hours, or less as directed by the Owner depending upon the mix, type
of cement and weather conditions, no further concrete shall be placed against it for a
further 20 hours.
The Concrete, when deposited, shall have a temperature of not less than 5°C and not
more than 32°C. It shall be compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of
discharge from the mixer unless carried in purpose made agitators, operating
continuously, when the time shall be within two hours of the introduction of cement
to the mix and within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator.
Except where otherwise agreed by the Owner, concrete shall be deposited in
horizontal layers to a compacted depth note exceeding 500 mm where internal
vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases. Unless otherwise agreed by the
Owner, concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 m.
When trucking or chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as
to avoid segregation.
No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Underwater concrete shall be placed in
position by tremie tube, or by pipeline from the mixer. Full details of the method
proposed shall be submitted in advance to the Owner and his approval obtained
before placing begins. Where the concrete is placed by tremie tube, its size and
method of operation shall be in accordance with BS 8004. During and after

125
concreting under water, pumping or de-watering operations in the immediate
vicinity shall be suspended until the Owner permits them to be continued.

1.8.20 Compaction of Concrete

The concrete shall be fully compacted throughout the full extent of the layer. It shall
be thoroughly worked against the formwork and around reinforcement and other
embedded items, without displacing them. Successive layers of the same lift shall be
thoroughly worked together. All concrete shall be compacted to produce a dense
homogenous mass. Unless otherwise agreed by the Owner, it shall be compacted
with the assistance of vibrators. Sufficient vibrators in serviceable condition shall be
on site so that spare equipment is always available in the event of breakdowns.
Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the
immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided,
so far as is practicable.
Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 2 and 24 hours after
compaction.

1.8.21 Vibrators
Unless otherwise directed by the Owner, approved power driven vibrators of the
immersion type shall be used. They shall be inserted at such distances apart or
applied in such a manner as will ensure that the concrete is satisfactorily and
uniformly compacted. The Contractor shall ensure that a sufficient number of
vibrators are on hand at all times including allowance for breakdown of vibrators. As
a general rule, one working vibrator shall be available for each 6m3/hr of
concrete being placed.
Vibrators shall penetrate the full depth of the layer and where concrete is placed
over previously placed concrete not more than four hours old the vibrators shall
enter and re-vibrate that layer to ensure that successive layers are well knitted
together. Over vibration, causing segregation, surface laitance or leakage through
formwork, shall be avoided. Immersion vibrators shall be withdrawn slowly to
prevent the formation of voids. Vibrators shall not be used to work the concrete
along the forms, or in such a way as to damage formwork or other parts of the
structure, or displace the reinforcement of other embedded items. The internal
vibrators shall be the producing no less than 10,000 cycles/minute, and external
vibrators shall be no less than 3,000 cycles/minute.

1.8.22 Construction Joints

Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the position
and arrangement of which shall be indicated on the drawings and approved by the
Owner.
When not indicated on the drawings the following general rule shall apply;

Columns: Joints in columns are to be made at the underside of floor members

and at floor levels. Haunches and column capitals are to be
considered as part of and continues with the floor or roof.
Floors: Joints in the floor system are to be located at or near the quarter
points of the span in slabs and beams, except where otherwise
instructed.
126
Walls: Vertical joints away from corners and Horizontal joints above
splaysoropenings.
Whenever the placing of the concrete is discontinued other than at the exposed faces,
this dis-continuity shall form a construction joint. Construction joints are to be made
only along a horizontal or vertical plan except that in the case of inclined or curved
members they shall be at right angles to the principal axis. Care shall be taken to
prevent off setting of the joint and to ensure water tightness. The joints shall in every
way satisfy the requirement of the Owner, and be fully detailed on drawings prior to
submission for approval.
When work is resumed adjacent to a surface, which has set, the whole surface shall
be thoroughly roughened. It shall be cleaned of all loose and foreign matter and
laitance and washed with water immediately before placing the fresh concrete which
shall be well compacted against the joint.

1.8.23 Construction Bays

The Contractor shall agree with the Owner, prior to the commencement of
concreting, upon the sequence of placing concrete and positions of vertical and
horizontal joints, whether shown or not on the drawings. In general, slabs in excess
of 6 m in length and/or width and walls exceeding 6 m in length shall not be poured
in one operation and subsequent adjacent bays shall not be concreted within seven
days. The maximum area of any pour shall be 100 m2. In the light of experience the
Owner may consider the above pour size limits to be excessive and will have the
authority to reduce them.
As an alternative to alternate bay construction, shrinkage gaps of up to 1 (one) m in
the width may be left a 6 m intervals; the shrinkage gaps shall not be concreted until
concrete on all sides is at least seven days old. Expansion joints shall be fully
detailed on construction drawings before submission for approval. Minimum width
of expansion joints to be 25 mm except for shaded areas 12 mm. Expansion joints
shall be filled with bitumen impregnated fiberboard to full depth and width. The
infilling will be permitted to be used as permanent formwork only for the second
casting.
Where the fiberboard is exposed it shall be cut back for a depth of at least 2 cm from
the chamfered edge, filled and pointed with a resilient liquid polysulphide polymer
sealant to the manufacturer's instructions.
Where dowel bars are indicated on the drawings forming part of a joint they shall be
held securely horizontal and perpendicular to the joint during concreting.
Dowel bars shall be plain mild steel bars conforming with international standards;
they shall be straight and coated at one end with approved bond breaking
compound, which shall consist essentially of 66% of 200 pen bitumen blended not
with 14% light creosote oil and, when cold, brought to the consistence of paint by the
addition of 20% solvent naphtha, or other approved compound.
Plastic caps used in expansion joints shall be rigid and securely fixed to the dowel to
prevent the ingress of concrete during casting of the slab. The packing used within
the cap shall be an insert compressible material. All dimensions must be shown on
drawings prior to submission for approval.

1.8.24 Joining New Concrete Work to Existing

Existing concrete shall be broken out as described or directed and scabbled to form a
suitable key for the concrete.
127
Where necessary the reinforcement in existing concrete shall be exposed, cleaned
and bent to its correct shape. New reinforcement shall be securely wired to the
existing.

1.8.25 Curing
Concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from the harmful
effects of sunshine, drying winds, cold, rain or running water. The protection shall
be applied as soon as practicable after completion of placing by a method to be
approved by the Owner.
The Contractor shall put forward his proposals for curing concrete to the Owner for
approval, before any concreting work commences. On vertical surfaces, the curing
membrane shall be applied immediately after removing the formwork. No concrete
shall be allowed to become alternately wet and dry. The temperature of curing water
shall be the same as the concrete +10°C. General concrete shall be wet cured for at
least seven days with further four days of dry protection.

1.8.26 Trial Mixes

The Contractor shall submit not less than three weeks before the commencement of
manufacture of preliminary trial design mixes the following information to the
Owner in respect of each grade of concrete.
(a) Grade of concrete.
(b) Title of particular trial mix.
(c) The grading of the aggregates.
(d) The ratio by weight of all the constituents of the concrete.
(e) The expected compacting factor and slump.
(f) Full details of the proposed site quality control.
(g) Full details of the proposed laboratory for testing.
The Contractor shall also confirm his proposed testing regime and acceptance
criteria for the Preliminary Trial Mixes, which should be based on BS 5328. Should
the proposal not be approved by the Owner, then the Contractor shall comply with
the paragraph on preliminary test cubes and the two following paragraphs below.
At least four weeks before commencing any concreting in the Works, the Contractor
shall make trial mixes using samples of aggregates and cements typical of those to be
used. If possible, the concreting plant and the means of transport to be employed in
the Works shall be used to make the trial mixes and to transport them a
representative distance. A clean dry mixer shall be used to make the trial mixes and
the first batch shall be discarded.
Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Owner for his
approval, full details of the mixes he proposes to use, with their anticipated strength,
which must be based on the satisfactory results of these preliminary tests. The
Owner shall if he so desires be present at all preliminary tests. The Contractor shall
inform the Owner of his intention to carry out such tests and the time and place of
the tests at least 24 hours before they take place. Neither the mix proportions nor the
source of supply of materials shall be altered without the prior approval of the
Owner except that the Contractor shall adjust the proportions of the mix, as
required, to take account of permitted variations in the materials. Such approval
shall be subject to the execution, to the Owner's satisfaction, of trial mix procedures
set out herein.

128
1.8.27 Works Test Cubes
Before commencing any concreting in the Works the Contractor shall submit for
approval his proposed testing regime for the Works' concrete. Should the proposals
not be approved by the Owner, the Contractor shall comply with the next two
paragraphs below. For the first ten days that a particular grade of concrete is
produced, or where there is a lapse of two weeks or more between successive pours
of the same grade of concrete, three samples shall be taken on each day and three
cubes shall be made from each sample. Two shall be tested at seven days and the
other at 28 days.
After the initial ten days, samples of designed mixes shall be taken at the reduced
rate given in Table 2 below with the provision that at least one sample shall be taken
on each day that concrete of that grade is used. Three cubes shall be made from each
sample, one being tested at seven days and the remaining two at 28 days.
TABLE 2 – Samolin rates for design mixes after ten day run-in of concrete rate
(3cubes shall be made from each sample).

Rate One Sample to be taken every day or

every :
A Critical Structures e.g. 10 m3
cantilevers, Columns
B Intermediate Structures e.g. 40 m3
Beams, Slabs, Bridge decks

The cubes shall be made, cured, stored and tested in compression in accordance with
international standards. The tests shall be carried out in a testing laboratory
approved by the Owner.
The laboratory must provide evidence that its equipment and procedures comply
with international standards and that its testing machines are regularly checked and
adjusted for accuracy. Full details of the qualifications of all laboratory staff will be
required by the Owner.
Reports of all tests made shall be supplied direct from the laboratory to the Owner.
The Owner's representative on site shall have the authority to stop all further
concrete work until acceptable tests results are forthcoming. Up-to-date records shall
be kept by the Contractor at the Works of positions in the Work of all batches of
concrete, of their grade and of all test cubes, cores and other specimens taken from
them. Copies of these records shall be supplied to the Owner at weekly intervals or
upon request by the Owner.

1.8.28 Compliance of Works Test Cubes with Specification

When submitted proposed testing regimes the Contractor shall also detail his
proposed acceptance criteria for the Owner's approval. When this is not forthcoming
the Contractor shall comply with the next two paragraphs below. The rules of
compliance for works cubes are different to those for trial mixes. Compliance with
the characteristic strength shall be assumed if the conditions given in both

(a) The average strength from any group of four consecutive test results
exceeds the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm2 for concrete of

129
 grade C25 and above (i.e. characteristic strength = 25 N/mm2). 2 N/mm2
for concrete of gradeC15 and below (i.e. Characteristic strength = 15
N/mm2).
(b) The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified
characteristic strength minus.
3 N/mm2 for concrete of grade C25 and above
2 N/mm2 for concrete of grade C15 and below

The quantity of concrete represented by any group of four consecutive test results
shall include the batches from which the first and last samples were taken, together
with all intervening batches. When a test result fails to comply with (b), only the
particular batch from which the sample was taken shall be at risk. Compliance
criteria remain the same irrespective of every rate of sampling or the same grade
concrete in different structures.
Where a minimum or maximum cement content of a designed mix is specified and
compliance is assessed by observation of the batching or from autographic records,
the cement content shall not be less than 95% of the specified minimum or more
than105% of the specified maximum. Where compliance of cement content is
assessed from the results of analysis tests on fresh concrete, the cement content shall
not be less than 90% of the specified minimum or more than 110% of the specified
maximum.

1.8.29 Failure of Concrete to Meet Test Requirements

If the strength of the specimen is less than the appropriate specified minimum
crushing strength or if, in the opinion of the Owner, the concrete fails to meet the
specified requirements in other respects, the concrete in that part of the Works of
which it is a sample will be considered not to comply with the specified
requirements. As and where directed by the Owner, cylindrical core specimens shall
be cut from the hardened concrete in the Works for the purposes of examination and
testing. The cutting equipment and the method of doing the work shall be approved
by the Owner. Prior to the preparation for testing, the specimens shall be made
available for examination by the Owner. Testing of the core shall be in accordance
with approved standards.
Recourse may also be made by the Owner to such non-destructive means of testing
as ultrasonic pulsing and Schmidt rebound hammers. If the specified requirements
have not been met, the Contractor shall propose such remedial action as may be
required. Such action is subject to the Owner's satisfaction and approval. If no
satisfactory remedial measures are proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
Owner then the Owner shall order the removal of all work not complying with the
Specification at the Contractor's expense. Before preceding with similar work the
Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for his approval, details of action proposed to
ensure future concrete to be placed in the Works will comply with the Specification.

130
1.8.30 Formwork
For ms shall be so designed and constructed that the concrete can be properly placed
and thoroughly compacted and that the hardened concrete while still supported by
the forms shall conform accurately to the required shape, position and level, subject
to the tolerances specified and to the standards of finish specified later in this
Section.
The Owner may request the Contractor to provide sample panels of formwork for
approval, at the Contractor's expense. When concrete is to be vibrated, special care
shall be taken to maintain the stability of the formwork and the tightness of the joints
during vibrating operations.
The material and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be approved
by the Owner. The whole or part of the tie shall be capable of being removed so that
no part remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer the surface of the
concrete than the specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left
after the removal of ties shall be filled, unless otherwise directed by the Owner, with
concrete or mortar of approved composition.

1.8.31 Removal of Formwork

All forms shall be removed without damage to the concrete. The use of mould oil or
other material to facilitate this shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. All
formwork for pits, ducts and holding down bolt holes must be so constructed that it
can be easily collapsed to facilitate withdrawal after the initial set of the concrete.
The Contractor's proposed method for the construction and fixing of the formwork
for bolt holes pockets shall be submitted to the Owner for approval before
construction.
The top of the shuttering shall be suitably covered to prevent entry of excess grout,
materials used for curing, etc.
Solid timber must not be used for forming holding down bolt holes. Bolt holes
formers may be made of plywood, expanded metal, polystyrene or other method
approved by the Owner, who may require the Contractor to carry out a test pour,
using the proposed bolt holes former. The Owner shall be informed in advance
when the Contractor intends to strike any formwork. The time at which the
formwork is struck shall be the Contractor's formwork may be struck when the
concrete has, in the opinion of the compressive strength of not less than 10 N/mm2
or twice the stress to subjected, whichever is the greater.
In the absence of cube test results the periods before striking given in be used for
ordinary Portland cement:

Location Surface Temperature of Concrete

Not less than 16 °C Not less than 7 °C
Beam side, Walls and Columns 12 hr 18 hr
Slab soffits (formwork) 4 days 7 days
Formwork props to slabs 11 days 15 days
Beam (formwork props undisturbed) 10 days 15 days
Formwork props to beams 15 days 21 days

131
Formwork shall be constructed so that the side forms of members can be removed without
disturbing the soffit forms and its props are to be left in place, when the soffit forms are
removed these props shall not be disturbed during the striking.

1.8.32 Finishes of Concrete

The Contractor shall state precisely on his plans which of the types of finishes
described hereunder he intends to use in the various locations. Any defective
concrete finish will be rejected. The Owner may at his discretion order the defects to
be cut out and made good. Plastering of defective concrete, as a means of making
good will not be permitted, except that in case of minor porosity on the surface the
Owner may approve a surface treatment by rubbing down with cement and sand
mortar of the same richness as in the concrete. This treatment shall be made
immediately after removing the formwork.

1.8.33 Formed Finishes for Concrete

(a) Type F.1
This finish is for surfaces against which backfill or further concrete
will be placed. Formwork shall consist of sawn boards, sheet metal or any
other suitable material, which will prevent the loss of grout when the
concrete is vibrated.
(b) Type F.2
This finish is for surfaces, which are permanently exposed to view but
where the highest standard of finish is not required. Forms to provide a Type
F.2 finish shall be smooth and boards shall be not less than 18mm thick with
edges, arranged in a uniform pattern. Alternatively, metal panels may be
used if they are free from defects likely to detract from the general
appearance of the finished surface. Joints between the boards and panels
shall be horizontal and vertical unless otherwise directed. This finish shall be
such as to require no general feeling of surface pitting, but fines, surface
discoloration and other minor defects shall be remedied by methods
approved by the Owner.
(c) Type F.3
This finish is for surfaces prominently exposed to view where good
appearance and alignment are of special importance. To achieve this finish,
which shall be free of board marks, the formwork shall be faced with
plywood or equivalent material in large sheets. The sheets shall be arranged
in an approved uniform pattern whenever possible.
Joints between sheets shall be arranged with architectural feature, sills,
window heads or drainages in direction of the surface. All joints between
panels shall be vertical and horizontal unless otherwise directed. Suitable
joints shall be provided between sheets to maintain accurate alignment in the
place of the sheets. The joints shall be arranged and fitted so that no blemish
or mark is imported to the finished surface. Un faced wrought boarding or
standard steel panels will not be permitted for Type F.3 finish. Permanent
forms shall be constructed of slabs or blocks of precast concrete, natural
stone, brickwork of other approved material as directed. Such slabs or blocks
shall have an exposed surface of the quality shown on the drawings and as
specified. They shall be fixed to the structure by approved means and the
joints between them shall be made tight with mortar or other means of
preventing leakage. The use of internal metal ties shall not be allowed.
132
 (d) Type F.4
This finish is identical to type F.3 except that internal metal ties are
permitted.

1.8.34 Unformed Finishes to Concrete

(a) Type U.1
This is a screened finish for surfaces of roads or of foundations, beds,
slabs and structured members to be covered by backfills, subsequent stages
of construction, bonded concrete, topping or cement mortar beds to receive
paving and on exposed surfaces or paving where superior finish is not
required. It is also the first stage for finishes Type U.2 and U.3. The finishing
operations shall consist of leveling and screeding the concrete to produce a
uniform plane or ridged surface, surplus concrete being struck off by
straightedge immediately after compaction.
(b) Type U.2
This is a floated finish for surfaces of beds and slabs to receive mastic
paving or block or tile pavings where a hard smooth steel toweled surface is
not required. Floating shall be done only after the concrete hardens
sufficiently and may be done by hand or machine. Care shall be taken that
the concrete is worked no more than is necessary to produce a uniform
surface free from screed marks.
(c) Type U.3
This is a hard smooth steel-toweled finish for surfaces of concrete
pavings, tops of walls, exposed surfaces of engine and plant foundations and
in the vicinity of holding down bolt chases, copings and other members
exposed to weathering, surface beds and slabs to receive thin flexible sheet
and tile pavings bedded in adhesive and seatings for bearing plates and the
like, where the metal is in dire contact with the concrete.
Toweling shall not commence until the moisture film has disappeared and
the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess laitance from being
worked to the surface. The surface shall be toweled under firm pressure and
left free from trowel marks.

1.8.35 Surface Treatments

Where concrete is to be treated with sodium silicate or a similar dust
preventive coating, this must be carried out within 14 days of the concreting of the
foundation and be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.8.36 Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement shall be one of the following;
(a) Hot rolled mild steel round bars complying with international standards,
as approved by the Owner.
(b) High tensile steel either (i) cold worked deformed bars or (ii) hot rolled
bars complying with international standards approved by the Owner.
(d) Welded steel mesh reinforcement complying with international
standards
The reinforcement bar greater than 40 mm diameter will not be used, and shall be
stored clear of the ground on sufficient supports to prevent distortion of the bars.
Mild steel and high tensile steel are to be stored separately. The Contractor shall

133
supply the Owner with a certificate for each consignment from the steel
manufacturers showing that the steel meets the requirements of the Specification.
One tension test and one bond test shall be made for each lot of 50 tons or less
supplied for the permanent works.
Steel reinforcing bars shall be kept clean and shall be free from pitting, loose rust,
mill scale, oil, grease mortar, earth paint or any material which may impair the bond
between the concrete and reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete.
Reinforcement may be bent on site, or alternatively off the site, by an approved
method. The Contractor shall arrange for bending equipment suitable for bending
both mild steel and intermediate grade bars. Mild steel shall be bent at temperatures
in the range 5 °C to 100 °C.
The shapes of the bends and lengths must comply with the applicable
recommendations of international standards or otherwise specified on the Drawings
and Bending Schedules as approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide any
chairs or other subsidiary reinforcement necessary to keep the reinforcement in its
correct position. The concrete cover over such subsidiary reinforcement shall not be
less than that over the reinforcement generally. The Contractor shall provide
adequate scaffold boards to ensure that the reinforcement is not displaced by being
walked upon during the placing of the concrete or other operations.
Mesh reinforcement shall be fixed flat in the works over the whole of the areas
indicated on the approved drawings. Adjoining sheets of mesh shall overlap by at
least 300 mm. loose small pieces of fabric shall only be used where they are essential
for fitting into small confined parts of the works. Areas of fabric reinforcement shall
be net with no allowance included for laps or waste. Fabric reinforcement shall be
delivered to site only in flat sheets. Bends, cranks and other shapes of reinforcement
shall be to the dimensions specified; otherwise all bars shall be truly straight.
Bending of reinforcement shall be carried out round a former having a diameter of at
least four times the diameter of the bar. The bending dimensions shall comply with
international standards.
Cover blocks used for the correct positioning of reinforcement shall be of a type
approved by the Owner. They shall be rigid, inert and capable of supporting the
reinforcement in its correct position with the required cover without deforming.
They shall not impair the finish on the concrete nor cause the formwork to deform
locally.
Reinforcing bars shall be tied together at every intersection using 16 swg soft pliable
annealed steel wires. When an F3 finish soffit is specified, stainless steel tying wire
shall be used to prevent rust staining. Immediately prior to concreting, all
reinforcement shall be cleaned as required or directed by the Owner by suitable
approved methods to ensure the absence of any contaminates such as windblown
salt.

134
Concrete Cover to Reinforcement
The minimum concrete cover for durability to any reinforcing bar shall be as follows:
(a) Concrete above Ground
Internal faces of suspended slabs 30 mm
Exposed faces of slabs, beams, wall and columns 50 mm
Internal faces of columns and walls 50 mm
(b) Concrete below Ground
Faces in contact with soil including blinding concrete 75 mm
All other faces (e.g. internal faces of basement wall) 50 mm
For other locations the exposure condition and cover shall be approved by the
Owner.
On completion of installation of steel reinforcement the Contractor shall notify the
Owner that it is ready for inspection .No reinforcement shall be covered up without
the prior approval of the Owner.

1.8.37 Testing of Reinforcement

The Owner shall have the right to select at any time samples of steel reinforcement
for testing in accordance with the relevant approved standard.

1.8.38 Bar Bending Schedules

The Contractor shall provide fully dimensioned Bending Schedules giving the
location and bending of every bar shown on the drawings. Unless otherwise stated
on the Bending Schedules all bars shown will be dimensioned in accordance with a
national or international standard to be approved by the Owner, e.g. British
Standard8666 and IEC ISO 4066.

1.8.39 Bituminous Protection of Concrete

The Contractor shall provide additional protection for concrete foundations from the
action of sulphates in the soil by the application, to the satisfaction of the Owner, of a
protective coating of bitumen not less than two millimeters thick to contact surfaces.
The bitumen coating on the underside of the foundations shall be applied to the
surface of the blinding concrete before the deposition thereon of the structural
concrete. The bitumen coating on vertical faces shall be applied in more than one
layer to ensure the complete absence of pinholes and bare patches. Alternatively
protection may be achieved by a self-adhesive waterproofing membrane approved
by the Owner.

1.8.40 Additional Requirements in Hot Weather

(a) General
In hot weather the Contractor shall present for the Owner approval
hisproposalsfor dealing with the following problems: -
(i) Reduced workability
(ii) Excessive plastic shrinkage
(iii) Rapid strength gain but possible low final strength
(iv) Rapid drying out of concrete
(b) Concrete mixing
Aggregate stock piles shall be shielded from the directed rays of the sun or
cooled by spraying with water; and water tanks and pipes shall be insulated
to ensure that the temperature of concrete when deposited shall not exceed
32 °C.
135
 With the approval of the Owner admixtures may be employed to related
setting time or enhance workability, or induce early bleeding etc. Concrete
batched offsite shall be transported by truck mixer with the mixer rotating
only after it arrives on site. Alternatively, the aggregates and 80% of the
required water maybe batched off-site with the cement and remaining water
being added on site not more than 15 minutes before the pour commences.
Concrete transporters shall be kept as cool as practicable.

(c) Concrete placing

Placing shall not commence until sufficient standby pumps and vibrators are
onsite to cope with breakdowns. No concrete shall be batched until
formwork is ready and all reinforcement fixed in place. The area of each
concrete pour frontage shall be kept to a minimum and suitable means shall
be provided to avoid premature stiffening of concrete placed in contact with
hot dry surfaces. Where necessary the surface, including reinforcement,
against which the concrete is to be placed shall be shielded from the rays of
the sun and shall be sprayed with water to prevent excessive absorption by
the surfaces of water from the fresh concrete.
In hot weather concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to a
compacted depth not exceeding 300mm and internal mechanical vibrators
shall be used.
Due to rapid stiffening in hot weather all clean-up operations such as
application to resin cure membranes and dust reducers and surface finishing,
etc. shall follow closely behind final tamping.

(d) Curing
All concrete shall be covered for at least 14 days after placing and kept
continuously wet for the initial 7 days. The temperature of curing water shall
be within 10 °C of that of the concrete. Air shall not be permitted to circulate
between concrete and curing materials.

(e) Testing
Initially the Contractor shall double the number of test cubes made. A limited
number shall be cured under site conditions in order to ascertain the
relationship between site-cured samples and lab-cured samples. The number
of slump tests shall initially be twice that normally required. Air temperature
shall be measured every two hours, and the temperature of every batch of
concrete shall be recorded as it is deposited at the work place.

1.8.41 Additional Requirements in Cold Weather

During cold weather daily temperature forecasts shall be obtained from a source
approved by the Owner, and concreting programmed accordingly. The precautions
detailed below shall be taken when either the ambient temperature is 2 °C and
falling or the temperature of the freshly placed concrete is 9 °C and falling, to ensure
that the temperature of the concrete when placed does not fall below 5 °C until it has
thoroughly hardened. Calcium chloride may be used as an accelerator only with
mass concrete. No concrete containing embedded metal may have calcium chloride
added. Adequate measures to the Owner's approval shall be taken to ensure that the
aggregates are free from frost, ice and snow and that the mixing water which shall
not exceed 60 °C, is of sufficient warmth to ensure that the temperature of the freshly
136
placed concrete shall be not less than 5 °C. No aggregate shall be drawn from a
storage bin or stockpile covered with ice, frost or snow unless the top layer is
removed in such a manner as to ensure that any aggregate used is not contaminated
by ice, frost or snow.
If the ambient temperature is likely to fall below 0 °C all freshly placed concrete shall
be protected by means of braziers, lagging or steam heat under covers, the method
to be used being left to the discretion of the Contractor provided it prevents the
water in or on the surface of the concrete from freezing. The method to be used shall
be agreed by the Owner before the cast has commenced and the necessary steps
taken to ensure that the protective measures are ready to be carried out as soon as
required. All concreting shall cease, as soon as it is practicable to stop placing,
immediately the air temperature falls below 5 °C. In the case of large masses of
concrete this may be waived at the Owner's discretion.

1.8.42 Foundations for all Buildings and Structures

Transformer foundations shall be of reinforced concrete minimum grade C28 and
other foundations to all buildings and structures shall be of reinforced concrete
minimum C25 or other specification in the design after the approval of the owner .
The foundations shall be designed in accordance with international standards
approved by owner . The type of footing/foundation selected for each Substation
shall be suitable for the soil conditions and subject to approval of the Owner.
Dimensions of all footings/foundations shall be governed by the most critical
combination of down thrust, uplift and horizontal shear. Factors of safety shall be as
specified in the System Performance Section of these specifications or stated
elsewhere in this specification.
The uplift forces on foundation shall be assumed to be resisted by the self-weight of
the concrete plus the weight of the inverted frustum of a pyramidal cone of soil
whose sides form an angle with the vertical of 30 degrees for cohesive soils and
20degrees for non-cohesive soils. A protective coat of bitumen, as specified else
wherein these specifications, shall be applied to surfaces of formed footings in
contact with the soil. All reinforcing steel augured footings shall be galvanized.
All foundations shall be 150 mm minimum above finishing substation ground level
or floor level if indoor.

1.8.43 Cable Trenches, Draw pits and Duct Banks

Reinforced concrete cable trenches draw pits and duct banks shall be cast in C25
Concrete and to suit the requirements of the cable arrangements, all to the approval
of the Owner. Reinforced concrete duct banks shall be provided at all road crossings
with transition chambers at each end. The ducts shall be sloped to a low point and
drained. The duct banks shall consist of Transit or equivalent approved pipes with
sufficient concrete cover to pipes and shall be designed safely to carry all loads to be
transported over the roads. All necessary fittings and inserts shall be cast in place
and slots shall be provided in the center walls of cable trenches to suit the cable
arrangement requirements. Reinforced concrete draw-pits shall be constructed
where required to facilitate pulling cables. They shall be covered with suitable
covers, designed to accommodate their likely loading, and be suitable for ease and
safe removal.
Reinforced pre-cast concrete shall be cast in C25 concrete. The maximum weight of
each unit shall be 80 kg and every fourth unit shall be provided with lifting loops.

137
 The pre-cast concrete covers shall be designed to support a concentrated live load of
10 kN placed anywhere on the span. Maximum deflection shall be 1/500 of span.
The cable trench arrangement in all buildings shall be designed by the Contractor to
suit the requirements of the panels to be installed. The cable trenches in all buildings
shall be provided with aluminum chequer plate covers as required, and approved by
the Owner.
Each plate shall have a maximum weight of 20 kg and shall be designed to carry a
concentrated live load of 10 kN placed anywhere on the span. Each chequer plat
shall be securely fixed, with a minimum of 4 countersunk screws, to steel angles and
channels cast into the trench walls. Nuts shall be welded to the angles and channels
to receive the screws.

1.9 Water Supply, Drainage and Disposal

1.9.1 Water Storage Tank

(a) General
Steel(plastic) water storage tank shall be provided two (2) placed in ground
level and four (4) placed over the roof of MV switchgear and auxiliary
building and each capacity of tank shall be 1 m3, and a water storage tank
shall be provided at ground level along with an automatic transfer pump
system to ensure that the overhead tank is always kept full. These shall be
provided for all Substations.
The type and method of construction of the tank shall be to the approval of
the Owner including requirement for inlet, outlet, gauging, venting etc.
(b) Protective coatings
The interior tank surface shall be commercially blast cleaned and an
approved tar epoxy shall be applied in two coats of different color and to a
minimum dry film thickness of 38mm each. The type of tar epoxy shall be
suitable for drinking water containers and shall be applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, and to the approval of the
Owner.
The exterior tank surface shall be free from rust, grease, oil etc. and an
approved epoxy red-lead primer shall be applied to obtain a minimum dry
film thickness of 38 mm Additionally coats of an approved epoxy enamel,
blue in color, shall be applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 51 mm
each. Application of the primer and the epoxy enamel shall be in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All mechanical piping,
fittings, equipment etc. shall be galvanized as specified elsewhere in these
Specifications.

1.9.2 Drainage and Sewage Disposal

(a) General
The design, laying, bedding, jointing and testing of all drainage pipes and
structures shall be in accordance with BS 8301, or other approved
Standard agree to by the Owner prior to its use. Rocker pipes are to be
provided at the edges of road crossings and manholes when there is likely to
be differential settlement. At all road crossing the pipes shall be bedded on
and surrounded with C20 concrete to a minimum thickness of 150 mm, and
the concrete surrounded shall extend for a minimum distance of 1 m beyond

138
the road edges. The class and type of pipe shall be capable of sustaining the
maximum design wheel loads that the contractor proposes to use.
(b) Ker b drainage
All road surface runoff shall be directed into soak away pits through slots
In the Kerbs and as detailed on the drawings. The sides and bottoms of these
pits shall be lined with Celanese "Mirafi 140 Fabric" or approved equivalent,
to prevent the migration of fine material from the pits. After the placing of
the filter fabric the pits shall be backfilled with 20 mm crushed stone or
gravel to the level of finish grade.
(c) Building drainage
Roof drainage for all Substations shall be disposed of by means of soak away
pits. The locations and sizes of these pits shall be as shown on the drawings
or suitably fixed. These pits shall not be located closer than 5 m from the
building face. The sides of these pits shall be lined with Celanese "Mirafi 140
Fabric" or approved equivalent and the pits shall be backfilled with 20 mm
crushed stone or gravel to the level of finished grade.
The roof drainage shall be collected in a manhole from which a pipe of
suitable diameter shall be laid with a slope in accordance with the design to
the soak away pits.
The laying, bedding, jointing and testing of the pipe shall be in accordance
with BS 8301, or any other approved Standard. Roof drainage from all other
buildings shall be disposed of by means of rainwater down spouts and
discharged at grade in a direction away from the buildings.
(d) Sewage disposal
Effluent from the buildings is to be drained into septic tank and disposed of
through filter beds or seepage pits all as shown on the drawings. The general
arrangement of pipe routing, including the locations of manholes etc. shall be
as shown on the drawings. The pipes inside of buildings shall be cast iron
pipes surrounding by concrete 100 mm thick. At all road crossings the pipes
shall be bedded on and surrounded with C20 concrete to a minimum
thickness of 150mm, and the concrete surround shall extend for a minimum
distance of 1 beyond the road edges. The class and type of pipe shall be
capable of sustaining the maximum design wheel loads that the Contractor
proposes to use. The laying, bedding, jointing and testing of the pipes shall
be in accordance with BS8301.
(e) Manholes
Manholes shall be constructed with brick walls of 150 mm thick. The bottoms
of the manholes shall be benched up to fall with C20 concrete and the
remaining internal brick surfaces and the tops of the brick walls rendered
with cement mortar to a minimum thickness of 10 mm, and then toweled
smooth. The internal dimensions of each manhole shall be 1 m square where
more than two pipes enter and leave the manhole. All other manholes shall
be 600 mm square, with depth to suit and to the approval of the Owner. In
addition they shall be equipped with 75 mm thick reinforced concrete covers
with lifting holes.
(f) Concrete culvert
If necessary a reinforced concrete pipe culvert or box-culvert of suitable size
shall be provided under the new access roads and adjacent to the existing
main road, to provide continuity of drainage. The invert and slope of the
culvert shall suit the existing grade and slope of the drainage ditch or stream.
139
 The reinforced concrete pipe shall be of sulphate resisting Portland cement
and shall comply with the requirements of BS 4027. The class of pipe and
bedding shall be in accordance with the maximum loads the Contractor
proposes to transport. If more culverts are needed these shall also be
provided.

1.10 Boundary Walls

1.10.1 General
Each of the new Substations shall be surrounded with a boundary wall, and with
gates providing access. The walls are to be designed and constructed to have a
pleasing appearance.

1.10.2. Boundary Wall

The boundary wall shall be 2.5 m high and a minimum 240 mm thick, rendered if
required, and topped with 3 strands of barbed/razor wire on galvanized steel
posts0.75m height built into the wall. Expansion and contraction joints shall be
provided as required and to the approval of the Owner, to prevent cracking in the
walls. Wall and gate foundations shall be designed to suit allowable bearing
pressure on the subsoil and take account of the worst combination of dead, live,
wind, seismic and erection loads. The foundations shall be contained within the
property line. To prevent gates jamming on roads when the road gradient rises in
the same direction as the gate opening, the area adjacent to the gates shall be kept
level whilst maintaining road profile.

140
2. Architectural Works
2.1 General
The work described herein shall form a basis for the preparation of detailed
drawings and the specification to be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to
the Owner in accordance with the specifications.

2.2 Scope of Work

(a) The work to be performed by the Contractor shall include the design,
supply and installation of the various building trades applicable to the
Substation building structures as specified herein and as indicated on the
drawings.
(b) General details are indicated in the drawings for specific parts of the
structures.
These details shall also typify the requirements for all other similar
conditions.

2.3 Materials
(a) Materials shall be obtained from manufacturers approved by the Owner,
and shall be new, free from defects impairing strength durability or
appearance, and shall be of the best quality available for the purposes
specified.

(b) The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials to the Owner for
approval. Any material rejected by the Owner shall not be delivered to the
site. Any material rejected at site by the Owner shall immediately be
removed from the site.

(c) All materials shall be delivered to the Site undamaged, and stored at the
site in such a manner that damage from construction plant or weather will
not occur. Materials subject to damage by weather shall be stored in sheds or
provided with other suitable protective covering to prevent damage or
deterioration to the materials.

2.4 Signage
All necessary signs are to be provided at all Substations, including but not limited to
the following in accordance with the British Standards;
- Substation Name
- Traffics
- Roads
- Room titles
- Emergency exits
- Building services

2.5 Masonry
(a) Bricks shall be the best quality available from local manufacturers. Over-
burnt bricks may be used in masonry work below grade or in partition walls
that are to receive a plastered finish. The size of brick units shall be 240 mm x
120 mm x 80mm, or near sizes.

141
 (b) Masonry mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement to three parts of
sand by volume. Mortar shall be mixed in batches. Any mortar not used
within one hour of the addition of cement shall be discarded.
(c) Brick units shall be wetted before building into the work to prevent
absorption of moisture from the mortar. Adequate measures shall be taken to
prevent efflorescence occurring in the finished work.
(d) Masonry shall be carried up in a uniform manner, no one portion of the
work being carried up more than 750 mm above another at one time.
Completed bed joints shall be maintained in a wet condition during
construction before mortar is placed for succeeding courses. The tops of walls
on which work has been interrupted shall be moistened before work is
resumed.
(e) All masonry corners and intersections shall be properly bonded together
using the best trade practice. Masonry walls shall be securely anchored to the
building structure using galvanized steel ties or equivalent at approximately
every four courses in height. Ample provision shall be made for expansion
and contraction at junctions of masonry with the structural frame and in long
lengths of masonry walls. Details of expansion joints shall be subject to
approval by the Owner.
(f) Mortar joints in masonry that is to be left exposed shall be made concave
at the exposed face using a non-staining pointing tool. Mortar joints in
masonry that is to receive plaster or cement rendering shall be raked, after
curing, to a depth of 6 mm to provide a key.
(g) A bituminous felt or equivalent approved damp proof course shall be
installed in masonry walls for their full thickness at grade floor levels,
copings, window and door heads as indicated on the drawings. A further
damp proof course consisting of a 100 mm thick continuous concrete course,
with Sikadensifying additive as specified elsewhere, shall be placed at grade
floor levels as indicated on the drawings.

2.6 Cement Rendering

(a) Cement rendering shall be applied to exterior masonry, exterior concrete
surfaces, eaves and balcony soffits, wall bases above concrete floors and over
tiled areas of Sanitary Rooms as indicated on the drawings.

(b) Cement rendering shall be applied in three coats producing a minimum

total thickness of 20 mm having a course, granular finish texture except
where required on interior work which shall be trowel led to a smooth, dense
finish. Cement it ious materials shall comply with current British Standards
and shall consist of Normal Portland Cement, White Portland Cement
(finishing coat) and hydrated lime.
Aggregates shall consist of clean, fine granular material composed of natural
sand free from any impurities, and shall be well graded from course to fine
consistent with good workability. Water shall be drinkable.
(c) Suspended soffits shall be securely attached to the building structure
using corrosion resistant metal components. Metal lath shall be expanded
sheet steel as locally supplied. The metal lath shall be supported from the
suspension system at600 mm maximum spacing between supports.

142
 (d) All rendering coats shall consist of one part Portland cement to between
three and five parts damp, loose aggregate and 1/4 part (maximum)
hydrated lime. All ingredients shall be thoroughly dry-mixed. Water shall be
added until mix is in uniformly plastic condition for good plastering
consistency. When necessary, plasticity shall be restored by reworking mix
without further addition of water.
(e) Before each application, the base material shall be evenly dampened to
control suction. The "first" coat shall be applied with sufficient pressure to
form a good bond and shall be uniformly scratched. The "second" coat shall
be applied a minimum of 24 hours after the "first" coat and shall be floated to
a true surface and left rough. The finish coat shall be applied a minimum of
24 hours after the "second "coat. The Contractor shall submit samples of the
finish coat texture and color for approval by the Owner. Each intermediate
coat shall be kept moist for a 48 hours period following application. The final
coat shall be moisture cured for a 7 days period.
(f) The Contractor shall make all necessary provision for expansion joints in
the cement rendering. Cracked or crazed areas shall be removed and
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Decorative sink age joints shall
be formed in the finish coat where indicated on the drawings.

2.7 Roofing
(a) Bituminous roofing materials shall be of the best quality obtainable from
local suppliers.
(b) Concrete structural roof decks shall be cleaned of all loose and deleterious
materials before application of roofing is commenced.
(c) The concrete deck and lower portion of parapet walls shall receive a
continuous coating of asphalt primer that shall be allowed to cure before
application of the waterproof membrane.
(d) The waterproof membrane shall be built-up as follows:
(i) One layer bitumen 20/30 (locally made) of 3 mm thickness to be
laid directly on the reinforced concrete slab
(ii) One layer of ply roofing felt
(iii) One layer bitumen 1200 or equivalent to be laid off 3 mm thick
(iv) Roof insulation
(v) Repeat (i), (ii) and (iii) above over the roof insulation.
Bitumen shall be hot applied. Roofing felts shall be embedded in the hot
bitumen with joints lapped a minimum of 200 mm and sealed with bitumen
in the lapped area. The membrane shall be carried up the inside face or
parapet walls and into a chase formed in the concrete surface.
(e) For all buildings the roofing shall be rigid, impervious insulation
compatible with adjacent materials and of a thickness conforming to the "U"
value specified herein, shall be placed in between bituminous membrane in a
continuous layer. A continuous layer of clean, dry sand (forming a bed for
precast concrete roof paving slabs) shall be laid to a minimum thickness of 50
mm. The sand bed shall be graded towards the roof and balcony drain
outlets to ensure positive drainage.
(f) Precast concrete roof paving slabs and skirting as specified herein shall be
laid with straight joints in both direction. The units shall be accurately set on
the sand bed so that they are uniform in plane and in true alignment. All
joints shall be filled with mastic asphalt as approved by the Owner.
143
 (g) The Contractor shall submit full details of the roofing system to the
Owner for approval. Details shall include all methods of drainage outlets,
projections through the roofs for mechanical services, metal flashings at
expansion joints, etc.
(h) For the buildings the completed roofing system including the structural
concrete deck shall have a coefficient of thermal transmission ("U) value of
not greater than0.57 W/m2 K.

2.8 Precast Concrete

(a) The contractor shall perform all work necessary for the design,
manufacture and installation of precast concrete units that shall include roof
paving slabs, parapet coping, window and door sills and window canopies.
Special mitered sections shall be provided where required. The design and
manufacture of precast concrete units shall conform to international
standards.
(b) Precast concrete units shall be cast in precision-made forms the profiles of
which shall be in accordance with details approved by the Owner. The door
and windowsills and canopy units shall be reinforced with steel mesh or bar
type reinforcing to safely withstand all stresses due to dead loads, live loads,
temperature changes, lifting, handling and wind. All inserts and anchors,
including those required for lifting, shall be attached to the reinforcing
wherever possible.
(c) Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall submit samples of aggregates to
the Owner for approval. All concrete used in the manufacture of precast
concrete units shall have a mix of C25 concrete. Concrete shall be machine-
mixed using a minimum of water. Measuring of ingredients and mixing shall
be carried out with precision to ascertain the correct proportion of water
necessary to obtain a fine, dense surface free from crazing. Trial mixes shall
be made to ensure concrete quality and finish.
(d) Precast concrete roof paving slabs 800 mm x 800 mm x 50 mm thick shall
be machine pressed by an approved local manufacturer. The slabs shall have
smooth, flat surfaces free from projections and depressions. All rises shall be
sharp and true.
Special precast skirting sections shall be manufactured for installation at the
base of parapet walls. The skirting's shall have rounded top edges and shall
be coved at the junction with horizontal slabs.
(e) All precast concrete components shall be moisture-cured under cover for
a period not less than 7 days.

2.9 Aluminum Windows

(a) All windows shall be of anodized aluminum in accordance, with the
international standards
They shall be provided with all necessary anchors at the perimeter of the
frames for building-in. Jamb anchors shall be adjustable for locating in
masonry coursing.
(b) Opening lights for windows shall be either side hung or bottom projected
as indicated on the drawings. All opening lights shall be inward opening and
shall be completely dust-proofed by neoprene, vinyl or other approved
gaskets fitted to the contact surfaces. The method of dust-proofing shall be
144
 subject to approval and inspection by the Owner. Opening sashes that are
deemed not to be dust-proof by the Owner will be rejected.
(c) Fasteners, stays and hinges shall be of a non-ferrous, heavy-duty design as
approved by the Owner. High-level windows shall be remotely controlled
from 1 m above floor level by a hand-operated, mechanical system approved
by the Owner.
(d) Active leafs shall be fitted to the outside with mosquito-proof bronze in
removable metal frames.
(e) Windows shall be fabricated with aluminum frames and glazing bars and
have fixed lights. The size and gauge of the sections shall be suitable for the
design, loading, sizes and arrangements used. All windows shall be
constructed with thermal break frames. All windows shall be fitted with
double-glazing with solar reflecting glass, 6mm thick minimum with low
heat transfer values. All windows shall be fitted with security grills with
fixing points located in precast concrete surrounds. Windows that can be
subject to direct sunlight at any time of the day throughout the year should
be provided with external shading. Glazing in Sanitary room windows shall
be obscured type.
(f) All windows shall be securely mounted in their openings and shall be
plumb and in a flat plane. Each window shall be properly sealed and made
perfectly weather tight at the head jamb and sill in a manner approved by the
Owner.

2.10 Steel Door and Frame

(a) All exterior and interior doors and frames shall be steel with paint. Shop
drawings and catalogues shall be submitted by Contractor to the Owner for
approval. All exterior doors shall be provided with dust seals on all edges to
the approval of the Owner.

2.11 Door Hardware

(a) Door hardware furniture, fixtures and fittings shall be the best
commercial quality available and of a manufacture and type approved by the
Owner. Locksets, latchets, push and pull plates, shall be manufactured from
wrought brass of bronze having a satin-chrome finish. All lock mechanisms
shall be corrosion-resistant.
(b) Hinges shall be non-ferrous, ball bearing type. Three hinges per door shall
be provided in all buildings.
(c) All exterior and interior doors shall be fitted with mortise type cylinder
locksets with integral dead bolts and latch bolts. Latch shall be operable by
knob on each side of door.
(d) All exterior and interior doors shall be automatic, hydraulic piston type
closer shaving machined cast-iron casings and malleable iron control/relay
arms shall be fitted.
(e) Interior and exterior entrance doors and vestibule doors shall be fitted
with ornamental push-pull hardware as approved by the Owner. Doors to
Sanitary
Rooms shall be provided with push plates and pull handles. Doors to water
closets shall have slide bolts, self-closing hinges and coat hooks.

145
 (f) The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval full specifications,
manufacturer's data and an itemized list indicating details of all hardware to
be installed on each door.
(g) All emergency exits such as exterior doors to the control rooms, shall be
fitted with approved “panic” locks and push-bars.
(h) All cylinder locks included herein shall be keyed separately and conform
to the following key schedule.
- Three (3) nos. of normal keys of all buildings (for permanent use).
- One (1) no. of key box for each Substation which is able to hold
normal keys.

2.12 Gypsum Plaster

(a) Masonry and concrete surfaces to receive a plaster finish shall be
thoroughly brushed to remove all dust and loose matter and shall be rough-
textured to form key. The surfaces thus prepared shall receive a spattering
coat of 1:1 cement/sand applied before plastering commences. All surfaces
shall be dampened with clean water immediately before each coat is applied.
Each base coat shall be moisture cured to ensure proper setting and shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly before the finish coat is applied. Plaster work shall
include all small and narrow areas, internal angles, square or pencil rounded
external arises, joints at flush or projecting corners rounded to openings,
making good around pipes and other projections through walls, roof slabs,
etc.
(b) Gypsum plaster shall be best quality local just conforming to B.S.1191 for
Class Band C finishing plaster. Gypsum shall be stored in weather tight
enclosures until ready for use.
(c) Plaster work shall be 16 mm thick applied in two layers. The first layer
shall consist of one part gypsum bond plaster to three parts sand (by volume)
applied with sufficient material and pressure to cover well and provide good
bond. Before setting, double back with additional material to bring plaster
out to grounds, straighten to a true surface and leave rough for finish coat.
Gypsum bond plaster shall consist of calcined gypsum with 2% to 5% lime by
weight. The second or finish coat shall consist of one part gypsum to three
parts lime putty, applied as thinly as possible and finished to a smooth, even,
steel-toweled finish. Under no circumstances shall gypsum plaster be wetted
after it has fully set.

2.13 Tile Work

(a) Mosaic floor tiles, glazed, with smooth, even surface, uniform in texture
and free from blemishes, chips or other imperfections. Skirting sections shall
be 250 mm by 125 mm coved at the base and rounded at their top edges. The
floor tiles shall have a water absorption rating between 0.5% and 3.0% by
weight after oven drying, boiling in distilled water for 2hours and cooling in
water up to 24 hours. The floor tiles shall be of a color approved by the
Owner.
(b) Glazed wall tiles shall, flat and free from flaws. The wall tiles shall be
white in color and shall be complete with all special edge, trim and corner
sections. Glazed tiles shall be to the full height of the wall.

146
 (c) Surfaces to receive tile works shall be cleaned of all dust and loose matter.
Floor surfaces shall be free from oil and other impurities that may prevent
the proper bonding of the tile mortar bed.
(d) Floors to receive tiles shall be wetted down. A slurry-bonding coat
consisting of Portland cement and water mixed to a creamy consistency shall
be brushed onto the floor surface. The mortar setting bed consisting of one
part Portland cement, one-half part hydrated lime, four parts sand, and one
part water (by volume) shall be placed to a thickness of 30 mm, uniformly
toweled and slightly sloped towards floor drains. The floor tiles shall receive
a 3 mm setting coat of one part Portland cement to one part water (by
volume) and shall be firmly and accurately set into place. Tile joints shall be
straight, uniform and true in both directions. 24 hours later, the tile shall be
wetted, and the joints grouted, using a mixture of one part white "Medusa"
grouting cement or approved equivalent to two parts sand mixed with clean
water. Foot traffic shall not be permitted for minimum of 48 hours.
(e) Walls to receive tiles shall be dampened and shall receive a 6 mm scratch
coat consisting of one part Portland cement; half part hydrated lime, four
parts sand anode part water (by volume), troweled rough and scored. The
scratch coat shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours, before applying a 9 mm
thick mortar bed using same mix as scratch coat. Soak tiles in water for at
least 30 minutes, and drain off excess water prior to installation. Apply a 3
mm setting coat of one part Portland cement to one part water (by volume)
and tap firmly into position. Tile joints shall be straight uniform and true in
the both directions, accurately cut and fitted at all intersections and
projections. 24 hours later, the tile shall be wetted and the joints grouted
using a mixture of one part white "Medusa" grouting cement or approved
equivalent to two parts sand mixed with clean water.
(f) All floor and wall tile shall be thoroughly cleaned following installation.
Protective coverings shall be used as directed by the Owner.

2.14 Carpentry
(a) Carpentry work shall include all necessary wood grounds and blocking,
counters, plastic laminate counter tops, cupboards, benches, partition
framing and shelving.
(b) All materials shall be of the best merchantable species suitable for the
intended use.
Moisture content shall not exceed 12% for softwood and 8% for hardwood.
Plywood shall be best quality hardwood-faced veneer, paint grade, sanded.
Hardboard shall have a minimum density of 800 kg/m3 and shall have one
face suitable for sanding and painting
(c) Work benches shall be strongly constructed from wood members of 40
mm minimum thickness with open shelving and tool drawers 400 mm wide
fitted below bench tops. Bench tops shall be constructed of heavy tongued
and grooved boards. Bench tops in Battery Rooms shall be covered in sheet
lead.
(d) Guard house benches shall be constructed of hardwood planks with
chamfered edges fixed to metal brackets attached to adjacent walls.
(e) Shelving where indicated, shall be plywood with hardwood edging.

147
2.15 Miscellaneous Metal
(a) Tubular hand railing shall be fabricated from 40 mm nominal diameter
steel pipe, hot dipped galvanized, and securely anchored to concrete steps.
Steel ladders shall consist of flat bar stringers with 20 mm diameter rungs
spaced at 300 mm centers. Ladder rungs shall be tennoned to stringers and
plug-welded. Safety cages shall be provided to the ladders.
(b) The Contractor shall provide and install all miscellaneous steel lintels,
frames, embedded steel parts, anchors and bolts, not specifically described
herein, but which are essential to the proper completion of the work.
(c) Actual member sizes shall be suited to their intended functions and shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner. All steel components if any shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all rust, oil and other deleterious matter before
fabrication, and shall receive one coat of rust inhibiting primer before
shipment to site.

2.16 Bronze Plaque

(a) The Contractor shall provide and install a cast bronze plaque, wall-
mounted adjacent to the main entrance of each Substation main building. The
plaque shall consist of the Owner's graphic symbol (The Owner) and
lettering all in accordance with design to be provided by the Owner. All
fastenings shall be concealed and tamper proof. Size of plaque shall be
approximately 500 mm x 700 mm.
(b) An eight-cornered star emblem shall be suitably and conspicuously
displayed at the entrance to the Substation.

2.17 Painting
(a) Paint materials shall be of the best quality available and shall be obtained
from a single manufacturer approved by the Owner. All materials shall be
delivered to the site in unbroken, sealed and labeled containers of the paint
manufacturer. They shall be stored in separate buildings or rooms well-
ventilated and free from excessive heat, sparks, flame or direct sunlight.
(b) All containers of paints shall remain unopened until required for use
containers that have been opened shall be used first. Paint that has
deteriorated during storage shall not be used.
(c) Paints shall be thoroughly stirred, strained and kept to a uniform
consistency during the application. Mixing of pigments to be added shall be
done strictly as recommended by the manufacturer. Where thinning is
required, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint and
recommended for the particular purpose shall be allowed, according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
(d) All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means,
of all foreign substances. Cleaning shall be done with approved solvents, or
wire brushing. Hardware, electrical fixtures and similar accessories shall be
removed or suitably masked during preparation and painting operations.
(e) Metal surfaces shall be cleaned and free from flaking, bubbling, rust, loose
scale and welding splatter. Sharp edges shall be dulled by grinding. Oil and
grease shall be thoroughly removed by Varsol or similar approved. Priming
shall be done immediately after cleaning to prevent new rusting. Damaged
prime coats of items delivered to site shop primed shall be repaired using
same type primers. Edges shall be "feathered" to make patching
148
inconspicuous. The Contractor shall apply one full coat of primer to all items
to be finish painted which have not been previously shop primed.
(f) Wood surfaces shall be sanded to a smooth surface. No wood shall be
painted unless it is sufficiently dry. All sapwood, streaks and knots shall be
sealed with knotting to BS 1336. Excess resin shall be removed with a
blowtorch, scraper or solvent. The prime coat shall then be applied and,
when dry, nail and knot holes shall be filled with putty, allowed to dry and
sandpapered.
(g) Plaster surfaces shall be brushed to remove dust and efflorescence. Any
holes or cracks shall be cut with edges undercut, made good and rubbed
down.
(h) Concrete and masonry surfaces shall be left at least one month before
painting. They shall be etched using a 15% to 20% muriatic acid solution
completely removing all foreign matter and efflorescence, then thoroughly
rinsed with water and allowed to dry. Concrete and masonry surfaces to be
painted shall include precast concrete window canopies, parapet coping,
window sill and decorative grillage blocks.
(i) Paint shall not be applied in rain, or when the relative humidity exceeds
85%. Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces. When paint must be
applied during inclement weather, the surfaces shall be protected under
cover. Such surfaces shall remain under cover until weather conditions
permit exposure.
(j) The work shall be done strictly in accordance with the paint
manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. The Contractor
shall apply paint coatings producing an even film of uniform thickness using
brush, roller or spray gun. If paint has thickened, or must be diluted for
application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film
thickness achieved with undiluted material. The coverage of paint shall
remain the same whatever method of application is used.
Each coat of paint shall be in a different tint to the succeeding one. All
surfaces shall be sanded lightly between coats and be dusted before the
succeeding coat is applied.
(m) Each coat of paint shall be in a proper state of cure before the application
of the succeeding coat. Paint will be considered dry when an addition coat
can be applied without the development of any detrimental film
irregularities such as lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. The
manufacturer's recommended drying time shall be regarded as the minimum
permissible time and shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation
to produce a satisfactory succeeding coat.
(n) Paint shall be applied either with brushed, or by means of rollers or
spraying machines to obtain a uniform even coating.
(i) By Brush
The primary movement of the brush shall describe a series of small
circles to thoroughly fill all irregularities in the surface, after which
the coating shall be smoother and thinned by a series of parallel
stroke.
(ii) By Roller
This application shall be done by rolling the second coat at right
angles to the first coat.

149
 (iii) By Sprayer
Spray equipment shall be of ample capacity for the work and shall at
all times be kept clean and in good working order. Spray guns shall
be suited to the type of paint specified and shall be operated with
orifices, nozzles and air pressure adjusted to consistency.
Paint pots shall be of ample capacity and shall be equipped with means of
controlling air pressure on the pot independently of the pressure of the gun. Airlines
shall be equipped with water traps to positively remove condensed moisture.
(p) If satisfactory work with one of the application methods is not expected
or not obtained, the Owner will decide which method shall be used. Where
surfaces are inaccessible for brushes, and where spraying is not being
employed, the paint shall be applied with sheepskin daubers specially
constructed for the purpose. To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of
paint shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness, free of
pores. Any thin spots or areas missed in the application shall be repainted
and permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is applied.
Doors to be weather-stripped shall be fully painted before weather-stripping
is installed.
(q) Shop painting shall be carried out to the extent and as required elsewhere
in these specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the
compatibility of the previous coating with the finish coats specified herein.
(r) The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, sags and brush
marks, exhibiting good coverage, spreading and leveling.
(s) Colors shall be as shown in a painting color schedule to be approved by
the Owner.
The Contractor shall submit before start of work, actual paint color samples
to the Owner for approval.
(t) The Contractor shall conduct a thorough inspection of all surfaces finished
by him before work is considered complete. This is to be done to ensure that
all surfaces are properly and satisfactorily retouched wherever damaged by
his tradesmen, prior to the removal of his equipment and materials.
Surfaces to be painted shall receive the following coating systems:
(i) For interior exposed galvanized steel ductwork and piping:
- 1 coat vinyl pre-treatment
- 2 coats alkyd interior enamel, semi-gloss finish
(ii) For interior primed structural steel framing, steel doors and
frames:
- 2 coats alkyd interior enamel, semi-gloss finish
(iii) For exterior steel doors and interior and exterior primed
miscellaneous steel stairs, ladders and railings:
- 2 coats alkyd equipment enamel, gloss finish
(iv) For interior wood surfaces
- 2 coats latex, flat finish
(v) For interior wood surfaces
- 1 coat interior primer
- 2 coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss finish
(vi) For unprimed steel piping:
- 1 coat iron oxide zinc chromate
- 2 coats alkyd equipment enamel, gloss finish
150
 (vii) For concrete and masonry surfaces:
- 2 coats polyvinyl acetate latex, flat finish

The Contractor shall perform the following inspections in the presence of the Owner:
appearance, dimension, painting (film thickness, coverage, appearance) and completion
inspection. The places, time and contents of the inspection shall be subject to approval of
the Owner.

151
3. Building Services
3.1 General:
This section should be read in conjunction with other relevant sections of the
specifications related to civil works. The following building services are covered in
this section:
• Plumbing services.
• Mechanical ventilation.
• Internal lighting.
• External lighting.
• Small power installations.
• Earthing and bonding connections.
• Fire detection and alarm as well as firefighting systems.
• Telephone installation.
• Other related works approved by the Owner.
The detailed calculations, designs and layouts shall be submitted on time for the
Owner approval before placement of any order or site work is undertaken. For
Tender purposes the Contractor must identify the capacity, manufacture/make,
model number, construction standard and type of any equipment or subcomponent
being offered together with the selection procedure prior to the agreement that will
be signed with the Owner, later on and after evaluating all submitted offers. Any
exclusion to the complete and satisfactory performance of the design and installation
must be clearly indicated in the offer otherwise it will be assumed that everything
necessary has been included at the Contractor's cost.

3.2 Scope of Works

The supply and services to be performed by the Contractor shall comprise the
design, manufacture, shop testing, packing, transport, insurance, unloading, storage
on site, construction works and erection, corrosion protection, site testing,
submission of documentation, commissioning, training of the Owner's personnel
and warranty of all works. The Contractor is bound to provide complete works, even
if the equipment or services to be provided are not specifically mentioned in the
specification.

3.3 Design Standards for Building Services

The design for the electrical building services shall be in accordance with
international standards requirements for all Electrical Installation (the sixteenth
edition) of the Institution of Electrical Engineer's Wiring Regulations including latest
amendments. Individual items of equipment shall be in accordance with the latest
issue relevant of IEC or British Standard. The design of fire detection and alarm
systems shall comply with the requirements of BS 5839. The design of the
mechanical building services elements shall be in accordance with the following;
(a) The Contractor shall ensure that all designs and calculations, of required
building services, to be carried out by a qualified consultant approved by the
Owner.
(b) Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides to
Good Practice, Inter-related Documents and TM4.
(c) American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning
Engineers (ASHRAE) Reference Handbooks.

152
 (d) Latest issues of relevant IEC or British Standards.
(e) Building Services Research and Information Association Technical Notes.
(f) UK Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association (1982) Specifications
for metal ductwork DW/143/144 (HVAC) UK.

3.4 Electrical Power Supplies

The electrical power supply available will be 230/400 ± 5% V, 3 phase 4 wire, with
earthed neutral, and 50 Hz. All equipment shall be suitable for use with this electric
supply system unless otherwise specified. The main and local distribution boards
shall be located in the 33/11kV switchgear room of the Substation, from which final
sub-circuits shall supply the lighting circuits and all other current consuming
accessories, socket outlets, etc. LV combined power/control board for ventilation
(and may be air conditioning) shall have duplicate supplies to ensure that at least
one of the duplicate plants is available on loss of one source of supply.

3.5 Lighting and Small Power

3.5.1 General
This Specification covers the rating, design, equipment requirements, installation,
inspection and testing of complete lighting and small power installations.
This Specification does not enumerate nor describe all materials and equipment to be
supplied nor all the services to be performed in this project. All materials and
equipment shall be provided as required to make a complete, properly functioning
installation and shall conform to the highest standards of engineering design and
workmanship. The design and installation of lighting and small power installations
shall be based on the following Standards and/or regulations;
• Requirements for Electrical Installations, IEE wiring regulations BS 7671 as
issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, and British Standards.
• The Code for Lighting, Lighting Guides, as issued by the Chartered
Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE), U.K.
• BS 5266, Emergency Lighting Code of Practice for the Emergency Lighting
of Premises.
• IEC Standards as applicable.
• Local laws, rules and regulations including those of statutory authorities.
• Other Standards as detailed in the specification text.
Materials, workmanship and tests shall conform at least to the following Standards
and Codes of Practice:
IEC 60364-5-54: Earthing Arrangements and Protective Conductors for
Indoor
Installations up to 1000 V AC and 1500 V DC.
IEC 60064: Specification for Tungsten Filament Lamps for General Service
(BS 161) (Batch testing).
BS 5649: Steel Columns for Street Lighting
IEC 60598: Luminaries
IEC 60081: Tubular Fluorescent Lamps for General Lighting Service
IEC 60921: Specification for Ballast for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
IEC 60309: Plug and Socket Outlets
IEC 60188: High-Pressure Mercury Vapor Lamps
IEC 62035: Discharge Lamps (excluding Fluorescent Lamps)
IEC 60898: Specification for Circuit Breakers for Over-Current Protection for
Household and Similar Installations.
153
 IEC 61024: Protection of Structures against Lightning.
IEC 60923: Specification for Performance Requirements for Ballasts for
Discharge Lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent lamps)
IEC 61347: (Various parts) Lamp Control-gear
IEC 60947: Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control-gear
IEC 60227: PVC - Insulated Cables of Rated Voltage up to and including
450/750
IEC 6004: Electric Cables. PVC insulated, non-armored cables for voltages up
to and including 450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal wiring
BS 6500: Electric Cables. Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 V, for use with
appliances and equipment intended for domestic, office and similar
environments.
BS 6724: Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V Armored Cables
having thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive
gases when affected by fire.
BS 6121: Mechanical Cable glands for elastomeric and plastics insulated
cables The Contractor shall be aware of all relevant standards and
regulations that are applicable to works under this Contract. The detailed
design shall be approved before proceeding with any purchase of equipment
or any installation works.

The Contractor shall submit adequate and full supporting documentation

(calculations, schematics, schedules, general arrangement drawings, technical and
descriptive manufacturer's data, his own text and/or samples, etc.), for the Owner to
ascertain that the requirements of the Specification are being fully complied with.
The Calculations shall identify all assumptions made which must be agreed with the
Owner before the detailed design is finalized and approved.
Location of the lighting and small power equipment shall be reviewed at site before
installation so that satisfactory co-ordination with piping network, ductwork, power
cables and other equipment can be assured. Each laminar/socket outlet or any other
item of equipment shall have a unique code that comprises letters and figures so
compiled that the following information can be readily identified:
• The lighting distribution board to which the luminaries or socket outlet is
connected.
• Connection to the normal supplies or to the emergency supplies.
• The circuit number and phase of distribution board to which the equipment
is connected.
• The sequence of the equipment in a particular circuit.
• The lighting and small power systems are broadly divided into the
following categories:
1) Indoor, normal lighting system.
2) Outdoor, normal lighting system.
3) Indoor, emergency lighting system.
4) Small power socket outlet system.
5) Access road lighting.
6) Guard house supplies including associated lighting and small
power installations.

154
All lighting systems are to be fed by final sub-circuits from distribution boards
located in 33/11kV switchgear room. There shall be separate distribution boards for
both the normal and emergency lighting, and also small power loads which include
socket outlets. The types of luminaries to be installed in different areas of the
Substation will vary from normal indoor fluorescent types to external, specially
sealed, luminaries selected to suit the specific location and environment.
All lighting circuits shall operate on a 230 V, 50 Hz supply from miniature circuit
breakers within their respective distribution boards. Each outgoing circuit shall
supply a varying number of luminaries and the lighting in an individual room shall
be controlled by local room light switches within individual rooms, separately.
External lighting shall be controlled automatically by photocells that will operate
and switch a number of relays or contactors for these final sub circuits.
All emergency lighting circuits are to be supplied from the designated emergency
lighting distribution board and 110 V DC supplies shall be used for emergency
lighting.
No local facilities shall be used to control emergency lighting circuits. If required
control can be achieved at the emergency lighting distribution board, Illuminated
Exit and Escape Signs are also to be part of the emergency lighting system. These
shall be provided to cover all areas of the Substation's buildings.

Main Technical Data

The lighting and small power distribution boards shall be rated for 230/400 V, 50
Hz. Supplies shall be taken from the LV AC distribution switchboard to the
installations for normal supplies, and from the 110 V DC switchboards for
emergency supplies.
Local distribution boards shall be provided for each of the systems as follows:
• One board to feed all normal internal lighting.
• One board to feed small power installations.
• One board to feed external lighting.

Separate boards shall be provided for the Guard house, if required.

Each of the local distribution boards shall be equipped at least with:
• Four-pole incoming differential circuit breaker.
• Four-pole outgoing differential circuit breakers (for socket outlets).
• Two-pole outgoing differential circuit breakers (for socket outlets).
• Three-pole outgoing circuit breakers.
• One-pole outgoing circuit breakers.
• Three-phase busbar system.
• Neutral bar.
• Earthing bar.
• Push button and contactors as necessary.
• Other equipment and material as necessary.
• Each board shall be equipped with 20% spare feeders.

The local distribution boards may be proposed as the integral parts of the board with
separate compartments, subject to the Owner's approval. The distribution board for
emergency lighting shall be equipped, at least, with:

155
 • Two-pole incoming circuit breaker.
• Two-pole outgoing circuit breaker.
• Earthing Bar.
• Other equipment and material as necessary and each board shall be
equipped with 20% spare feeders.

3.5.2 Scope of Supply and Services

The lighting and small power systems include but not limited to:
• Distribution boards.
• Cables.
• Cable trunking, containment systems
• Socket outlets and plugs.
• Luminaries.
• Lighting switches.
• External lighting control systems
• Earthing and bonding
• Lightning Protection of all buildings.
• Labeling and identification of all the installation.
• Special tools and equipment for maintenance, inspection and repair.
• All standard equipment and accessories which are normally included
in the schedule but which are not separately listed.
• Spare parts
• Complete documentation as specified, etc.

3.5.3 Equipment Requirements

3.5.3.1 General
All fixings shall be of a type approved by the Owner. All supporting metalwork
used in surface installations shall be galvanized. Fixing to structural steelworks shall
be with purpose-made brackets or clamps. Drilling of structural steel works will not
be permitted. Switches and pushbuttons for lighting circuits shall be mounted 1300
mm above the finished floor level.
Socket outlets shall be mounted 300 mm above the finished floor level. Any socket
outlets required that are associated with work benches shall be mounted150 mm
clear of the bench working surface. All lighting switches shall have a minimum
continuous rating of 13 A and a 50% de-rating factor shall be applied for fluorescent
lighting loads.
Luminaries shall be secured to ceilings, walls, trunking systems, roof steel work or
suspended as required by the approved design and the Owner's confirmation. Final
connections to all suspended luminaries shall be by heat resistant flexible cable
terminated in heat resisting connectors in the ceiling or junction box which shall also
terminate the final sub-circuit cable. The cable length shall be such that the
suspension unit supports take the full weight of the luminaries.
Where luminaries are mounted fixed to walls or ceilings the final sub-circuit cables
may be connected into the luminaries own terminal block provided that the cables
are routed to avoid any heat generating components inside the luminaries. Where
terminal blocks are not provided as part of the luminaries "flexible heat-resistant
cable shall be used and connected to a separate external junction box.

156
 3.5.3.2 Distribution Boards
The distribution boards and all component parts shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 60947 and be capable of withstanding, without damage, the
mechanical and electrical stresses that can exist by any fault current. The
withstanding shall be for twice the period required to disconnect such fault on any
circuit. Each distribution board shall have a dustproof metal case of sheet steel with
an enameled finish and shall have hinged doors. The doors shall incorporate a
gasket and have a push-button handle incorporating cylinder type lock. Each lock
shall be unique and shall be supplied with 3keys. The color of the enamel finish shall
match the color of other switchgears installed in this project. The distribution board
metal casing shall be provided with a gland plate for cable entry corresponding to
the cable size required for the overall design circuit capacity of the distribution
board. It shall also incorporate and a suitable screened brass earthing stud.
Each current carrying component shall be designed so that under continuous rated
full load conditions in the environmental conditions at site and that the maximum
total temperatures permitted under the relevant Standards are not exceeded. All
distribution boards shall incorporate a disconnect or which shall be used to isolate
the incoming supply to the distribution board this shall be anon-load switch.
Outgoing circuits for socket outlets as well as ventilation, and may be air-
conditioning; equipment shall be provided with residual current protection with a
tripping sensitivity of 30 mA. Where a distribution board feeds critical equipment
individual residual current protection shall be used to avoid loss of all power
supplies. The cables feeding the distribution boards shall be connected directly to the
incoming disconnector or neutral bar as appropriate unless indicated otherwise by
the Specification.
Neutral bars shall have an appropriate number of ways relative to the size of the
board.
The metal surface adjacent to any live part and all spaces between phases shall be
protected by barriers made of fireproof insulation material. The current rating of the
busbars in each distribution board shall not be less than the sum of maximum
current rating of all outgoing circuits. The neutral connection for each circuit is to be
direct to the neutral busbar. Approved type labels shall befitted externally on the
front cover of each distribution board giving details of the points controlled by each
circuit. The circuit list shall be typed or printed stating the location of the equipment
served, rating of the protective unit, circuit loading and the cabling size and type.
The lists shall be mounted on the inside of the cover door and shall be protected by
an acrylic sheet slid into a frame over the circuit list, the list and cover to be easily
removable to permit circuit modifications.

3.5.3.3 Main Switches

Air break switches, Disconnector and Molded Case Circuit Breakers shall be used as
appropriate. They shall be designed and rated in accordance with IEC60947-3 and
IEC 60898 as appropriate for expected symmetrical fault rating and shall be capable
of breaking rated load current.

3.5.3.4 Miniature and Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

All Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB's) and Miniature Circuit Breakers
(MCB's) shall be constructed according to IEC 60947. Circuit breakers shall be of the
high-speed fault limiting, thermal/magnetic type with quick-make and quick-break

157
trip free mechanisms which prevent the breaker being held-in against overloads of
fault conditions. Breakers shall have silver tungsten contacts and be derated to suit
the environmental nature of the enclosure and/or load. Tripping arrangements shall
ensure simultaneous opening of all phases.

3.5.4 Cables
The cables for indoor lighting and socket systems installed between distribution
boards and final connections and the cables for outdoor lighting and socket systems
installed between distribution boards and final connections and all cables up to
distribution boards shall be XLPE insulated 3 and 5 cores or 4 cores (P+N+E and
3P+N+E or 3P+N with earth conductor separate): Steel wire armored, Copper
conductor, PVC sheathed and 0.6/1 kV.
All cables shall include an adequately sized neutral and earth continuity conductors.
All cables shall be protected from direct sunlight. The Contractor shall select
conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet the following conditions:
• The minimum conductor size for lighting and socket outlets circuits is
2.5mm2.
• The size is adequate for the current to be carried as set out in the cable
manufacturers‟ specification taking account the site specific ambient
temperatures.
• The size is sufficient to keep the voltage drop in the phase and neutral
conductor to the farthest lighting or power point under normal full load
conditions to the final circuit limit specified in the BS 7671 (IEE Wiring
Regulations). No diversity is to be applied in any calculations.
Cables shall run at least 150 mm clear of all plumbing and mechanical services.
The space factor for cables shall not exceed 40%.

3.5.5 Socket Outlets and Plugs

3.5.5.1 General
The Contractor shall supply and install and test all power outlets, containment
systems, trunking and accessories to form a complete power installation. These
outlets shall be:
• 400V AC, 3-phase, neutral and earth IEC 60309 socket outlet for oil-filled
transformer bay areas rated to suit the connection of the mobile oil
purification plant.
• 63 A, 400V AC, 3-phase, neutral and earth IEC 60309 socket outlets in Store
for connection to portable welding equipment.
• 13 A, 230 V AC, single-phase, neutral and earth socket outlets in Control
rooms, Communication room, Battery room, Store, Guard Room etc.
• 16 A, 110 V AC, 2-pole and earth IEC 60309 socket outlets in Control
rooms, Communication room, etc.
• 32 A, 400V AC, 3 - Phase, neutral and earth IEC 60309 socket outlets in
Control room etc.
All socket outlets shall be supplied complete with plugs. Installation and/or samples
of all socket outlets and plugs that the Contractor proposes to use on the project shall
be submitted to the Owner for approval.

158
 3.5.5.2 Socket Outlet for Oil-Filled Transformer Bays
Oil filtration plant sockets are required and one socket shall be provided on the wall
between two transformers in the Substations. The sockets shall be suitably rated for
the oil treatment plant. The plug and socket shall be of 5 pole type (3ph + E + N) of
the metal-clad type complete with a switch-fuse unit, IP65 rated, for outdoor use and
incorporating a spring return flap cover over the plug socket. A sunshade should be
provided over the box. These should be directly fed from the 400V LV AC
switchboard. The plug and socket shall be interlocked such as that the socket cannot
be switched on until the matching plug is fully inserted, nor can the plug be
withdrawn with the switch closed.
The socket unit shall be provided with the following:
• Facility for incoming supply cable looping, and
• Provision for padlocking the switch in the off position.

3.5.5.3 Welding Socket Outlets

The Contractor shall supply and install welding socket outlets complete with plugs
in the Maintenance rooms. Socket outlets shall be 400 V, 63 A, 3 phases, neutral and
earth to IEC 60309. They shall incorporate an on-load disconnector, MCB rated to
suit the switch and a residual current circuit device rated at 30 mA. The socket
outlets shall be metal-clad to IP 65 in IEC, weatherproof and incorporate spring-
return flap cover. The plug and socket shall be interlocked such that the unit cannot
be switched on until the matching plug is fully inserted, nor can the plug be
withdrawn with the switch closed. Each socket unit shall be provided with the
following:
• Facility for incoming supply cable looping, and
• Provision for padlocking the switch in the off position.

3.5.5.4 - 13 A and 20 A Socket Outlets

13 A socket outlets shall comply with BS 1363, for use with three-pin fused 13Amp
plugs on a 230 V AC supply. 16 A sockets, 110 V AC. and 32 A 400 V AC, 3 phase,
neutral and earth sockets shall comply with IEC 60309. 13 A, 230Vsocket outlets shall
be provided in all areas, 16 A , 110 V socket outlet shall be provided for power tool
use in all areas, 32 A three phase sockets shall be provided in Control rooms,
Switchgear rooms and Transformer bays.
All socket outlets shall be fed via Residual Current Circuit Devices (RCCD).
They shall have a tripping sensitivity of 30 mA and a maximum operating time of 30
ms, according to relevant British Standard. Socket outlets shall be of a flush fitting
pattern where the wiring installation is concealed. In general the wiring installation
for socket outlets and lighting shall be kept separate except where run in common
trunking. 2-gang socket outlets shall be installed in a density of one per 10 m2 and a
minimum of 2 per room, excluding bathrooms and toilets. Fascia plates shall be of an
insulated type colored white and a plug shall be provided for each socket outlet and
in the case of fused plugs a fuse shall be provided.

159
3.5.6 Lighting

3.5.6.1 General
A complete lighting installation shall be provided in all areas of the MV switchgear
and auxiliary building and Guard house. Lighting shall be designed to provide
visual performance, safety and economical usage of power. Visual performance shall
be free of excessive stroboscopic effects and flicker from discharge type lighting.
Where visual display units are to be installed, the design shall take into account the
need for avoiding operator's fatigue.
Fluorescent luminaries shall be used for general lighting and High-pressure sodium
luminaries shall be used for area floodlighting. Low-pressure sodium luminaries
shall be used for road lighting and security lighting.
The Contractor shall establish the parameters for the lighting design and ensure that
the latest definition of maintenance factor is applied in the calculations. This
includes for taking into account all losses associated with the luminaries including
lamp lumen maintenance, anticipative switching and lighting operation. The
Contractor shall assume that the luminaries will be cleaned once a year.
The design adopted shall ensure satisfactory operation over the life of the
Substation.
The lighting design shall take full account of the drop-off in performance of lamps
and luminaries over their expected working life and shall indicate required
maintenance to maintain these minimum lighting levels.

3.5.6.2 Luminaries
Illustrations and/or samples of all luminaries that the Contractor proposes to
purchase shall be submitted to the Owner for approval before issuing any orders or
suborders. Luminaries for interior and exterior use shall be manufactured and tested
in accordance with IEC 60598 or equivalent and together with all components shall
be suitable for service and operation in the environmental conditions stated. Each
laminar shall be complete with lamp holders, control gear, internal wiring, fused
terminal block, earth terminal and reflectors or diffusers as specified. The design of
each fitting shall be such as to minimize the effect of glare, and such that the ingress
of dust, flies and insects is prevented.
Preference shall be given to fittings with low maintenance and high efficiency.
Fluorescent luminaries shall be of the high efficiency electronic start, having
hermetically sealed ballasts of the low noise level pattern. The power factor of the
luminaries control gear shall not be less than 0.9. Internal connections shall comprise
stranded conductors not less than 0.75 mm2 covered with heat resistant insulation to
IEC 60245-3 or equivalent. All internal wiring shall be adequately secured inside the
luminaries casing with an approved form of cleat. The final finish of fittings for
interior use shall have a vitreous enamel, natural aluminum or galvanized finish
according to the manufacturer's standard product.
Lamp holders as applicable shall be suitable for the lamps specified.
Luminaries shall be of the type specified. The type references used shall be repeated
in the Technical Schedules. The lighting installations shall be designed to give the
standards service illuminations specified in this specification. The number of
different types of luminaries shall be rationalized by the Contractor to keep the
number of types of luminaries on the project to a minimum.

160
 3.5.6.3 Lamps
The Contract includes the supply and erection of all lamps and tubes necessary to
complete the installation, together with one complete spare set for the first change,
plus an additional 10% to allow for early failures. This shall include all normal and
emergency lamps. Fluorescent lamps shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 60081 and shall have natural color rendering for internal use
and daylight color rendering for external use.
Tungsten lamps shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC60064 and
shall have Edison screw caps. Discharge lamps shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 60188 or equivalent.
Mercury vapor lamps shall be of the fluorescent type having a 10% red ratio
correction fluorescent coating. High Pressure Sodium (HPS) lamps shall have a hot
re-strike time not exceeding 1 minute. Low Pressure Sodium (LPS) lamps shall have
a hot re-strike time not exceeding 1 minute. All lamps used in this project shall be of
types and sizes that can be readily obtained in Iraq. The Contractor shall indicate
suppliers in the O&M manuals.

3.5.6.4 External Lighting Columns for Roadway, Boundary Wall and

General Floodlighting
Lighting Columns shall be of hot-dip galvanized steel of octagonal shape, and shall
be approved by the Owner. Columns for roadway and boundary wall lighting shall
support the lanterns at a normal 10 m above ground level and columns for
floodlighting may exceed 10 m. Each column shall be equipped with a weatherproof
base section of sufficient size to house an inspection trap, lockable door, fused cut-
out, cable entry and terminations for both the incoming and secondary cables
feeding the light source. Facility shall be included for cable looping. All luminaries
for external lighting shall be suitable for outdoor duty and shall be adequately
earthed and all earth terminations and fittings, fixing brackets and supports shall be
included. The Contractor shall ensure that each column is provided with
foundations suitable for the ground conditions existing at the site.
The Substation site boundary wall shall be provided with a lighting system that shall
be mounted 1 m above ground level at the wall line and shall be placed 1 m inside
the perimeter wall boundary. The distance between lights shall provide the
illumination levels specified. Low-pressure sodium discharge lamps shall be used
having the following characteristics:
• The lamp shall be tubular horizontal burning, clear quartz.
• Lamps, ballast and control gear shall be suitable for operation with a
power supply 230 V, 50 Hz, single-phase.
• The lamps shall have a minimum lighting design output of 20,000lumens.
All exterior lighting shall be designed so that it shall be automatically switched by
photo-sensitive switches (photocells) and the Contractor shall arrange that there is a
time delay between the various groups of circuits being energized to even out the
switching peaks. Manual override facilities shall also be provided so that each circuit
can be controlled individually. All external doors of building including switch
rooms and stores shall have external luminaries installed adjacent to the doors to
provide illumination immediately outside entrances. This is in addition to the
requirements for any roadway or other external lighting.

161
 3.5.6.5 Emergency Lighting
An emergency lighting system shall be provided to allow for the safe movement of
personnel at all times in the event of a failure of the normal lighting system.
Emergency lighting shall also be provided at the entrances of the 33/11kV
switchgear rooms and in the transformer areas. The emergency lighting system shall
comply with BS 5266. The emergency operational lighting shall operate from a
separate distribution board supplied from the 110V DC main switchyard. A method
of testing emergency lighting shall be provided if it is not part of a maintained
system which is directly connected to the distribution boards Escape routes, egress
lighting and associated signs shall be clearly marked and lit to facilitate emergency
escape in safety. The luminaries shall be self-contained battery pack units. At least
one emergency light must be visible from every point in every room. "Fire Exit"
signs to be provided throughout the buildings, at appropriate places in the MV
switchgear and auxiliary building and Guard house. These shall be self-contained
battery backed units with a three (3) hours minimum emergency duration.
The design procedure in BS 5266 shall be followed to provide the escape
lighting/signage as detailed in IEC 1838. All self-contained emergency luminaries
shall have a minimum guaranteed life of 5 years. The contract shall allow for one
complete set of replacement batteries to allow for the first change. The battery packs
may be mounted remote if the temperatures within the luminaries will not allow the
Contractor to guarantee the minimum life required.

3.5.6.6 Photocells
Photocells shall be mounted within a waterproof and dustproof enclosure toIP65
which shall be fully corrosion resistant. Means shall be provided for onsite
adjustment of the ambient light threshold levels at which the photocell actuates the
lighting systems.

3.5.6.7 Lighting Switches

Switches for use in AC circuits shall be rated for 16 or 20 A and shall be single pole
type provided with an earth terminal. Switches for use in areas designated for
surface installation shall be quick-make quick-break fixed grid industrial types
mounted in galvanized malleable iron boxes with protected dolly and these shall be
arranged where for multi-gang switching in a room if more than one switch is
required in a room. Switches for use in areas designated for flush installation shall
be micro-break types fixed to white plastic cover plates and mounted in galvanized
steel flush type boxes.
Lighting switches which are used in external locations shall be of the surface
mounting 13 A rotary quick-make quick-break pattern mounted in a cast iron
galvanized weather proof box to IP65.
The terminals for all switches shall be adequate to accommodate 2 conductors, each
with a CSA of 2.5 mm2. Lighting circuits shall be designated such that no individual
light switch has to operate with more than 50% of its nominal rating. Toilets and
shower rooms shall have light switches located outside of the entrance doors.
Light switches shall be installed such that the operating dolly shall be pushed up for
OFF and down for ON. Similarly, rocker-operated switches shall be installed such
that the upper portion of the rocker is pushed for OFF and the lower portion for ON.
162
 3.5.6.8 Service Illumination Levels
The following levels of minimum luminance shall be provided;
• 33/11kV switchgear room 400 lux
• Control room 400 lux
• Communication room 400 lux
• Corridor 100 lux
• Guard room 200 lux
• Battery room 200 lux
• Weaponry room 200 lux
• Store 150 lux
• Entrance and Hall 200 lux
• Toilet/shower rooms 150 lux
On local measuring, control tends and instrument panels a 200 lux shall to be
provided.
Illumination shall be of uniform intensity free from glare.
Illumination level generally shall be measured in a horizontal plane 1 (one) above
the floor level. Illumination levels at control in instrument panel shall be measured
in a vertical plane at the panel position.

3.5.6.9 Emergency Lighting

The emergency lighting system shall be designed as emergency escape rout lighting
and shall cover all of the defined escape routes, and operation areas, with average
luminance as follows:
• 33/11kV Switchgear room 50 lux
• Control room 50 lux
• Communication room 50 lux
• Battery room 50 lux
• Guard room 50 lux
• Transformer area 50 lux
• Entrances to switchgear rooms 50 lux
• Exits 50 lux

At least one emergency light must be visible from every point in every room
(emergency portable lighting should fixed and added for all rooms).

3.5.6.10 External Lighting

The following minimum external horizontal illumination levels are to be provided in
external locations:
• Access roads 20 lux
• Service roads 20 lux
• External lighting 20 lux
• Outdoor equipment locations 20 lux
• Boundary wall 50 lux
• Transformer areas 50 lux
• A/C plant areas 50 lux
• Main entrance 100 lux

163
3.6 Earthing and Bonding
The Earthing provided for the Building Service shall be coordinated with the
Substation equipment earthing requirements. All equipment shall be effectively
bonded to ensure electrical continuity throughout the system. A separate earth
continuity conductor shall be included with all wiring in conduits or trunking. No
reliance shall be placed on metal-to-metal joints in conduits, trunking or trays for
earth continuity. The earth continuity conductors shall be, as far as possible, in one
continuous length to the conductor connecting all metal cases housing electrical
equipment. The branches shall be connected to the main conductor by permanently
soldered-on mechanically clamped joints.

3.7 Lightning protection

The Substation buildings shall be protected within the overall substation lightning
and earthing system as specified for the substation equipment. All buildings shall be
protected in accordance with the requirements of BS 6651 or IEC 60124 generally to
comprise a copper tape grid at roof level with copper down conductors at all corners
and at 20 m spacing for longer walls. The down droppers from the building shall be
earthed individually to separate earth rods.

3.8 Fire Detection and Alarm System

3.8.1 General
This clause deals with the technical requirements for Fire Detection and Alarm
System to be used for the MV switchgear and auxiliary building and Guard house
that shall be designed to comply with the requirements of the British Standard5839
Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings. This Fire Detection and Alarm
System shall comprise of fire detectors to be installed in station rooms, control and
indicating equipment as well as a linear heat detection systems to be designed and
installed in all concrete cable trenches, cable basements and tunnels in the Substation
buildings to provide early detection of any possible fire which might occur to the
cabling system.
The detection and alarm system should be supplied by either 110 V DC (used to
Supply protection and Controls), which are available in the Substation.

3.8.2 Scope of Supply and Services

The Substation shall be split into protected areas that shall be divided into zones.
The number of zones and number of devices shall be determined by the Contractor
in accordance with the applicable standards and regulations, as well as
manufacturer's recommendations. The works shall include the supply of spare parts
and the following items: 5% or a minimum of two, of each type of automatic fire
detectors, fire alarm devices, response indicators, heat detection system accessories
(including line type cable which shall be the maximum length required for the
longest zone) and 10 frangible elements for Manual Pull Stations.
In addition to the above specified spare parts the Contractor shall recommend and
include in his offer the spare parts which considered necessary for two years safe
and normal operation of the Fire Detection and Alarm System. The Contractor shall
recommend and include in the offer special equipment, tools and test and calibration
instruments for the line type heat detection cable that is considered as necessary for
the proper maintenance of the Fire Detection and Alarm System Equipment. To
enable satisfactory maintenance of the equipment by the Owner staff, the Contractor

164
shall provide complete sets of as-built wiring diagrams showing all interconnections,
alarms, contacts for air-conditioning system shutdown, wiring diagram of each
device used in the system, plan drawings, etc., together with operational and
maintenance instructions.

All catalogues and literature shall be provided in original form of the manuals with
the final submission of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals, which provide:
• General description
• Feature of each device
• Principle of operation and design selection criteria
• Fire risk classification and assessment
• Full specification and physical details
• Engineering drawings
• Battery sizing calculations.

3.8.3 Equipment Requirements

System Operation
The fire alarm and detection system shall comply with the requirements of British
Standard 5839 and European Standard for fire alarm system EN 54 in all respects.
The fire alarm system devices shall be wired to the fire alarm control panel located
inside the Control room of MV switchgear and auxiliary building. Wiring for the fire
alarm system shall be in accordance with the British Standards, and wiring shall be
surface mounted.
All devices and cables that belong to the Fire Alarm System and Line Type (linear)
Heat detection system shall be properly labeled. All cable terminations and cores
shall be provided with ferrules as detailed on the Contractors approved wiring
diagrams. System to be zoned, non-coded, open circuit, supervised, electronically
monitored type, with facilities for selective zone alarm initiation from key positions
for evacuation purposes where specifically indicated hereinafter. The control panel is
divided into a number of zones. The number of zones required shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Connection to the control panel with the fire alarm
devices, including cabling, relay, etc., shall be provided by the Contractor.
The actuation of any manual or automatic alarm initiating device is to light its
respective zone lamp on the control panel. The general audible alarm shall be
enunciated immediately upon initiation of a fire alarm signal, the system controls
shall cause the alarm sounders to pulse 1.0 second 'ON' and 1.0 second 'OFF'.
A 'SILENCE ALARM' blue colored push button shall be incorporated in the control
panel which shall silence the alarm. A 'RESET' green colored push button shall be
incorporated in the control panel which shall restore the system to normal on-alarm
mode. The fire alarm system devices shall be wired to the fire alarm control panel
located in the Substation.
All rooms and areas throughout the Substation shall have a system installed which
shall contain a sufficient number of detectors and manual alarm call points.
In the case of fire, the fire control panel that monitors all automatic fire detectors
shall generate commands to:
• Shut-off ventilation and air conditioning systems, and
• Activate alarm bells or siren on the Substation site

165
3.8.4 Control Panel Provisions
The Control and indicating equipment panel shall be of the flush mounting pattern
with the alarm and fault indication by illuminated numbered panels, cross-
referenced to adjacent mimic diagram in English lettering. Panel facilities to
comprise from:
• Power on lamp.
• Battery fault lamp.
• Earth fault lamp.
• System fault lamp.
• Reset alarm push button.
• Silence alarm push button.
• Test key switch and supervisory lamp. This test shall permit testing of zone
detectors and break-glass stations without activating plant alarm relays.
• Lamp test bush button.
The required number of zone alarm and fault lamp displays for the panel shall be a
minimum number of zones as determined by the Contractor. Provide facilities for
individual simulation of alarm and fault conditions, located inside the control panel
enclosures. Provide output terminals for each ring wired zone sounder circuit and a
supervisory trouble sounder within the control, enclosure. Provide monitored
output terminal and the necessary control modules for repeating of all zone alarm
and fault conditions to the control engineers at the DCC.
Zone legend and schematic diagram/general layout of fire alarm and detection
system, as well as the Line Type Heat Detection System should be provided and
installed near the respective Control Panel. All outside cable trenches (troughs)
installed with the Line Type Heat Detection System shall be marked in red, zone
wise for proper identification.
A separate control panel, located next to the Main Fire Alarm Control Panel, shall be
provided for the Line Type Heat Detection System provided for high voltage and
low voltage cables in cable trenches. This shall connect into the main building fire
alarm control panel on a zone-by-zone basis. Fault and fire indication signals shall be
sent from the line type heat detection panel to the main fire alarm panel.
A "Fire Action" signboard should be provided on the wall in the Switch room.

3.8.5 Alarm Signals to Control Centre

Provision shall be made for remote transmission of fire alarm and fault signals from
control and indicating equipment panel to the DCC.

3.8.6 Automatic Detectors

Automatic detectors (optical and heat type) shall be suitable for a ceiling mounting
box fitted with terminals and contacts. The mounting box shall be fixed in position
and fully wired before the detector head is plugged in and locked into position. All
detectors shall operate on the open circuit monitored circuit principle. Detectors
should not be sited within 2 m of the suitable ventilation supply or extract grilles
and should be located away from the direction of airflow.
All detectors shall have encapsulated electronic circuitry. The body of each detector
shall have a visible red light emitting diode in the side which shall illuminate when
the head is in an alarm state. The detectors shall require no replacements after
initiating an alarm to restore it to its original quiescent condition, when the alarm

166
condition has been reset. All detectors shall be suitable for reliable operation within
the environmental temperature and humidity ranges given in this Specification.
Duct mounted smoke detectors shall be provided as required for the heating
ventilation and air conditioning systems and provide alarm/fault indication on the
main panel.
Thermal rate of rise type detectors shall meet the following requirements.
These shall be electronic combined rate of rise and fixed temperature type detectors
complying with EN 54.
The detectors shall have an electronic temperature responsive element of heat
detection and shall be suitable for operating continuously in up to 95% R.H. The rate
of rise sensing circuitry shall be calibrated to respond to an increase in ambient
temperature of 3 °C per minute.
All cables trenches within the MV switchgear and auxiliary building shall be protected
by line type heat sensing cables. These cables should be resistant to rodent attack and
installed over the cables throughout the areas. If rodent resistant cables are not
provided, protection against attack should be provided by mechanical means.

3.8.7 Manual Call Points

All manual call point units shall be of open circuit monitored type, and shall be
generally flush red enamel surface pattern. Breaking the glass shall operate the
contacts and raise an alarm.
All call points shall be complete with a glazed, hinged front covering fascia labeled
"FIRE BREAK GLASS" in English and Arabic. The glass element shall incorporate a
translucent plastic coating to eliminate loose fragments of glass when broken. It shall
be possible to break the glass element of station without the use of a hammer. The
frangible glass elements shall be easily replaced and spares provided for 10 call points.
Call points installed indoors shall incorporate a key test facility and outdoor units
shall be weather proof and provided as complete set with hammer. These shall be
protected from exposure to direct sunlight.

3.8.8 Alarm Bells and Sounders

Notification of a fire shall be by either alarm bells or electronic sounders suitable for
110 or 48 V DC operation; these shall have a minimum sound output of 85dBA at 3
m from the device. The notification device shall have a unique sound that is different
from any other used on the project. If a similar sound is used in the site an electronic
two tones sounder shall be used.
Bell mechanisms shall be contactless, totally enclosed type, polarized and
suppressed, so that operation does not interfere with radio or television. There shall be
automatic compensation for plunger wear.
Bell domes shall be finished red stove enamel, and labeled "FIRE ALARM" in
English and Arabic. Bells when located outdoors shall be weatherproof type suitable
for mounting to surface conduit box. Elsewhere bells shall be suitable for internal
application and mounting to a flush conduit box. For the Line Type Heat Detection
System, a separate sounder shall be installed just above the Heat detector cable
Sensing Control Panel.

167
3.9 Fire Fighting System
3.9.1 General
Portable and mobile fire-fighting apparatus as specified shall be for the suppression
of major and minor fires in the MV switchgear and auxiliary building and outside in
the Transformer Yard. Equipment shall also be provided for the Guard house. The
portable apparatus shall be suitable for use by only one person and shall be able to
be readily recharged on site. These shall be installed on walls around the project
with a maximum spacing of 15 m. The fire extinguisher shall be suitable for use on
oil or electrical fires and shall not include toxic gases or corrosive fluids. Toxic gases
shall not be emitted by the discharge when heated.
Suitable recharges shall be supplied for the foam extinguishers and replacement
cylinders for the portable CO2 extinguisher. For portable and mobile equipment a
suitable weighing machine shall be supplied. The large extinguishers shall be
provided with wheeled trolleys. Sun shade structures shall be provided for outdoor
wheel mounted fire extinguishers. The hand held extinguishers shall be complete with
wall brackets and fittings to be positioned to the Owner's approval.
Full details of the proposed equipment shall be included in the Tender.

3.9.2 Scope of Supply and Services

Within buildings, portable fire extinguishers should be provided and located in an
adequate number of locations such that personnel movement is not affected. In
addition they shall be installed at easily visible and accessible places. In addition to the
portable extinguishers within all buildings, mobile extinguishers shall be provided
and installed for outside yards. The location, choice and number of fire extinguishing
equipment shall be arranged so such that it is possible for operatives to undertake
an effective extinguishing attacks to any given point in all rooms or areas that
contain high technology or otherwise valuable apparatus or equipment.
Basically all areas where cabinets or cubicles for switchgear, measurement and
control devices for automatic systems and protective gear are installed, shall be
provided with portable gas extinguishers and these shall be sized to cover all of the
cabinets in that room. Outbreak of fire will be indicated by means of the fire alarm
system specified elsewhere under the contract. The layout of the switchgear
installations, and the cabinets and housings for measurement and control devices for
automatic systems and protective gear, for the computer and other control
equipment can be seen in the relevant layout and construction drawings.

3.9.3 Equipment Requirements

The firefighting equipment shall consist of portable and mobile fire extinguishers as
follows:
• In technical rooms of the MV switchgear and auxiliary building, wall
mounted, hand-operated CO2-gas extinguishers shall be permanently
installed and spaced adequately all round.
• These fire extinguishers shall be appropriate to their purpose for the
"protection of electrical apparatus". To suit their purpose these hand
operated gas fire extinguishers shall be graded under fire class E (live electrical
apparatus and installations) without restriction, in accordance with DIN 14406
or equivalent.
• The hand operated CO2 fire extinguishers shall be filled with a minimum
of5 kg capacity, and shall be equipped with the necessary extension hose and
168
 fire -quenching nozzles. They must be fitted with spring-loaded,
interchangeable safety valves, in accordance with the acknowledged
international standards.
• In other non-technical rooms of the MV switchgear and auxiliary building
as well as in the Guard house portable dry-powder extinguishers with 6 kg
content of extinguishing powder shall be installed. Dry-powder
extinguishers should be stored pressure type with ABC powder and a gauge
fitted.
• In addition to the above mentioned portable equipment the following
mobile equipment mounted on handcart with solid rubber tires shall be
installed outside in the transformer yard at a shelter specially foreseen for
this purpose.
• Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with requirements of IEC 3-1, IEC
3-2 and IEC 3-6 and be sized to match the anticipative fire risk. Wall-
mounted extinguishers shall be mounted on secure brackets in such a
manner that base of the appliance is approximately 760 mm from the floor.
• "Know your fire extinguishers" color code sign (in English and Arabic)
should be provided near the fire extinguishers.
• The operational instructions of all extinguishers to be both in Arabic and
English.
• Technical specifications and features along with a sample of all firefighting
equipment should be submitted to the Owner for approval and may be
approval from local Fire Brigade authorities shall be obtained for all
firefighting equipment.
• One mobile foam extinguisher, 20 Lit. Capacity CO2 cartridge type.

3.10 Building Arrangements

All ductwork and cabling penetrations shall be positively sealed to moisture, dust,
vermin etc., and to suit local weather conditions. Weather drainage shall be
externally piped to the perimeter of the ground level in order to prevent the ingress
of condensation into the building.

3.11 Plumbing Services

3.11.1 General
The Contractor shall include for the design, supply and installation of the internal
plumbing work associated with the Substation permitted by the Owner. The hot and
cold water installations shall be constructed to ensure that the water delivered is not
liable to become contaminated, is not hazardous to health, and is fit for its intended
use. The relevant provisions of BS 6700 shall be used for the specification for design,
installation, testing and maintenance of services supplying water for domestic use
within buildings.
The work comprises the hot and cold water supplies, including electric water heater,
hot and cold supplies to the bathroom, battery room, toilet and Guardhouse, and
drainage from all sinks, wash hand basins, toilets, eye-wash fountain and all work
associated with the cold water supplies to and from the storage tanks. The water
supplies to the Substation shall preferably be by a connection to the Water
Authority's mains or to the Substation water tank (6pc x 1m3), which should be
provided 2 placed in ground level and the other 4 placed on top (i.e. on the roof) of
the MV switchgear and auxiliary building.
169
3.11.2 Pipe Materials
(a) Copper pipe works shall comply with the relevant provisions of
international standards
(b) Polyethylene pipe works shall comply with the relevant provisions of international
standards
(c) Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes shall comply with the
international standards
All piping and fittings shall be cleaned internally and be free from particles of sand,
dirt, grease, and metal filings. All jointing works shall be in accordance with the
requirements of related British Standards and the manufacturers‟ instructions.
Pipe works above ground shall only be used where strictly necessary, and shall be
insulated and protected with galvanized steel or aluminum; and all materials,
fittings and fixtures should be approved by the Owner prior to work commencing.

3.11.3 Pipe Installations

To reduce the risk of air locks forming, pipes within buildings shall be laid to a
gentle fall (i.e. acceptable gradual slop). The Contractor shall be responsible for
measures to control the thermal movement of piping and apparatus. Where possible,
the provision for movement shall be obtained by providing changes indirection,
special expansion joints or loops in the pipe runs, supplemented by the necessary
guides, anchors and limit stops.
Pipes entering buildings shall be installed through sleeves solidly built in, and the
annular space between the sleeve and pipe shall be filled with non-cracking, on
hardening, water resistant, and vermin proof material.

3.11.4 Plumbing Fixtures

Unless otherwise noted, all plumbing fixtures shall be white glazed stone-ware
(vitreous china) without cracks or blemished, and be complete installations. They shall
be connected to hot and cold water, drain and vent as required. Water closets and
urinals shall be flushable.

(a) Iraqi type water closets shall be elongated bowl type, flush mounted with
the floor and complete with integral trap.
(b) European type water closets shall be floor-mounted with integral trap,
complete with close coupled or elevated flush tank.
(c) Urinals shall be wall hung.
(d) Sinks in battery rooms to be 14.5% silicon content acid resistant cast iron.
(e) Shower fittings shall consist of a combination hot and cold water fitting
and an adjustable spray pattern shower head with volume control.

3.11.5 Disinfection
Before being placed in service, the hot and cold water distribution network shall be
thoroughly flushed and chlorinated by the application of an approved chlorinating
agent. The chlorinating solution shall have a chlorine dosage of 50mg/litter and
shall be injected into the system at one end through a cock or trapped connection.
All valves and accessories on the system shall be operated to ensure treatment of the
entire system. The solution shall be retained in the system for a period of at least 24

170
 hours. At the end of this period the water shall be flushed from the line at its
extremities, and tested using a Comparator, until the water at these points is of the
same quality as the source of supply.

3.12 Telephone Installation

The Contractor shall design, supply and install the necessary infrastructure
(Oviduct, draw pits or manholes) and block wiring for the connection of one
telephone in the MV switchgear and auxiliary building and Guard house. Design
and works shall be done fully in accordance with Telecommunication system
required for the New Buildings. In case of the Rehabilitation of the Substation, the
Contractor shall clear the part to be improved, and shall agree with the Owner.

3.13 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning

3.13.1 Technical Requirements and Design of Heating Ventilation and Air
Conditioning
The design parameters and necessary requirements to meet the design intent must
be read in conjunction with other appropriate sections. The services to be allowed for
in the design and construction of the substations are
• Heating, ventilation and air conditioning,
• Associated electrical distribution, including cabling.
Heating and air conditioning shall be provided within all areas, as necessary, and shall
be achieved using wall or floor mounted split package units. Units should consist of
not more than two standard sizes.
The Contractor shall develop fully detailed site working drawings to the approval of
the Owner in accordance with the prescribed standards. Detailed calculations and
layouts shall be submitted on time for approval before any order, place mentor site
work is undertaken. For tender purposes the Contractor must identify the capacity,
manufacture/make, model, construction standard and type of any equipment or
subcomponent being offered together with the selection procedure.
Capacity and model numbers shall be subject to the approval of design calculations,
by the Owner whose decision will be final in this respect. Any exclusions to the
complete and satisfactory performance of the design and installations must be
clearly delineated within the offer; otherwise it will be assumed that everything
necessary has been included at the Contractor's cost.

3.13.2 Design Standards for Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

The design of the electrical building services elements shall be in accordance with BS
7671 (the sixteenth edition) of the Institution of Electrical Engineers Wiring
Regulations including latest amendments. Individual items of equipment shall be in
accordance with the relevant IEC or British Standard.
The design of mechanical services‟ elements shall be in accordance with the
following standards provided that necessary corrections and provisions are made to
suit Iraq climate and design conditions, power supply system and other required
codes:
(a) ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
Conditioning Engineers (USA).
(b) CIBSE : Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers
(UK).

171
 (c) ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers (USA).
(d) ARI : Air Conditioning Refrigeration Institute (USA).
(e) ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials (USA).
(f) AWS : American Welding Society (USA).
(g) UL : Underwriter Laboratories (USA).
(h) HVCA : Heating and Ventilation Contractor's Association (UK).

(i) Other International Standards may be considered provided they meet with
the above standards as a minimum.

The Contractor must clearly state in his proposal which standards or codes shall be
applied. Materials or workmanship that is not in accordance with the standards
mentioned above may be accepted at the discretion of the Owner. A copy in the
English language of any such alternative standard proposed by the Contractor shall be
submitted to the Owner for approval. The Contractor shall include for the HVAC
design and calculations, including associated electrical design, to be carried out by a
specialized consultant approved by the Owner.
In preparing the design for the purpose of tendering, the Contractor shall calculate
and advise the following for each building in relation to the HVAC systems:
• Cooling loads
• Heating loads
• Ventilation (air change) rates
• Air handling plant and equipment capacities
The Contractor shall review the entire HVAC design prior to commencement of
construction and provide all calculations to show compliance with the Specification.
During engineering stage the Contractor shall submit all calculations and working
drawings of each system that shall be subject to review and approval by the Owner.

3.13.3 Scope of Works

The supply and service to be performed by the Contractor shall comprise the design,
manufacture, shop testing, packing, transport, insurance unloading, storage on site,
construction works and erection, corrosion protection, site testing, submission of
documentation, commissioning, training the Owner's personnel and warranty of the
works.
The Contractor is bound to provide complete works, even if the equipment or
services to be provided are not specifically mentioned in the specification.

3.13.4 HVAC Design Conditions

3.13.4.1 External (Outside) Design Conditions:

Refer to the clause 2.1.1.4 Service Conditions, Volume III Technical Specification for
external design condition of HVAC.

172
 3.13.4.2 Indoor Design Conditions

Room Temperature (Dry Bulb) & %RH Noise Level (dpA)

Summer Winter
MV switchgear and aux. 25 °C (±2 °C) Cooling not 45
building Control room 50% R.H. controlled
Communication room (See Note 1) (<30 °C)
33/11 kV switchgear Heating to 18 °C
room d.b
(±2 °C)
Guard house 25 °C (±2 °C) 22 °C 45
Guard room 50% R.H.
Buildings common (See Note 2) (See Note 2) 45
Battery room
Store
Corridor
Hall
Weaponry
Toilets and Shower rooms

Notes:
1. As specified by contractor. R.H. not controlled and nominal value only for
calculations.
2. Indirect cooling/heating only by spill air.

173
3.13.4.3 Building
Construction
Reference shall be made to the thermal insulation regulations and requirements
in order to achieve economic design. All necessary precautions shall be taken by
the Contractor to ensure that insulation values and other factors used in
the HVAC design calculations are reflected in the building design and
construction.

3.13.5 Functional Scheme Requirements

3.13.5.1 Air conditioning
An air-conditioning system is required to serve all areas cooled to 25 °C in
summer, as indicated in the table above. The system shall comprise wall or
floor mounted, split package air-conditioning units. Extract ventilation shall be
provided from the Battery room, Weaponry, Toilets and Shower rooms.

3.13.5.2 Mechanical Ventilation

All rooms, other than Battery room, Toilets and Shower rooms shall be kept
under positive pressure to reduce dust penetration, by providing 1.0 AC/h fresh
air to air conditioned areas and 1.0 AC/h fresh air to ventilated areas.
Toilets and Shower rooms shall be kept under negative pressure by
extract ventilation (8 AC/h), with spill air from the cooled supply air system to
corridor or adjacent areas.
Battery room shall be provided with dedicated extract ventilation, and kept
under slight negative (20 Pa) pressure. Extract ventilation rate shall be
sufficient to maintain hydrogen level at below 1% under maximum charge
conditions, but be not less than 6 AC/h. Duplicate (duty/standby)
bifurcated extract fans shall be provided. Re-circulation of the air from the
Battery room will not be permitted. Supply ventilation shall be provided to the
following non-air conditioning areas to provide pressurization and reduce the
ingress of dust.
•Weapory
• Other places as required

3.13.6 External Louvers

All fresh air inlet and exhaust louvers shall be designed to prevent rain and excess
deposit entry at the operating velocities of the flesh air inlet louvers. All
construction joints shall be fully weather sealed.
Unless otherwise indicated all louvers in the external walls of the building
required
for exhaust or fresh air inlets to the systems shall be of mild construction heavily
galvanized after manufacture and finally degreased, etched, printed and
painted two coats of paint to approved color. The blades shall be formed from
not less than
1.63 mm thick sheet plate carried in a robust galvanized mild steel channel frame
suitable for fixing direct to the building structure. The bottom channel of the frame
shall be drilled at each end to receive a small bore copper weep pipe. The
maximum length of louver blade shall not exceed 1.0 meter without intermediate
bracing supports.

174
 Bird and vermin proof wire guards shall be fitted behind each louver. The louvers
shall be designed for a maximum free area and designed to pass the required air
volume with a minimum pressure drop.

Sand louvers shall be manufactured in galvanized steel enclosed within a

galvanized flanged holding frame. Louvers shall be complete with insect
screen and sand collection gravity chamber. Sand louvers shall have an
efficiency of 97%when tested particles between 150 to 450 microns. Face velocities
shall not exceed1.5 m/s. Wherever possible louver sub-frames shall be vertically
hinged to permit ease of cleaning.

3.14 Inspection and Tests

3.14.1Genal
Tests shall be carried out in order to determine whether the material and
equipment comply with the specified requirements.
All tests on the materials and equipment shall be made in accordance with IEC
standards. If some tests are not covered or a method of testing is not specified in
IEC standard, or if there are options in relevant IEC standards, the
Contractor shall submit the method by which he proposes to conduct the test to
the Owner for approval. Test certificates shall be submitted for approval to the
Owner. The Contractor shall submit a program of testing to be performed for the
Owner's approval.

3.14.2 Insulation Tests

Insulation tests shall be carried out on all cables between cores and to earth after
terminations have been made and before the cores are connected to the
equipment, and records of these kept.
Tests shall also be made on complete circuits for lighting, socket outlets,
etc., between poles and to earth and shall include associated switches, distribution
switch and fuse gear.
Continuity Tests
Earth continuity tests shall be made for each item of electrical equipment,
luminaries, switch and socket outlets to the main earthing connections for the
installation. This shall be the point where the main bonding conductor to the earth
electrode system is connected to the main earthing terminal on the
main switchboard.
Earth Loop Impedance Tests
Earth loop impedance tests shall be made for all socket outlets in the installation
and shall show the complete earth loop impedance from the socket outlet to the
sub- distribution board.
Earth Electrode Tests
The resistance of all earth electrodes including those provided for main
earthinganti- static protection and lightning protection shall be measured,
recorded and test certificates submitted.
Phase Rotation Tests
The phase rotation at each three-phase socket outlet shall be checked and verified
to be Standard anti-clockwise phase rotation and sequence R-Y-B.

175
3.14.3 Special Equipment and Tools
Works to be done under this section include the delivery of special equipment
and tools of Erection, Installation, Maintenance, setting to work and other
purposes.

3.14.5 Packaging, Shipping and Transport

Packing, shipping and transport shall be arranged by the Contractor.

3.14.6 Documentation
The Contractor shall provide all necessary drawings, design specifications,
design details, operation and maintenance manuals and other required
information.

3.14.6.1 Documentation with Tender

The Tender shall contain at least the following information and
documents: (a) General layout drawings of the Building Services
equipment
(b) Single line diagrams for normal lighting, emergency lighting and
socket outlet distribution boards
(c) General arrangement, construction and overall dimension drawings of
the
Building Services equipment
(d) Description of equipment and services offered
(e) Manufacturing specifications of the Building Services equipment
(f) Catalogues, literature and reference lists of the Building
Services equipment
(g) Quality Management System Manual and ISO Certificate of
the equipment manufacturer

3.14.6.2 Documentation after Award of Contract

All documents required for the Owner's approval shall be submitted by the
Contractor. In addition, the Operating and Maintenance manuals shall be
produced in sufficient details to enable inexperienced operatives to maintain and
adjust the plant and systems.
They shall be written in a clear concise technical
style.
Operating and maintenance manuals shall contain the
following:
(a) A description of the building to which services are applied stating
their duty and functions.
(b) A listing and description of the services as installed.
(c) Functional diagrams and wiring diagrams for the main and subsystems.
(d) Details of the manufacturer's installation, operating and
maintenance requirements that must be edited or otherwise reproduced
to be specific for the installation.
(e) A detailed list of equipment supplied, manufacturer, address,
telephone number and official order number/date.
(f) A schedule detailing the regular maintenance requirements with
space for remarks and service history.
(g) A fault tree analysis of the system(s).
176
 (h) A copy of the' As fitted' record drawings.
(i) Copies of all test and commissioning data including pre-
commissioning check lists including those required by BS 7671.
(j) A schedule giving the finally adjusted set points for plant,
equipment and controls.
(k) A detailed listing of all spare parts giving part number
and description, typical cost and availability.
(l) Any item deemed necessary by the Owner to clearly identify to
the use/operator the function and intended performance of the
plant and systems.

3.15 Security surveillance System:

The substation should be supplied and installed with security monitoring
system to be controlled locally and remotely from the dispatch center.

177
 Appendices
Appendix-A: Schedule of Materials for 2x31.5MVA Substation

a) The 33 kV incoming feeder switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

33 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA/ 1 sec,
1. Disconnecting Switch 1 set
On-load type.
Position Indicator (For
2. DC110V 1 set
Disconnecting switch)
3. Earthing Switch 33 kV, ≥60 kA for fault making 1 set
Position Indicator (For
4. DC110V 1 set
Earthing switch)
Interlocking between D.S
5. 1 set
and E.S
6. Lightning arrester for line 36 kV, 10 kA 3 pcs
3 phase air insulated bus
7. 33 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA/1 sec. 1 set
bars chamber
Voltage transformer (Single
phase) with suitable fuses 33 kV/√3, 110 V/√3
8. 3 pcs
on the HT and MCCB LT class 1.0/3 P
sides
Voltmeter ( digital type )
9. 0 -36 k V scale 1 set
with selector switch
Voltage Transducer (Three
10. DC110V, 0-36kV(4-20mA)
phase)
Lamp indicators for 33kV White lamp for each phase
11. 1 set
incoming voltage ( capacitor VT+ Neon lamps)
Annunciator with lamp test
12. DC110V 1 set
and reset sw
Space heater with 100W
13. 1 set
humidistat AC 230 V with 2- pole MCB
14. Fluorescent lamp AC 230 V with door switch 1 set
15. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 33 kV circuit
whether specifically
16. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.
`

178
b) The 33 kV transformer feeder switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

CB,
1. Circuit breaker (CB) 1 set
33 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA/1 sec
2. Position Indicator (For C.B) DC110V 1 set
Provision for Interlocking
3. between 33 kV C.B and 33 Electrical type 1 set
kV D.S
Interlocking between 33 kV
4. Electrical type 1 set
C.B and 11 kV C.B
3 phase air insulated busbars
5. 33 kV, 1250 A, 25 kA/ 1sec 1 set
chamber
Current transformer for 600/5/5A, 2 pcs per
6.
metering & protection Class 1.0/5P10 phase
Current transformer for 1 pc per
7. 600/1 A, 5P20
differential protection phase
Three Ammeters (not
8. required if included in the 0 – 800 A scale 1 lot
relay set)
Multi-function over-current
(50, 51) & earth fault relay Numerical type, IDMTL
9. 1 set
(50N, 51N) with test terminal characteristic
blocks
10. C.B on-off push buttons ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
11. C.B mechanical indication ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
12. Local –Remote Switch Lockable 1 set
13. Emergency stop 1 set
TR Neutral point Earth fault
Numerical type, Adjustable
14. relay with test terminal 1 set
Definite time characteristic
blocks
Lamp indicators for 33kV TR White lamp for each phase
15. 1 set
incoming voltage ( capacitor VT + Neon lamps)
16. Aux. trip relay hand reset 1 set
17. electric reset alarm 1 set
18. Trip circuit supervion relay 1 set
Trip counting (not required
19. 1 set
if included in the relay set)
20. MW meter 0-30 MW scale (4-20mA) 1 set
21. MWh Class 1.0 1 set
22. MVAr Class 1.0 1 set
23. (IED) for SCS 1 set
Space heater with 100W
24. 1 set
humidistat AC230V with 2-Pole MCCB
For Control alarm indication &
25. 2 Pole suitable MCCB Pertinents
Motor circuit ….etc. circuits.
26. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set
27. 33 kV cables to power 33 kV, XLPE, 1 set

179
 transformer 3 x 1c x 400mm2
Connection materials for 33 Terminals, cable glands and
28. 1 set
kV cables cleats, etc.
29. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 33 kV circuit
whether specifically
30. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

c) The 11kV transformer feeder switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty
VCB,
1. Circuit breaker (CB) 1 set
11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/1 sec
2. Position Indicator (For C.B) DC110V 1 set
Provision for Interlocking
3. between 11 kV C.B and 11 1 set
kV E.S
Interlocking between 33 kV
4. Electrical type 1 set
C.B and 11 kV C.B
3 phase air insulated busbars
5. 11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/ 1sec 1 set
chamber
3 core
Current transformers for 1800/5/5/1 A, Class
6. CT’s per
metering & protection 1.0/5P10/5P20
phase
( with correction CT ) if
Current transformer for 1 pc per
7. needed to match the CT on 33
differential protection phase
kV side
Three Ammeters (not
8. required if included in the 0 – 2000 A scale (4-20mA) 1 lot
relay set)
Multi-function over-current
(50, 51) & earth fault relay Numerical type, IDMTL
9. 1 set
(50N, 51N) with test characteristic
terminal blocks
Differential protection relay
10. ( with correction CT ) for the Numerical type 1 set
transformer (87T)
3 phase unbalanced load PF
11. 1 set
meter
C.B on-off push buttons with
12. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
Indication lamps
13. C.B mechanical indication ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set

180
 Cable earthing device fully
interlocked with 11kV C.B
14. 1 set
and the relevant potential
transformers.
15. Local –Remote Switch Lockable 1 set
16. Emergency stop 1 set
Lamp indicators for 33kV TR White lamp for each phase
17. 1 set
outgoing voltage ( capacitor VT + Neon lamps)
18. Aux. trip relay hand reset 1 set
19. electric reset alarm 1 set
Trip circuit supervion relay
20. 1 set
and audible alarm
21. Trip counting (not required 1 set

if included in the relay set)

22. MW meter 0-30 MW scale (4-20mA) 1 set
Voltage transformer with
suitable fuses on the HT and
11 kV/√3, 110 V/√3, 110 V/3
23. LT sides (Single phase) for 3 pcs
class 1.0/3P
earth fault indication and
instruments, drawable type
24. Lamp Voltage indication 1 set
Voltmeter ( digital type, but
0 – 13 k V scale (4-20mA)
not required if included in
25. 6 position (phase to phase and 1 set
the relay set) with selector
phase to neutral ) and off
switch
Numerical type, Adjustable
26. Voltage earth fault relay 1 set
Definite time characteristic
Load shading under With four stages with selector
27. 1 set
frequency relay switch for each stage and off
Contacts for local remote
28. 1 set
alarm indication
Voltmeter transducer (not
29. required if included in the 1 set
relay set).
30. MWh with MDI Class 1.0 1 set

31. MVArh Class 1.0 1 set

32. VARM (VAr control Relay) 1 set

33. (IED) for SCS 1 set

Space heater with
34. AC230V, with 2-Pole MCCB 1 set
thermostat
For Control alarm indication &
35. 2 Pole suitable MCCB Pertinents
Motor circuit ….etc. circuits.

181
 36. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set
24 kV suitable copper XLPE 24 kV, XLPE,
37. 1 lot
cables to Power transformer 9 x 1c x 400mm2
Connection materials for 11
kV cables suitable copper
XLPE cable with gland Terminals, cable glands and
38. 1 lot
complete with all necessary cleats, etc.
jointing materials (as
required)
39. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
40. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

d) The 11kV Busbar sectionalizer switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

VCB,
1. Circuit breaker (CB) 1 set
11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/1 sec
Automatic Change over
2. Electrical type 1 set
Switch
3 phase air insulated busbars
3. 11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/ 3sec 1 set
chamber
2 pcs per
Current transformers for 1800/5/5A, Class 1.0/5P10
4. each
metering & protection
phase
Three Ammeters (not
5. required if included in the 0 – 2000 A scale (4-20mA) 1 lot
relay set) One ammeter
Multi-function over-current
(50, 51) & earth fault relay Numerical type, IDMTL
6. 1 set
(50N, 51N) with test characteristic
terminal blocks
C.B on-off push buttons
7. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
with Indication lamps
C.B mechanical indication
8. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
lamps
9. Control switch with lamps Local/remote (White) 1 set
Trip circuit supervion relay
10. 1 set
and audible alarm
11. DC healthy lamp 1 set
Contacts for local remote
12. 1 set
alarm indication

182
13. Alarm bell 1 set
Trip counting (not required
14. if included in the relay set). 1 set

15. (IED) for SCS 1 set

Space heater with
16. AC230V, with 2-Pole MCCB 1 set
thermostat
For Control alarm indication &
17. 2 Pole suitable MCCB Pertinents
Motor circuit ….etc. circuits.
18. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set
19. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
20. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

183
e) The 11kV Outgoing switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

VCB,
1. Circuit breaker (CB) 1 set
11 kV, 630A, 25 kA/1 sec
3 phase air insulated busbars
2. 11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/ 1sec 1 set
chamber
2 pcs per
Current transformers for
3. 300/5/5A, Class 1.0/5P10 each
metering & protection
phase
Three Ammeters (not
required if included in the
relay set)
4. 0 –300 A scale (4-20mA) 1 lot
One thermal ammeter with
Max. Demand indicator with
scale (0-300) Amp.
Over-current & earth fault
Electronic type, IDMTL
5. relay (50, 51) & (50N, 51N) 1 set
characteristic
with test terminal blocks
C.B on-off push buttons
6. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
with Indication lamps
C.B mechanical indication
7. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
lamps
Local-Remote Control
8. Local/remote (White) 1 set
switch with lamps
Metering transducers (not
9. required if included in the 1 set
relay set)
Trip circuit supervion relay
10. 1 set
and audible alarm
Trip counting (not required
11. 1 set
if included in the relay set)
Contacts for local remote
12. 1 set
alarm indication
13. (IED) for SCS 1 set
Space heater with
14. AC230V, with 2-Pole MCCB 1 set
thermostat
For Control alarm indication &
15. 2 Pole suitable MCCB Pertinents
Motor circuit ….etc. circuits.
Lamp indicators for 11kV
outgoing voltage neon White lamp for each phase
16. 1 set
potential indicators on the ( capacitor VT + Neon lamps)
cable side.
Cable earthing device fully
17. 1 set
interlocked with C.B
Load shedding selector
18. 1 set
switch
19. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set

184
20. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set
suitable copper XLPE cable
with gland complete with all
21.
necessary jointing materials
(as required)
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
22. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

185
f) The 11kV Future Capacitor Bank switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

VCB,
1. Circuit breaker (CB) 1 set
11 kV, 630A, 25 kA/1 sec
3 phase air insulated busbars
2. 11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/ 1sec 1 set
chamber
2 pcs per
Current transformers for 300/5/5A, Class 1.0/5P10
3. each
metering & protection
phase
Three Ammeters (not
required if included in the
relay set)
4. 0 –300 A scale (4-20mA) 1 lot
One thermal ammeter with
Max. Demand indicator with
scale (0-300) Amp.
Multi function over-current
(50, 51) & earth fault relay Numerical type, IDMTL
5. 1 set
(50G, 51G) with test terminal characteristic
blocks
6. Unbalanced Relay Electronic type 1 set

7. MVArh Class 1.0 1 set

C.B on-off push buttons
8. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
with Indication lamps
C.B mechanical indication
9. ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set
lamps
Local-Remote Control
10. Local/remote (White) 1 set
switch with lamps
Metering transducers (not
11. required if included in the 1 set
relay set)
Trip circuit supervion relay
12. 1 set
and audible alarm
Trip counting (not required
13. 1 set
if included in the relay set)
Contacts for local remote
14. 1 set
alarm indication
15. (IED) for SCS 1 set
Space heater with
16. AC230V, with 2-Pole MCCB 1 set
thermostat
For Control alarm indication &
17. 2 Pole suitable MCCB Pertinents
Motor circuit ….etc. circuits.
Lamp indicators for 11kV
outgoing voltage neon White lamp for each phase
18. 1 set
potential indicators on the ( capacitor VT + Neon lamps)
cable side.
Cable earthing device fully
19. 1 set
interlocked with C.B

186
 Load shedding selector
20. 1 set
switch
21. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set

22. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set

suitable copper XLPE cable
with gland complete with all
23.
necessary jointing materials
(as required)
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
24. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

g) The 11kV Aux. TR switchgear shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

Draw-out type VCB,

1. Circuit breaker (CB) 11 kV, 630A, 25 kA/1 sec 1 set

3 phase air insulated busbars

2. chamber 11 kV, 2500 A, 25 kA/ 1sec 1 set

Current transformers for 2 pcs per each

3. 30/5/5A, Class 1.0/5P10 phase
metering & protection
Three Ammeters (not
required if included in the
4. 0 –30 A scale (4-20mA) 1 lot
relay set)
Multi-function over-current
(50, 51) & earth fault relay Numerical type, IDMTL
5. (50N, 51N) with test terminal characteristic 1 set
blocks
C.B on-off push buttons
6. with Indication lamps ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set

C.B mechanical indication

7. lamps ON/OFF ( red/green ) 1 set

Local-Remote Control
8. switch with lamps Local/remote (White) 1 set

9. Aux. trip relay hand reset 1 set

10. electric reset alarm 1 set
Trip circuit supervion relay
11. and audible alarm 1 set

Trip counting (not required if

12. included in the relay set) 1 set

187
 Contacts for local remote
13. alarm indication 1 set

14. (IED) for SCS 1 set

Space heater with
15. thermostat AC230V, with 2-Pole MCCB 1 set
For Control alarm
16. 2 Pole suitable MCCB indication & Motor circuit Pertinents
11 kV suitable copper XLPE ….etc circuits.
cables to Auxiliary 11 kV, XLPE,
17. 3 x 1c x 150mm2 1 lot
transformer
Connection materials for 11 kV Terminals, cable glands
18. cables and cleats, etc. 1 lot

White lamp for each phase

Lamp indicators for 11kV
19. ( capacitor VT + Neon 1 set
outgoing voltage
lamps)
Cable earthing device fully
20. interlocked with C.B 1 set

21. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set

22. Indoor type enclosure IP 40 1 set

All necessary items to complete

the 11 kV circuit whether
23. specifically mentioned or not 1 lot
shall be deemed to be included
in the above items.

188
one cable end box with gland suitable for XLPE copper cables complete with all
necessary material

h) The NER cubicle of TR shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

1. Earthing Resister Resister plate: Anticorrosion 1 set
Rated voltage 11 kV
Rated current 300 A
Rated time 30 sec.
Resistance at 55 °C 21.1 ohm
Number of phase Single
Rated insulation level
a) Impulse withstand
75 kV Peak
voltage
b) One minute 50Hz
28 kV rms
withstand voltage
a) 7.5 kV 10kA arrestor
b) 11000/110 VT ( Outdoor
type)
Equipment to be
2. c) 11 kV, 400 A on-load 1 lot
accommodated with
disconnector
d) 300-150/5 A CT
e) O/V relay
Punched (IP33)
Painted galvanneal steel or
3. Outdoor type enclosure 1 set
Stainless steel
Cable entry: Bottom
4. (IED) for SCS 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the NER circuit
whether specifically
5. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.

189
i) DC 110V equipment (One Battery & Two Chargers and One Distribution panel )
shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

1 Charger 1 set
1 phase 2 -wire, 50 Hz, 230 V
1. AC Input
+ 10%, - 15%
DC busbar voltage : 110 V +/-
2. DC Output 10% DC busbar current : not
less than 40 A
Load voltage : Low 99 V –
3. Output voltage regulation
High 121 V
System efficiency 100%
4. Up to 94%
Load
AC phases and earth: AC 2000
5. Di-electric strength V for 1 min.
DC : ditto
-AC VM with V/S or LCD Voltage switch :
6. 1 set
Display OFF-RY-YB-BR –OFF
-DC VM with V/S or LCD Voltage switch:
7. 1 set
Display OFF-Charge-Battery-Load-OFF
8. -DC AM or LCD Display For DC output current 1 set
-Battery current AM or LCD Center zero pointer type
9. 1 set
Display (Charger or Discharge)
-Signal lamp (LED) or LCD AC Input, Manual operation,
10. 1 lot
Display trickle and boost
MAN-AUTO,
11. -Change over switch 1 set
TRICKLE-BOOST
For initial charging control
12. -Voltage adjustment knob 1 set
Auto-trip visual and audible
13. (* 1) 1 set
alarm
Alarm stop, reset and lamp
14. -Alarm reset/test button 1 set
test facility
15. (IED) for SCS 1 set

16. Fluorescent lamp AC230V,with door switch 1 set

17. Indoor type enclosure IP 41 1 set
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
18. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.
19. Battery 1 set
a)Type Nickel-Cadmium
b)Number of battery cell 92 cells

190
 c)Nominal Voltage 1.2 V/cell
d)Nominal capacity Minimum 100 AH/8 hour
e)Necessary provision
Double tier for containing cell
-Multi-tier mounting rack
groups
Fixing the cell group in the
-Fixing plates with rubber
rack for anti-vibration
-DC main conductors Connecting strip
-Signal wire For electrolyte decrease
20. DC distribution circuit 1 set
Type Self
12 feeders as detailed shown
DC outgoing feeders on the SLD of DC system
diagram
21. Standard of accessories 1 lot
- Funnel
- Syringe

- Suction type hydrometer Specific Gravity 1.10-1.30

- Rod type thermometer -20℃ to +100℃
- Jug For 1 litter
0-3 V for batter cell vo tage
- Digital tester
measurement
- Filling pump
- Spanner
- Container case
(* 1) The following items shall be provided for alarm indication as a minimum:
a) DC Undervoltage
b) DC Earth fault (positive)
c) DC Earth fault (negative)
d) Charger failure
e) Electrolyte decrease
j) AC system (11/0.416kV 250kVA TR and One LVAC Distribution Board ) shall
comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

11/0.416 kV, 250 KVA Dyn11
1. Auxiliary transformer 1 set
ONAN
3-phase, 4-wire, 400/230V,
2. LV AC Distribution Board 1 set
50Hz
400A MCCB
3. Incoming Feeder (4 pole) with adjustable solid 2 Nos.
state trip unit,
4. Interlocking device 1 set
100AF MCCB 2 Nos.

5. Outgoing feeder 50AF MCCB 8 Nos.

30AF MCCB 7 Nos.

a) 400/5/5 A CT
Equipment to be
6. b) O/C and E/F relay 1 lot
accommodated with
c) U/V relay
-AC AM with A/S or LCD
7. For AC 3 phase input current 1 set
Display
-AC VM with V/S or LCD Voltage switch :
8.
Display OFF-RY-YB-BR –OFF
9. (IED) for SCS 1 set
For detecting current in the
10. Zero-sequence CT 1 No.
neutral earthing system
Difinit time Zero-sequence
11. 1 No.
relay
All necessary items to
complete the 11 kV circuit
whether specifically
12. 1 lot
mentioned or not shall be
deemed to be included in
the above items.
k) Safety equipment shall comprise the following:

No. Item Specification for component Q’ty

Breathing masks for fire
1. 2 Nos.
fighting
2. Plastic helmets 3 Nos.
3. 20kV insulating gloves 3 set
4. Suitable insulated stool 1 set
33kV & 11kV voltage
5. indicator rod of the 1 set
telescopic type
6. Rechargeable torch light 2 Nos.
Portable carriage mounted
7. fire extinguishers suitable 3 Nos.
for electrical fires
Instructions against
In the English language.
8. electrical shocks and 4 set
Arabic
artificial breathing
Safety regulation signs for
In the English Language.
9. open circuits earth circuits, 1 set
Arabic
danger zone...etc.
l) Spare parts: (Each substation)
for each substation , the following quantities should be quoted with unit price:

No. Item Specification for Q’ty

component
1. 33kV Metal enclosed GIS Switchgear
1.1 Complete C.B 1 pc
1 set
1.2 Bushing insulators of each type
(3 phase)
1.3 Lightning arrester 36kV 10kA 1 pc
1 set
1.4 Tripping coil of C.B
(3 phase)
1.5 Auxiliary contact of C.B 1 lot

1.6 Closing coil of C.B 1 lot

1 set
1.7 Complete mechanism of C.B
(3 phase)
1.8 Complete Earth switch 1 set

1.9 Shutters 1 set

Complete Voltage transformer with
33 kV/√3, 110 V/√3 1 set
1.10 suitable fuses on the HT and LT
c ass 1.0/3 P (3 phase)
sides (Single phase)
600/5/5/1 A,
Current transformer for metering 1pc each
1.11 Class1.0 / 5P10
& protection (1 phase)
/5P20 (Differential)
1.12 Protection Relay (O/C, E/F) 1 set
Meters KWh , KVAr, A, V and W
1.13 (not required if included in the Each one 1 lot
relay set)
1.14 MCCB of each type Each one 1 lot
H.T fuses for 33KV voltage 1 set
1.15
transformer (3 phase)
Indicating lamps (LED) and Bulbs
1.16 Each one 1 lot
of all types used
1.17 Push button Each one 1 lot

1.18 Control /selector switch Each one 1 lot

Aux. relay and aux. contactor of
1.19 Each one 1 lot
each type used
White lamp for each
Lamp indicators for 33kV TR 2 set
1.20 phase ( capacitor VT +
incoming voltage (3 phase)
Neon lamps)
1.21 LV socket and plug 1 set
2. 33/11.5kV 31.5MVA Transformer
2.1 Bushing for 33kV 1 pc

2.2 Bushing for 11.5kV 1 pc

Insulation Oil (10% of Total
2.3 1 lot
volume for 31.5MVA TR)
2.4 Silicagel breather Each one 1 set
Protection Relay (Buchholz,
2.5 Each one 1 lot
Oil level and Oil temp)
Diverter switch spares such as
2.6 1 set
moving contacts
Driving gear mechanism with
2.7 1 set
driving motor for tap changer
2.8 All seals and gaskets used for each 1 lot

2.9 Position indicator of OLTC 1 set

2.10 Lightning arrester 7kV 10kA 1 pc

Complete Voltage transformer with
11/0.11kV
2.11 suitable fuses on the HT and LT 1 pc
3P
sides (Single phase)
2.12 Current transformer for protection 300-150/5A, 5P10 1 pc
3. 11kV Metal-clad Switchgear
3.1 Complete Circuit breaker (For Outgoing feeder) 1 pc
Main interrupter chambers for 1 set
3.2 (For Outgoing feeder)
vacuum C.B (3 phase)
3.3 Complete C.B (For TR feeder) 1 pc
(Each for TR & 2 set
3.4 Bushing insulators
Outgoing feeder) (3 phase)
(Each for TR & 2 set
3.5 Tripping coil of C.B
Outgoing feeder) (3 phase)
3.6 Auxiliary contact of C.B (For Outgoing feeder) 1 lot
3.7 Closing coil of C.B (For Outgoing feeder) 1 lot
(Each for TR & 2 set
3.8 Complete mechanism of C.B
Outgoing feeder) (3 phase)
3.9 Complete Earth switch (For Outgoing feeder) 1 set
3.10 Shutters (For Outgoing feeder) 1 set
Complete Voltage transformer with 11 kV/√3, 110 V/√3, 110
3.11 suitable fuses on the HT and LT V/3 1 set
sides (Single phase) class 1.0/3 P
1800/5/5/1 A and
Current transformer for metering 300/5/5A 1pc
3.12 Class 1.0/5P10/5P20
& protect on each
(Differential l)
Protection Relay (O/C, E/F and
3.13 Each one 1l
Differential etc.)
Meters KWh, A, V and W (not
3.14 required if included in the relay Each one 1 lot
set)
195
 A with maximum demand
3.15 300A 2 pc
indicator assembly
3.16 MCCB of each type Each one 1 lot
H.T fuses for 11KV voltage 1 set
3.17
transformer (3 phase)
Indicating lamps (LED) and Bulbs
3.18 Each one 1 lot
of all types used
3.19 Push button Each one 1 lot

3.20 Control /selector switch Each one 1 lot

Aux. relay and aux. contactor of
3.21 Each one 1 lot
each type used
White lamp for each
Lamp indicators for 11kV outgoing 2 set
3.22 phase ( capacitor VT +
voltage (3 phase)
Neon lamps)
3.23 LV socket and plug 1 set
4. DC110V Battery & charger
4.1 Protection Relay Each one 1 lot
Meters A, V (not required if
4.2 Each one 1 lot
included on the LCD)
4.3 MCCB of each type Each one 1 lot
Indicating lamps (LED) of all types
4.4 Each one 1 lot
used
Printed circuit boards of control
4.5 Each type 1 lot
unit
4.6 5% of the total No. of battery cells Four (4) 1 lot

4.7 Electrolyte (10% of Total volume ) 1 lot

5. Inverter & Distribution panel
5.1 Protection Relay Each one 1 lot
Meters A, V (not required if
5.2 Each one 1 lot
included on the LCD)
5.3 MCCB of each type Each one 1 lot
Indicating lamps (LED) of all types
5.4 Each one 1 lot
used
Printed circuit boards of control for
5.5 1 set
inverter
6. Station LVAC Distribution panel
6.1 Protection Relay Each one 1 lot

6.2 Meters A, V Each one 1 lot

6.3 MCCB of each type Each one 1 lot

Indicating lamps (LED) of all types
6.4 Each one 1 lot
used

All kinds of lamps and tubes

7.1 10% each
including emergency lamps

196
 8. Fire Detection and Alarm System
Each type of automatic fire
8.1 Each two 1 lot
detectors
8.2 Each type of fire alarm devices Each two 1 lot
8.3 Each type of response indicator Each two 1 lot
Maximum
Line type of cable for heat detector length for
8.4
system longest
zone
Frangible elements for manual pull
8.5 10 PC
station

m) Recommended Operational Spare Parts for 5 years

The tenderer should recommend necessary spare parts for each substation and operation of five
year as a whole, the following quantities should be quoted with unit price:
(1) 33kV Metal-enclosed GIS Switchgear
(2) 33/11.5kV 31. 5MVA Transformer
(3) 11kV Metal-enclosed GIS Switchgear
(4) DC110V Battery, Charger and Distribution panel
(5) Inverter & Distribution panel
(6) Station LVAC Distribution panel
(7) Lighting
(8) Fire Detection and Alarm System
(9) SCS
(10) Others

n) Any special tools recommended for maintenance of circuit breakers, Transformer

and On load tap changer.

The above is only a guide and the manufacturer may offer, other items if necessary, or suggest
a set of recommended spare parts for normal operation for a period for five years.

Notes :
Any missing item, necessary for operation will be considered included in the tender.

Earthing trip for an adjoining each panel with the other will be provided with its dimensions
according to short circuit rating.

The Tools and Appliances for the equipment as per the itemized list given in the Bill of
Quantities (Volume-II) shall be provide as Firm items, which will be subject to Owner
confirmation during Contract execution stage.

197